< w> 0* ?
THE
GUIDE TO KUAN HUA
A TEANSLATION OF THE
U -TT-
KUAN HUA CHIH NAN
??
ESS.'VY ON TONE AND ACCENT IN PEKINESE
GLOSSARY OF PHRASES
L. C. HOPKINS
HM. Consular Service, China
FOURTH EDITION
S I-J A N G H A 1
KELLY & ^VALSH LIMITED
AND AT HONGKONG, \OKOIIAM\ AhD 8[NOArORK
19 07
QfDrncU Hniucraitg ffiibratg
Ht^ara, 2J*ni Inrk
CHARLES WILLIAM WASON
COLLECTION
CHINA AND THE CHINESE
THE GIFT OF
CHARLES WILLIAM WASON
CLASS OF 1876
1918
Cornell University Library
PL 1125.E6G57 1906
The guide to kuan hua :a translation of
guid
ill
3 1924 023 343 498
Cornell University
Library
The original of tiiis book is in
tine Cornell University Library.
There are no known copyright restrictions in
the United States on the use of the text.
http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924023343498
m m t
[DE TO KUAN HUA
By the same Author:
Demy 8vo. 82 pp. Cloth. Price $1.00.
"THE SIX SCRIPTS"
A TRANSLATION OF
Liu Shu Ku
^19 0CT %
THE
GUIDE TO KUAN HUA
A TRANSLATION OF THE ,
"KUAN HUA CHTH NAN"
ESSAY ON TONE AND ACCENT IN PEKINESE
GLOSSAEY OF PHRASES
L. C. HOPKINS
H.M. Consular Service, China
FOURTH EDITION
SHANGHAI
KELLY & WALSH, LmiTED, THE BUND & NANKISTG KOAD,
AND AT HO;fGKONG, TOKOHAKA AND SlffQAPOKE,
100 6
Ma^4(^
TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE.
Few foreign residents in China will, I suppose, challenge the
proposition that to speak of a man as a Sinologue is to think of him
as a fool.
Let me then hasten, in the interests of my publishers and
myself, to assure the gentle, the candid and the general reader, that
the perusal of this volume need leave no. one more foolish than h@
was before.
This firm confidence in the harmlessness of the present work'
may be had because from a sinologic standpoint " there is nothing
in it."
Whether the Chinese of antiquity said "hwei 7 c/uk" or "t^an 5
dam;" whence they came — these ancient but objurgatory speakers —
from Babylon, from Accad, or Assyria, and who they were, Chaldees
or Hittites, Proto-Medians or Ugro-Altaics, the lost Ten Tribes or
natives of some old-world Parish of' Stepney ; whether the / King is
a phallic gospel or a pocket dictionary ; where in the world Ta Ts'in
and T'iao-chih could have been ; and precisely how much remains of
Lao Tzu after being translated by Balfour and analysed by Giles,
— on these and kindred topics the Kuan Hua Chih Nan will throw
no gleam of light.
Mr. Goh's text is modern, work-a-day and practical, written in
excellent Pekinese of the present time, not of two hundred years ago,
and, by common consent of both northern natives and foreign students.
is as useful as it is icliotna'tic. Having heard a good many of my
friends express their opinion that the work merited an English
translation, and no one else showing any inclination to make it, I
uiidertook the task. I have added to the translation, — the Chinese
text of which I regret that I have not been able to obtain permission
to reprint, — a Glossary, and a monograph on Tone and Accent in
Pekinese, both of which I somewhat faintly hope may be found of
assistance at least to those who are entering on the study of this
unhappy language.
My sincere thanks are due to Messrs. Bullock andJoKDAN,
of H.B.M. Legation, Peking, and to the Revd. G. Owen, of that
citj', for their ungrudging and valuable assistance upon many doubtful
points that came to light in the compilation of the Glossary. Finally,
I am deeply indebted to Mr. W. H. Wilkinson, of H.B.M. Consulate,
Swatow, for seeing the whole work through the press, a labour which,
at all times irksome, must have been with the Glossary almost as
revolting as its preparation.
L. C. HOPKINS.
CONTENTS
Part I
„ II
„ III
„ IV •
Essay on Tone and Accent in Pekinese
Glossary of Phrases
Paoe
I
96
130
138
THE
GUIDE TO KUAJN^ HUA
A TRANSLATION OF THE "KUAN HUA CHIH NAN."
♦
PART I.
No. 1 «• What is your honoured surname ?
b. My poor surname is Wu.
a. May I ask your eminent Style ?
h. My humble Style is Tzu-ching.
a. How many distinguished brothers have you ?
b. There are three of us.
a. And what province do you come from, Sir ?
b. My lowly home is in the capital of Honan.
a. Is your residence situated inside the city ?
b. Yes, inside the city.
a. I am delighted to make your acquaintance, and I must
apologise for not having done so before.
No. 2 «• What is your venerable age now, Sir ?
b. I have wasted some sixty years.
a. The world has gone well with you ; you are quite robust, and
neither your hair nor bead are very grey.
b. Many thanks ! But my hair and beard hare tamed half
white already.
a. Well I am just fifty this year, and most of my beard has
turned before this.
NOi 3 ffl. What is your distinguished surname, and your noted name ?
b. My poor surname is Chang, my official name is Shou Hsien.
a. What is your distinguished place in the family ?
b, I am the eldest.
2 THE GUIDE TO KUAN KUA, PART I
a. And the honoured year of yonr birth ?
b. Oh, I am still very young, twenty-four this year.
a. What position do you hold, Sir ?
b. I am in business at T'ungohow and a friend of your esteemed
uncle, and for that reason I made a point of coming to present my
complements to you.
a. You are very kind ! May I inquire the name of yonr Firm ?
b. My little business is styled Hsin Ch'ang.
No. 4 a. I'm delighted to meet you again for I've been longing to see
you. I heard early this morning you had arrived, so I came on
purpose to inquire after you.
b. Thank you, I'm very much obliged. I should have come
to call upon you, but I only got here late yesterday evening and,
as none of my baggage is ready nor my boxes unpackod and I
haven't changed the clothes I was wearing, you'll excuse my not
returning your call till to-morrow.
a. Don't mention it !
No. 5 ■ a. How do you do ! 1 haven't seen you about these last few
days, and you've been a great deal in my thoughts. You inust
have been ill again I'm afraid.
b. Yes indeed I have.
a. You had just recovered the day I saw you, but you are not
looking yourself yet. I suspect you must have gone out and had
another attack.
b. I have caught a chill, and I feed headachy and sore all over.
a. Well, the only way is to send for a doctor and be properly
attended to.
No. 6 a- You really and truly cannot believe that man. Everything
he utters is a gross exaggeration.
b. You will have your trouble for nothing if you depend on
what he says. Haven't you found out the sort of man he is yet?
Why, he has a perfect passion for exaggeration and brags and
boasts to any extent ; if you put any faith in what he tells you,
you'll infallibly be let in.
No, 7 «• Have you quite recovered from your recent indisposition ?
b. Thank you, quite. My cough is not so troublesome.
a. You've had a long attack this time, and though you are well
again now, you must ask your doctor to give you a tonic, and keep
quiet and take care of yourself.
b. Yes ; thank you very much for your kind attention.
Note.— The Chinese text here requu-es some alteration.
PART I THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 3
No, 8 a. While you' re here yon should make yourself at home,— ^
don't stand on ceremony.
b. Thank you, you are Tery kind ! I'm not doing so.
a. That's all' right then ! And after this, if 1 want anything
I shan't hesitate to apply to you.
h. Anything you will let me do, I shall take as a favour.
No. 9 a,. Thank you very much for the tea you were so kind as to
send me yesterday. Its flavour is excellent.
h. Don't mention it. During my last visit to Ch'ung An,
I spent two days in the Bohea Hills, and just bought a little tea
there. You must excuse my sending such a trifling quantity.
a. Not at all ! Friendship is essenially a matter of feeling,
not one of £. s. d.
No. 13 a. Where are you off to ?
b. I want to make a call on Chang lao sliih.
a. Oh ! well I wish you would remember me to him and say
I don't forget him, tell him when he's got time I wish he would
drop in.
b. Some days ago, when I was with him, he was asking me
to remember him to yourself. He has not been able to go out on
account of his wife's being out of sorts.
No. 11 a. Everybody must be truthful in what they say.
b. There is no doubt about that. Anything like lying and
cheating, when people find it out, brings disgrace to a man.
a. Your view exactly coincides with my own opinion.
No. 12 a. Do you think this thing is real or imitation?
b. An imitation, I think.
a. J think so too, but as I can't tell for certain whether it is or
not, I don't like to say so.
b. No, you haven't examined how coarse the carving is, and the
want of lustre in the colouring.
No. 13 a. We are both out of employment at present ; what 's to be
done?
What do you think there is to be done ?
a. I think we are very hard up ; neither you nor I have any
capital to start a business on our own account, and we don't know
any trade to earn wages by as shopmen.
i THB GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. PART I
b. Well, if that's case, we must starve then !
a. But after all, Providence doesn't bring anybody into the
world to be quite destitute. We shall think of something by-
and-by.
No. 14 a. I should like to walk out there but I don't feel inclined to
go by myself.
b. I'd like a walk top, but it's dull without a companion, so
what do you say to our going together ?
a. Oh, if you would join me it would be very convenient to me.
No. 15 «. You speak in such a low tone that a great deal that you say
people don't hear distinctly.
b. I have by nature not a strong voice, and besides I don't like
bawling out loud at people, and so the sounds uttered are low.
a. But the pitch of the voice matters considerably in talking,
for if the pitch is right, it will be audible, naturally, and if the
enunciation is distinct, it follows that there will be nothing lost.
No. 16 a. Did you here what I said to him behind the screen just now ?
b. No, I didn't. I've been rather deaf lately.
a. Well anyhow, please don't on any account divulge it, as its
a secret.
b. Then I certainly won't go and do harm by talking.
No. 17 <"■ Do you understand Chinese?
b. A little, but the Amoy language is not much understood
elsewhere.
o. Chinese no doubt is difficult ; each place has its own dialect,
though Mandarin passes current throughout.
b. I am told that Mandarin itself has two pronunciations, — a
northern and a southern.
a. The accent in northern and southern Mandarin is different,
the pronunciation of the words is much the same.
No. 18 a- How do you do once more ! Do you remember me ?
b. Your face seems quite familiar, but I don't recollect where
we met. 1 must really apologise, but I don't like to address you
by name quite at randon).
a. What, have you forgotten our having taken wine together
at the same table, the year before last, at Chang Erh's place?
i. Now you mention it I do remember you ; you are Mr. Ho
Erh.
PART I THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 5
No. 19 a. How do you do ! I hope you are well. I want you to do
something for me.
b. Pray tell me what it is.
a. I recollect seeing in a newspaper two days ago mention
of a Mr. Chn, an admirable scroll-writer, whom I hear you know.
Might I ask you to introduce me to him.
b. Oh that will be easy enough ; I will not fail to oblige you,
don't trouble but leave it to me.
No. 20 a- Of all the celebrated spots we have visited, the scenery on
the hill we came to at noon to-day was best.
b. Yes, and I liked most the mile or so of path through the
bamboos outside the Halfway Lodge.
a. And best of all when, after following that path, we turned
a corner and sat on that big rock. How refreshing it was to
listen to the brook.
Note. — The Chinese text here requires some alteration.
No. 21 a- Did you return early or late from you trip on the lake
yesterday ?
b. It was after midnight when we got back.
a. I should think the moon last night was beautiful, and the
scene on the lake must have been especially fine.
b. The view by night is even better than by day, — quite
twice as fine.
No. 22 a. This temple is very large.
b. Very ; it is supposed to be the largest about here, and
behind there is a very high pagoda.
a. Can one go up it ?
b. It had a staircase to one storey which has been taken away
now, so one can't go up.
a . Why did they take away the stairs ?
b. Because so many people went up and were continually
doing'wanton damage.
No. 23 a- The moon was so beautiful last night before midnight that
I lay on the kang looking at the moonbeams shining on the
window, and couldn't bring myself to go to sleep.
b. However, when it grew late, the wind suddenly sprang up,
the sky wasifnll of dark, scudding clouds, and there was very
heavy thunder.
b THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. PART I
a. I suppose that was after I had gone to sleep, though
I know it was raining last night.
No. 24 a- How can you go out just now in this fierce sun and
dreadful heat ?
h. But I have important business ; I must go out.
a. Well, even if you have, you ought to hold on a while, and
wait till tjie sun goes down a bit and it is a little cooler, before
starting.
h. Very well.
No. 25 a. At daylight this morning, .when I got up and went out to
the rear, I saw a very thick frost on the roof.
b. Then there was a heavy frost last night ! That accounts
for my waking up about 4 in the morning, feeling very cold, and
wishing my cotton coverlet was not so thin.
No. 26 a- It is late; I think it must be 3 o'clock by now.
b. Just now I heard the clock go ding dong, — it seemed to
strike two.
*
a. I'm afraid that clock is not right ; I'll look at my watch.
The watch makes it three.
b. Then the clock is certainly slow.
No. 27 a. Which of the Four Seasons do you prefer ?
b. They each of them have their advantages.
a. Which do you like best ?
b. You needn't ask that I Who does not delight in the
flowers and fragrance of balmy Spring, and who does not
fear the heats of Summer and the chilis of Autumn, and worst
of all the great cold of Winter?
a. I like both Spring and Autumn.
No. 28 a- Where is the school I hear you go to?
b. It's that corner, — the doorway with the poster.
a. Who is the Master ?
b. His name is Mr. Chin.
a. How many school-fellows have you.
h. Not many.
No. 29 «• Have you read the Dynastic Histories ?
h. ISo, I have not.
PART I THE GUIDE TO KOAN HUA. 7
a. Educated people should not fail to read them ; it is by
them that one understands the rise and fall of dynasties, and the
virtues and vices of mankind.
b. What are you doing in caligraphy ?
a. Wang Yu-chin's writing copies.
b. Capital !
No. 30 a- What sort of a teacher is your Master ?
b. Very good ; he explains passages most carefully, he writes
a very pretty hand, takes a great deal of pains in correcting our
compositions, doesn't ignore the least merits we have, he's correct
in his own habits and strict about discipline.
a. With such a good Master as that, if you choose to take
pains, there's no fear of your not making progress in your studies.
No. 31 a. Mr. Priest !
b. In the name of Amita !
a. Is the head priest in ?
b. The head priest went out yesterday.
a. May I ask your name in religion ?
b. I am called Liao K'ung.
a. What is your lay name?
b. My lay name is Ku.
a. Yon've a large piece of land here : what a pity no one has
laid it out in grounds.
b. This land is no good ; the soil is so salt that nothing that's
planted will grow.
No. 32 a. To-day being your honoured father's birthday, I have come
for the purpose of offering my congratulations, and I've prepared
a small present which I beg you will do me the honour of
accepting. Pray don't decline it on any account. Would you
also kindly take me and present me to your father, to convey my
congratulations.
b. You are too kind ! I am really very much obliged to you
for your trouble.
No. 33 a- Oh dear, what a good-for-nothing child this is ! All day
long idling his time away, and doing nothing that's right.
b. Don't his father and mother look after him ?
8 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. PART I
a. If he's allowed to go on in this way, doing exactly as he
pleases, why he'll never stop at all.
b. I should advise them to bury hira alive and have done with
him.
No. 34 a. Whatever you do, in order to come to the front, you must
work hard to get on, and not be your own enemy.
b. That's all very well ; but I am satisfied if I don't neglect
my duties. I cannot do as some people do, and simply make
sudden displays of zeal, or cringe to people and do their dirty
work for them. I can't bring myself to do such miserable tricks.
No. 35 a- The Emperor is certain to be pleased with good public
servants, and as certain to be angry with the incompetent ; and
it rests with each individual what his own character shall be.
b. That goes without saying. It is beyond all doubt that
strict integrity brings understanding of public business, while if
a man has only ordinary abilities, and is in the habit of taking
money besides, he will soon have to go home and nurse the baby.
No. 36 a- The present members of the Central Government are men
of character and talents, and zealous in the discharge of their
duties ; the consequence is, that the provincial authorities follow
their good example.
b. An example is always required to be set and to be followed
respectively. If those in the higher ranks are not venal, their
subordinates dare not be extortionate.
No. 37 a- He came several times and I never took much notice of
him, but still he has the shameless effrontery to be always coming
here. He really is perfectly dead to all sense of right or wrong.
b. He's a bullying, cowardly blusterer, — I don't call him a
man. Don't ever take any notice of him, and then of course he
won't come.
No. 38 a. I wonder what family that girl belongs to that passed jast
now ; she is elegant and dignified too. To-morrow I shall make
a proposal on behalf of my relative. Yes, that is a really nice
girl.
b. I recognise her as one of Mr. Chang Erh's children. It
would be a suitable match, were you to speak on behalf of your
relative.
No. 39 ffl. That's a good child, that ! Up to working at night, and
able to make a living ; persevering, too, and trustworthy. One
can't help liking him.
PART I THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 9
b. You think so ? I consider him very idle. He's asleep as:
soon as it's dark. That's a question like the beancurd strung on
a horsehair, — not to be raised, as the saying goes. Quite puts
me out of temper.
NOi 40 «• I have always had so many benefits from you that I could
never, in any case, cease to be thankful, and now I've received
this further favour. I don't know how I am to repay your
kindness in being so good to me as you have been.
b. Oh, not at all ! There is no need for you to be so grateful
for this slight service.
NOi 41 «• When one's teeth are gone, one cannot chew one's food,
and it has to be stewed to a pulp. Don't have food done so
fearfully hard and tough that you can't eat it.
b. My teeth are better than yours. I can eat anything ;
tough or brittle it makes no difi'erence. I can even crack melon-
seeds with my teeth.
NOi 42 «. I want to ask yonr advice as to what should be done about
this. I am inclined, if he won't do as he's wanted, to speak out
fairly and squarely. What do you think 7
b. I tell you what it is. Your temper is too unyielding. It
would be better if you were more conciliatory. It never does to
be too hard upon people. When a man has confessed he is in
the wrong, that's enough. What is the use of never letting the
matter drop.
No. 43 o- Why is this cat always so lazy? The place swarms with
rats, but she never catches one. Better not feed her to-morrow.
b. The rats are the most terrible nuisance. One can't get to
sleep for their noise, and they gnaw everything to pieces. I don't
know what's to be done.
No. 44 «• There were two dogs over there coupled, and a girl with
her hand before her eyes who wouldn't look, but all the same
she did have a stealthy glance through her fingers. Bather
amusing, eh 1
b. After coming to a certain age the passions must be excited.
Modest as she may seem, do you suppose she feels no emotions ?
There is nothing to be surprised at her for.
No. 45 a. I was standing on the steps when all of a sudden he pushed
me backwards, and I nearly had a very bad fall.
b. What a mean brute ! He won't play any more such tricks
with me. If he provokes me I'll give him one unawares with my
whole strength, and send him away with something more than he
wants.
10 THE 6UIDK TO KUAN HBA. PARI U
PART II.
No. 1 «• May I ask you your name ?
b. With pleasure. My name is "Wang.
a. Where is your residence situated ?
b. My house is in the Tsung pu Hutung at the East Tan
P'ailon.
o. At which Yamen are you employed ?
b. I have a post in the Board of War.
a. To what do I owe the honour of your visit 7
b. I have come in order to make certain inquiries from you.
I am told the house in your western compound is to let. Is that
the case 7
a. Certainly, it is. Why, do you wish to take it 7
b. Yes, I was thinking of doing so.
o. You are too late ; I've already let the house.
b. Let it ! To whom ?
a. To a connection of my own.
b. Oh, very good. Well, have you any houses elsewhere 7
a. I have none, but a friend of mine has a house that he
wants to let.
b. Where is it 7
a. In the An fa Hutung, to the north of us.
b. How many rooms are there 7
a. Some thirty or more.
b. Thirty or more would be too many. I couldn't occupy
such a number.
a. But supposing you couldn't, you might take them all ; and
all that you didn't use yourself you might sublet to other tenants.
b. I being responsible for the rent ?
a. Quite so ; you being responsible for the rent.
b. But then I'm afraid I couldn't let the rooms at once ; and
I should have to pay the landlord his full rent every month.
a. Oh, I don't think yon need be under any apprehension
aboat that. At present, houses let easily enough.
PART II THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 11
b. Well, when I have finally taken the house, I hope you will
procure tenants for me for the rooms I don't uee.
a. That is quite feasible. If you will let me know, as soon
as you have finally taken the house, how many rooms you have
portioned off for letting, I can find tenants for you.
b. Very good then. But now, do you know how much the
rent is a month ?
a. Yes, my friend has told me it is 70 tiao a month.
b. Oh, that is too high.
a. It does sound as if it were too high. But you should
know that the house is really a very fine one indeed ; the com-
pound is large, the site very good, close to a main street, and
very convenient for shopping.
b. Well, if I take it, have I to pay tea-money ?
a. Yes, tea-money of course.
b. What, if I take it through you, must I still pay tea-money ?
a. Why, though you do take the house through me, and
there's no other Agent, you will have to pay tea-money all the
same. I'll tell you how it is. The tea-money you give doesn't
come to me, nor does my friend get it ; it is divided among all
my friend's servants.
b. Then how many payments are there for tea-money ?
a. One for tea-money, and one for rent.
b. Very well. Now I suppose I must have substantial security ?
a. You must, of course. Can yOu find one ?
b. Yes, I can.
a. What would your security be ?
b. Whatever is required.
a. Very good. And when would you like to go and look at the
house ?
b. I should like to go with you and look at it in a day or two.
a. Very well tten ; we will meet in a day or two.
b. Yes.
No. 2 «• May I inquire your name ?
b. With pleasure. My name is Li. I have not the pleasure
of knowing yours.
a. My name is Chao.
b. May I ask what part you come from ?
12 THB GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. PART II
a. Prom Kalgan.
b. And what is your object in visiting Peking ?
a. I have come to sell goods.
b. What goods have you brought to dispose of ?
a. They are furs.
b. Where are you lodging ?
a. At an inn in the Chinese city.
b. At which inn ?
a. The Ta Ch'eng inn on the West Brook.
b. How are prices ruling this year in the fur market ?
a. They are rather moderate this year.
b. I was told prices ruled very high some years ago.
a. Yes, some years ago the market rates were very high.
b. What was the reason of it ?
a. Simply that stocks were short.
b. Have you sold out all the stock you brought 7
a. No, not yet.
b. When you have sold out, do you take back cash, or a
return stock for sale ?
a. A return stock of goods.
b. Of what sort ?
o. Always Foreign and Canton Assorted.
b. Have you a shop in Ealgan ?
a, Yes, I have.
b. What name ?
a. The name is I T'ai.
b. At what house have you bought your stock for your previous
return journeys ?
a. That would all depend. I buy whosever goods suit best.
b. Very well now. I have a friend who has lately opened a
Foreign and Canton Assorted Goods house outside the Hata Men.
The stock has been laid in by himself from Canton, and the
prices are altogether lower than in the other houses ; so any
goods you buy in future you might get there.
a. What is the name of your friend's establishment 7
b. T§ Fa is the name.
a. Then it would be all right if I go to his place some day to
purchase, and mention your name ?
PABT II THE GUIDK TO KUAN HUA. 13
b. Yes, or I could go with yon some day,
a. That would be even better. May I ask, were you in
business once ?
b. Yes, I was.
a. What was your business 7
b. I kept a druggist's store.
a. In the Chinese city ?
b. In the Chinese city.
a. Do you still keep it ?
b. Oh no, I closed it seren or eight years ago.
a. Indeed, and what is your present occupation ?
b. I practise medicine at present.
a. In your practice do you merely receive patients, or do you
visit them as well ?
b. In the morning I receive, after noon I pay visits.
a. No doubt you find medicine better than trade.
b. Well no. There's no other advantage beyond that it has
not the same anxieties as trade.
a. Where is your residence, sir ?
b. I live in the Faofang Hutnng, East Ssil Pailou.
a, I shall come and call upon you soon at your house.
b. Thank you ! In a day or two I shall call also on you at
your hotel.
a. You are very kind. Any time yon are disengaged you
might come to my inn for a chat.
b. Yes ; then au revoir !
No. 3 a. Have you come from home, sir ?
b. Yes, from home.
a. You haven't yet fixed when you start, have you ?
b. Well, it will be in four or five days time, and I came to-day
on purpose to take leave of you.
a. It is exceedingly polite of you. Are you taking your
family too this time ?
b. Oh yes, I intend to take my family too.
a. Are you travelling in company or alone ?
b. In company.
a. Is your fellow traveller also in the Government service 7
14 THB GUIDB TO KUAN HUA. PABT K
b. He is. He's a recently nominated Assistant Sub-Prefect
by purchase, leaving the capital to serve his Expectancy.
a. And I suppose, as soon as you reach the provincial capital
you vyill take up your post ?
b. Probably. »
a. Is your appointment an Arduous Post ?
b. No, an Easy Post.
a. And what is the name of the man who is now acting there ?
b. It is a man named Chou.
a. Does he hold a substantive appointment ?
b. Yes. He has quite recently been appointed to a post too;
so when I reach mine, he will hand over charge and go and take
up his new appointment.
a. Well, I suppose for these few days you remain at home,
don't you ?
b. I do, yes.
o. Then during the next day or two I shall call at your house
to bid you good-bye.
b. You are very good. And now I must be getting back.
a. When you are home again, please give my kind inquiries
to your people.
b. 1 will do so.
No. 4 Servant. — If you please, Sir, Mr. Li has come to pay you a
New Year call.
a. Oh, aak him to come in, and show him into the library.
b. A Happy New Year to you !
a. The same to you.
b. Please take the seat of honour and I will make my New
Year's salute to you.
a. Oh, you are very good but let me take the will for the deed ;
sit down and drink some tea.
b. After you.
a. Is to-day the first day you have gone out 1
b. No, I began going out yesterday.
o. How many days calls shall you make ?
b. Oh, I shall have finished them all in five or six days.
a. And when do you mean to go into town ?
b. On the 8th.
PABT II THB GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 15
a. And when do yon come back r
b. After the holidays.
a. I suppose you haven't been to the Yamen at all since
closing last year.
h. Yes, I've been twice since then, to do one or two little
things.
a. You must be busy, I presume, as soon as you open again ?
h. Yes indeed ! We don't have a moment's spare time then.
a. No ; won't you have another cnp of tea ?
S. No more thank you, I must be going.
a. Oh, there's no hurry, it is quite early yet.
b. Well, but I have a good number of places to go to, and it
wouldn't do to be late.
a. Well then, thank you for your visit. When you get home,
please give my compliments and wish them a Happy New Year.
b. I will do so on my return.
No. 5 «• I heard yesterday that you have been promoted to a
Prefectship, and consequently I've come to-day to offer my con-
gratulations.
b. You are very kind, and I'm sure I am very much obliged to
you.
a. When are you likely to proceed to your new post ?
b. I can't fix beforehand, because I have to wait for the Chiefs
to send a deputy to take over my duties before I can hand over
, charge.
a. And after handing over charge, do you then go to your new
post, or must you first go to the provincial capital ?
b. I go first to the capilal.
a. What year did you take your Degree ?
b. I graduated in the year Hsin Yu.
a. And when did you take your Doctor's degree ?
b. In the Jen Hsii year.
a. Really, you have carried all before you,^-most talented,
upon my word.
b. You flatter me ; it is merely a piece of temporary good
luck, that's all.
a. Oh, you are too modest. May I ask where you have held
office?
16 TH1! GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. PART Xl
b. I was District Magistrate of Siiang Yiian hsien for a period ;
afterwards, when my term was up, I had the honour to be recom-
mended for promotion to my present post by the late Governor,
but for some years, I am ashamed to say, I have rendered no
service whatever.
a. Oh, don't say that ! With such great talents no wonder
that you are so fully appreciated in the higher circles. What is
more, it is very fortunate for the locality that you, who are like a
father to the people, have now been promoted to be Prefect.
b. You are quite too good !
o. Well, so soon as the day of your departure is fixed, I shall
come again to bid you good-bye,
b. Oh, I could not hear of such a thing. I am very much
obliged to you now, and I shall come to your office shortly to
return your call.
a. Thank you, thank you.
No, 6 o- I hear there was a rohbery committed by a number of men
at the Bank at the East end of the street some nights ago ; is it
true ? »
b. It wasn't a robbery, it was a fight.
a. What about 7
b. Why, some common fellow bad picked up a Bank Note
and went to the Bank to cash it, but the Bank people said,
" This is a lost Note, it has been advertised for already. Wait a
bit and we will send for the person who lost it, and you two can
settle it between yourselves personally ; he won't give you your
trouble for nothing, he is sure to pay you some Taels reward. "
But the fellow wouldn't agree. " The Note's mine, " he said, " and
all I know is that I've brought the Note to be cashed ; what you
say about somebody else having lost it is no business of mine, I'm
not going to have anything to do with all that ; jui^t you give
me the money and let's have no more about it. " But the Bank
wouldn't do it. Well, he was going to take back the Note itself,
but they wouldn't give him that either, and detained it. So he
goes away, and in the evening this fellow, with four others he
had got, goes to the Bank to have a row. No sooner had they
got there than they began to use bad language, got hold of one
of the attendants at {he counter, pulled him out and thrashed
hinii, and knocked down the counting-boards lying on the counter.
Well, just then the Police officials heard about it, and thinking
it was a Bank robbery, they took their men, carried off these
five fellows and sent them to the Magistracy. Afterwards, when
they found it was a case of fighting they ctngued all fire of
PART II THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 1'^
them on the East end of the street, and they are to have half
a month of it before they're set free.
No. 7 a. What's that man sitting in the compound with the bundle
want 7
Servant.— He sells cloisonne.
a. Do you know him 7
Servant. — No, I don't know him.
a. Then how do you know he sells cloisonne 7
Servant. — I was asking him just now, and he said he came
from a cloisonne makers.
a. Then is it cloisonne that he has wrapped up in his bundle ?
Servant. — That's it, I expect.
a. Well go and call him in.
Servant. — Come in, Mr. Manager.
a. You sell cloisonne, do you 7
b. Yes.
o. And what cloisonnd is it that you have in your bundle 7
b. It's a pair of cloisonne vases.
a. Open the bundle and let me have a look.
b. There, Sir ! what do you think of that pair of vases 7
a. Too large. Have you any rather smaller than that 7
b. We have in our place of business a smaller pair, — models,
not for sale, — but you can have ones made of any size you want.
a. I was merely asking, that's all. How many dollars would
a pair like that be 7
b. They would be over $100.
a. Have you any small things 7
h. What kind of small things do you mean ?
a. Such as small pen-vases, sealing-oil cases, candlesticks, —
small knicknacks like that.
b. All the different articles you mention are now being made
but they are not finished off yet.
a. Well, how long will it be before they are ?
b. Another four or five days.
a. Well, when they are finished, you might bring me several
kinds, and the pair of vases you keep for models in your place,
for me to look at, and if they suit me, I can order a pair of the
same pattern.
i8 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. i?ART it
i. Yes, I will bring them in a few days.
a. Where is your place of business ?
b. In High Street, Hon Men.
a. What name ?
b. Kuang Ch'eng.
a. Have you ever sold anything at this house before ?
b. No, we never have.
a. Well, this pair o£ vases is too large for my liking, you can
take them away again.
b. Yes ; excuse my leaving you, Sir.
a. Good-day to you.
No. 8 «. Is your master at home?
Servant. — Yes, Sir.
a. Go in and tell your master that my name is Hsii, and
I live at the Hou Men, and that I have something I wish to
speak to him about.
Servant.— Yes, Sir My master begs you will step in to the
lil)rary, Sir.
b. How do you do, Sir ; glad to see you agam.
a. The pleasure is mutual ; and how have yon been ?
b. Quite well, thank you; hare you?
a. Yes, thank you very mach.
b. Have you been anywhere since we last met ?
a. Indeed I have ; I've been away for some time.
b. Where did you go ?
a. Beyond the Wall, to receive my rents.
b. Ah!
a. I have called on you to-day, Sir, because I have something
to consult you about.
b. What is it?
a. A friend of mine, who lives to the west of the city, owns
a few hundred acres, with an orchard and a vegetable garden,
and having at present occasion for ready money, he has asked
me to mortgage this land for him, and so I have come to ask you
about it. If you care to take it on mortgage, I can arrange it
for you.
b. Is he at present farming the land himself or has he a
tenant ?
PART II THE OUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 19
a. He farms it himself. .
b. And how much does he want to raise on it?
a. A thousand taels.
b. Then I'm afraid I couldn't find so much as that.
a. How much could you manage ?
b. Well I might manage some five or six hundred taels.
a. On that point let me go back and speak to him, will you ?
6. But now — for how many years does he want to mortgage ?
a. I was asking him about that, and he said there was no
occasion to specify in writing the length of the mortgage in
years, but the best way would be to provide that receipt of the
money shall redeem the mortgage.
b. There are objections to not stating the length of the term
of years, because if in the course of the next few years I am
given a provincial appointment, I shall require the sum, and
consequently the length of the mortgage must be expressed.
a. Ah, then I would see him about that. How long should
you think it will probably be before you got a provincial appoint-
ment ?
b. I should think about five or six years.
a. I fancy if I consulted him about inserting five or six years
he would be pretty certain to agree.
b. Then there are the Title Deeds ; have you seen them ?
a. I have.
b. How many stamped Deeds are there and how many un-
stamped ?
a. Two stamped and two unstamped.
b. Very well, will you go back and talk the matter over with
him, and if he's willing to deal at that figure and also to say for
five or six years in writing, we will settle the matter.
a. When the matter has been finally arranged, you will want
to go and look at the land ?
b. Well it's this way : if you will agree to give first-rate
security guaranteeing that the transaction is perfectly in order,
why then I needn't view the land first.
a. The transaction is perfectly in order, for that I can produce
first-rate security.
b. In that case then I will take your word for it, and after we
have completed all the arrangements I will go to the place with
him and have a look at it,
20 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. PAKT II
No. 9 Servant. — If you please, Sjr, Mr. Hsii, the Manager of the
Ta Heng piece goods shop, has come and says he wishes to see
you on business.
a. Go and ask him to come in ; show him into the drawing-
room.
Servant. — Yes, Sir My master begs you will step into the
drawing-room, Sir.
a. Well, Mr. Hsii, how do you come to be disengaged like this ?
b. I came to see if I could see you and have a few words with
you.
a. Yes ; won't you sit down ?
h. After you, Sir. You haven't been out, have you. Sir, these
few days ?
a. !No I have not, because I haven't been very well.
b. But you are all right now, I hope.
a. Yes, quite.
b. I came to borrow some money from you, Sir.
a. How much do you want ?
b. Not less than Tls. 500, it would have to be.
a. Are you getting some more great bargains ?
b. No, Sir, it is a shop that I am buying the goodwill of.
a. What sort of shop ?
b. A cash bank.
a. How many frontages has it ?
b. Two.
a. Whereabouts is it ?
b. In the Chinese city here, — west end of Pa Pao Street.
a. Whose was it before?
b. It belonged to a southern man before.
a. Was it closed before the goodwill was sold, or how ?
b. No, it isn't closed, but the proprietor is an Expectant
District Magistrate who has lately been selected for a post, and
as he must go off on service and has no brothers or relations to
look after the business, he is obliged to sell the goodwill.
a. And what did you pay for it ?
b. The price was 1,000 taels.
a. Does that include fittings as well ?
b. Yes, fittings and all are included,
PART II THE GUIDE TO KUAH HUA. 21
a. Have you paid over the amount ?
h. Yes.
a. Then what you want now is money for the business ?
h. Exactly. I have 500 taels in hand at present, but that's
not enough for my requirements and I must have 500 more.
a. Ah ! well I will lend you 500 taels.
h. I am very much obliged to you ; and you will name your
own figure for what the rate for interest is to be.
KOTB. — Notice Tso'>:-cli'ing, written incorrectly here and in No. 24 Tso*-7isiaiiff.
a. What are you talking of? How can yon mention such a
things as interest between such friends as ourselves because you
require this small sum ; if you pay interest I won't lend it you I
b'. Well, I will do as you wish.
a. Thank you ; and what was the name of this shop ?
b. Its name was Te Ho.
a. After taking it over, do you change the name ?
b. Yes.
a. What do you mean to change it to ?
b. I was going to make it Su Ch'eng ; what do you think
of it?
a. A very good one. Are you acquainted with cash-banking
business ?
b. No, I don't understand about it, but my nephew has learnt
cash-banking, and I mean to set him up in this shop to carry on
the business.
a. Capital ! And when do you intend to start the concern ?
b. It won't be before early next month.
a. When you do I shall come and offer my good wishes.
b. You are too good ! But I must be going back.
a. Why should you hurry ; sit down again for a while.
b. No, I can't, for I've work to do in the shop.
a. Well, I will send the money to your shop to-morrow
evening.
b. Yes, yes.
a. Then you are off home now ?
b. Yes, pray go indoors again.
22 THE GUIDE TO KDAN HUA. PART 11
No. 10 Servant. — If you please, Sir, Lin, the carpenter, is here and
would like to see you.
a. Tell him to come in.
Servant. — Mr. Lin,- my master bids you come in.
b. Are you quite well. Sir ?
a. Quite well ; are you ?
b. Quite well, thank you, Sir.
a. How it is I haven't seen you at all for some time ?
b. I've been home on a visit.
a. On what business ?
b. I went home to get in the harvest.
a. And what sort of a harvest is it in your part of the world ?
b. Very near a full crop.
a. How much land do you farm ?
b. I farm something over a ch'ing of land.
a. How much piculs of grain was your yield this year ?
b. A hundred piculs.
a. Now that you've come back, have you undertaken any
works ?
b. Not yet. I came to see you to-day because there's a job
I want to undertake, but I've no one to recommend me, and so
I thought I would beg you to give me a recommendation.
a. Where is the place ?
b. Why, you know Mr. Chiang, in the Western city, is going
to bnild a house, and I should like to undertake the job.
a. I've been told Mr. Chiang has had a number of people to
look at it, but I don't know if anyone has decided to do the work.
b. Quite right. Sir. I hear three men have been shown it ;
two of them wanted 8,000 taels, and one 7,500, which Mr. Chiang
wasn't willing to give, so the matter is still open.
a. Very well, if you take the contract, of course you must
offer better terms than the others.
b. Of course; if I took the contract I would not only do the
work several hundred taels cheaper, but the workmanship would
certainly be subtantial, — no scamping whatever.
a. Well, look here, I can easily mention you, but there's one
thing, and that is, that I'm told Mr. Chiang's intention is, after
he has finally decided, and signs the Agreement, to pay down
}l£(,lf the amount at once, and to wait until the work is done before
PAKT il THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 23
giving the other half, — now can you find that amount in the
meantime ?
b. Yes, I know half the sura will be received in the first
instance, and I find on reckoning up that I can find the amount,
because I've a Friend who keeps a brickkiln, and hewill willingly
let me have bricks and tiles on credit till the works are finished.
Besides that, my wife's younger brother keeps a timber-yard with
a very large stock of timber which I may use as I like, also on
credit. The half of the money, which I should receive, would
only be to provide stone and lime and pay all the workmen's
wages. I reckon I shan't be far out.
a. Very good then, to-morrow I will go and see Mr. Chiang
and tell him about you.
b. If you will, Sir, I shall be very much obliged to you, When
shall I come and hear from you. Sir ?
a. Come the day after to-morrow and hear my message.
b. Yes, Sir ; then I'll be going back now.
a. Very good.
No. 11 a. When did you come ?
h. I came once before, and hearing you weren't in I went off
somewhere else again, and when I came back just now, they
told me you hadn't returned yet, so I just waited here until
you did.
a. Then I've kept you waiting.
b. Oh, don't mention it. Where is it you've been to ?
a. I've been out of the city to have a look at the crops on the
country.'
b. The present crop is well forward, I suppose.
a. Yes, it is.
b. This autumn's harvest promises well then ?
a. From what one can see at present, this year's harvest will
certainly be a fine one.
b. Did you watch the farm-labourers at work ?
a. Yes ; when I went they were all hoeing away, but at noon
they all went home for their midday meal, so I found a big tree,
and took it easy under its shade for a while, watched the drovers
and shepherds a bit, and then, when I had got cool enough,
I strolled back home.
b. Upon my word you know how to enjoy yourself.
24 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. PART 11
a. Enjoy myself ! It is simply this, that it's very dull sitting
indoors, and if I take a siesta, I'm uncomfortable when I wake,
so the best thing to do is to go out for a stroll.
b . Quite a constitutional exercise, really !
a. Nonsense ! Did you call to-day because you had some-
thing to speak to me about ?
b. Yes, I did ; I'm in a difficulty and I want you to help me
out of it.
a. What is it?
&. Well it is this, — my brother wants all of a sudden to
set up a separate establishment.
a. Why, have not you and your brother always been very good
friends ? What has made him suddenly take up this notion ?
b. I really don't know what the reason is. I think most
likely he has been prompted to it by other people, or he wouldn't
have wanted to set up for himself.
a. Amongst us relations and friends it is impossible that
anyone would cause an estrangement between you and your
brother.
b. Of course none of our relatives and friends could have
urged him to set up for himself, but I know he has made some
new friends lately, and not particularly desirable ones, and I
think it must be they who have egged him on.
a. Then how do you want me to act !
b. I came because you have always got on well with my
brother, and I thought I would ask you to bring him into your
house one of these days and remonstrate with him, — the thing
is to succeed in preventing him.
a. Oh, there would be no difficulty about getting him in and
remonstrating with him, but the thing is this, although we have
generally got on well together, unfortunately your brother has
such a queer temper that I can't answer for his listening to me.
What is to be done if he won't?
b. If he positively will not listen to advice, why there is no
help for it, and he must have his own way and set up for himself.
a. And supposing he insists on doing so, what division do
you propose to make ?
b. Well, our house-property consists of two dwelling-houses
and two shop-premises. The Title Deeds of the dwelling-house
in the Western city, and the shop-premises in the, Chinese city,
are both held as securities elsewhere, but the Deeds of the house
we are living in and of our shop, are not. I will give him these
PAKT II THE GTJIDB TO KUAN HUA. 25
two properties, and besides, he can take away what he desires
of the household effects and morahles, — I shan't make any
objection whatever.
a. Well, that is exceedingly fair ; none of your friends and
relations can possibly have any criticism to pass upon you.
No. 12 a- How is it I haven't seen you at all for some
time?
h. I went home for the harvest.
a. And what sort of a harvest is it this year ?
h. Well, pretty fair.
a. How much land do you farm?
b. Oh, I haven't much, just over one ch'ing.
a. How many piculs of grain was your yield this year ?
b. Over 100.
a. That's more than last year then.
b. Yes, last year it was just 60, so the yield is over 40 piculs
more this year.
a. You were away a good long time, weren't you ?
b. Why yes, two months and more.
a. What, all that time at home !
b. I had a lawsuit, and I sold some land.
a. With whom did you have your suit?
b. It was with a neighbour of ours.
a. What was it about ?
b. Well, I have some acres of lowlying land, which are under
water every summer during the heavy rains, and so I haven't
farmed them for the last few years, but just let them lie fallow.
Now this land of mine abuts on the land of a man called Yii,
and, as I said, I haven't cultivated it for the last few years,
and bit by bit several mou of it have been encroached on by him.
Being always away, I didn't know of it until this time when
I went back and heard from an old farm-hand of ours. Then
I went to the place and looked for myself, and sure enough
he had appropriated my land. Well, I went to see this man
Yii, and asked him about the matter. He denied it altogether.
So then I went to the Yamen and lodged a complaint against
him, and when the Magistrate had gone into the case, he ordered
him to restore me the land he had appropriated, and then
I sold it.
26 THE GUIDK TO KUAN HUA. PART II
a. Ah ! Now do you keep the grain you get in every year
for your own consumption, or do you sell it ?
b. We don't keep it all, — say some 30 or 40 piculs, — the rest
we sell.
a. And where do you sell it ?
b. A few It from where we live there's a large market-town
with a market every five days, and we load beasts with the grain
and send it to be sold there.
a. And when it is at this place, do you sell it at a corn-
dealer's, or to individual buyers in the market ?
b. To the latter as a rale.
(I. Do you sell it them yourself ?
b. No, it is sold by the salesmen.
a. Are they licensed by the Government ?
b. Yes, they must all have a License given by Government
before they can be salesmen.
a. And the measures they use, are they all fixed by the
Government too ?
b. Yes, they are.
a. Then where does the salesman's profit come from ?
b. He gets his Saleman's Fee.
n. Does the salesman fix the market-price?
b. Oh no.
a. Who does?
a. No one does. Speaking broadly it is like this: if on a
particular day there is much grain brought, the market-rate
naturally drops, if there's not much, it naturally rises. The
thing is a matter of course, a market-rate isn't decided before-
hand by anybody.
H. Yes, I see now.
No, 13 "• I came to ask you about something.
b. What is it 7
a. You have an orchard, haven't you, in the Western Hills ?
b. Yes, I have one.
a. What sized one is it 7
b. Over 50 mou.
a. Do you gather the fruit every year and sell it yourself, or
do you make over the trees to some other person on contract 7
PART U THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 27
b. Some years ago I gathered and sold the fruit myself ; the
last few years I have made it orer on contract.
a. To whom ?
b. To a General Dealer's called Shun I, at Hai Tien.
a. Well, the reason I came to see you to-day is that a friend
of mine has opened a Dried Fruit Shop in the western City, and
he has several times asked me if I would arrange this matter
of a Fruit contract for him, so knowing you had an orchard,
I came to ask you. Should you be willing to make over the
trees to him next year on a contract, I would bring you together.
b. 1 have no objection to it if he wishes for one.
a. He also told me to inquire as to what the conditions of
the contract would be.
b. Then your friend is not in the business ?
a. You are right ; he has not been before. This is his first
venture in that line.
b. Well, the conditions of a Fruit contract are not many.
When the fruit is ripe, I go with him to look at the orchard, and
afterwards we come to an agreement as to the price of the contract,
and after we have settled that, and the money is paid, the fruit
for the year is his.
a. And after the contract is concluded, there has to be a
watcher, hasn't there ?
b. Of course ; you ttiust get a man to be in the orchard day
and night watching.
a. Do you and I get this watcher for him, or does he do that
himself ?
b. Just as he likes ; if he asks us to get him, why we can ;
if he prefers to get a man himself, there's no difficulty.
a. Isn't the watcher likely to steal the fruit and sell it '!
b. Well, it is like this ; in case it's a man that I get, I have
to give a guarantee of course, and if there is any stealing and
selling of fruit, then I am solely responsible.
a. And the watcher is given his monthly wages and nothing
else?
b. Just his wages. Only the contractor for the fruit has to
buy the matting, planks, ropes, poles, etc. for putting up a
matshed for him, but when the matshed is taken down he can
take them all back again.
a. And what ought to be done with any fruit that may drop
from the tree ?
28 THB GUIDB TO KUAN HUA. PART 11
b. Well, if it is not much and falls in the ordinary way, it is
put on the ground, and the contractor is told of it any time that
he goes there, but if by any chance there should happen to be
a gale or a hailstorm, and the windfall should be very large, the
watcher must at once go and inform the contractor, so that he
can go and collect it.
a. Yes ! well I will return and let my friend know all you have
told me, and if he has any message 1 will come and see you again.
b. Very good.
No 14. a. Liu Ts'ai !
b. Sir !
a. The clock in the study won't go. Go presently to
the Hsiang Sheng Watchmakers' shop, and ask Mr. Hsii, the
manager, to come round and repair it.
b. Yes, Sir.
b. Excuse my troubling you, gentlemen ?
c. Ah, it's you, — please to take a seat.
b. My master has sent me to ask Mr. Hsii, the manager, to
go to his place and repair a clock of his.
c. Whose house are you in ?
b. Mr. Fu's.
c. Of Mien haa Lane ?
b. That's it.
c. May I ask your name ?
b. Mine is Liu ; what is yours, please ?
c. Hsii.
b. Ah, you are Mr. Hsii the manager, then ! I hope you will
befriend me now and then.
c. And the same with yourself. Is Mr. Chu still the butler
at your place ?
b. No, they have changed.
c. Who have they taken on ?
b. It's a Mr. Fan.
c. How was that then ; did Mr. Chu give up his place ?
b. That's it, he left.
c. What was the reason of that ?
PAET II , THE GUIDK TO KUAN HUA. 29
b. On account of his health.
a. What was his complaint 7
b. Well, he never was strong, and then he smoked opinm.
This year he suddenly left it off, but before he had given it up
altogether he fell ill, and got vporse and worse every day until at
last it became downright consumption, and he wasn't able to do
anything, so he left his situation and went home to try and get
cured.
c. Ah ! And can you tell me whether it is only to repair a
clock, or are there watches to repair too.
b. Master said, to mend a clock, but he didn't mention any
watches to be repaired. All the same, if you take my advice,
you'll take your watch-mending things along with you, there
might possibly be one to repair perhaps.
c. Very well, then let us be going.
b. Please to take a seat in the study, Mr. Manager, while
I go in and tell Master.
c. Certainly.
a. How do you do Mr. Hsii ?
c. Quite well, thank you ; and you, Mr. Fu, how have you
been?
a. Thank you, quite well. How is business ?
c. Well, pretty fair, I'm much obliged to you.
a. Are you working at night now ?
c. Yes, Sir, we are.
a. And how many assistants have you in yoflr shop now ?
c. Just at present, four.
a. And how many apprentices ?
c. Two apprentices.
a. All advanced enough to work at the table ?
c. One is, but the others are new-comers and can't yet.
a. And are you working every day in the shop ?
c. No, I can't be working in the shop all the time ; mostly
I'm out attending to business.
a. What amount of money does the work you do at present
every month represent ?
c. Just now in a month, — Well, it's about 400 tiaos worth or bo.
30 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HtJA. PART II
a. More than 400 tiaos worth ! Why that's a good deal.
c. Pretty fair, that is all; but very different from what it used
to be.
a. How much then used you to do in a month formerly ?
c. In former days we did quite 700 tiaos worth.
a. Really, so much as that !
c. Yes, at that time fully as much as that.
a. Well, I sent for you to-day to have a look at this clock and
see what is the reason it won't go.
c. I will look and see. The chain is broken.
a. It will have to be replaced by a new one then, won't it ?
c. No, there's no need for that; I will take the chain away to
the shop and rejoin it, and bring it back afterwards and put it in.
o. Ah, that will be better. Will you have some tea ?
c. After yon, Sir.
a. Tell me, in your business how many years arc you learning ?
c. Weare six years learning our business.
a. Do you have to sign a written Agreement ?
c. Yes, we do.
a. And does an apprentice sign his Agreement as soon as ever
he begins to work at the table ?
c. No, Sir, he must be tried for a year first, and if he is a
good apprentice, then he signs an Agreement.
a. And after he has finished serving his apprenticeship, does
he remain and practice his trade in the same shop, or does he then
go elsewhare to do so ?
c. He can do as he like about that ; if he wishes to remain
working in the same shop, his wages are paid him at the same
rate as an Assistant ; if he doesn't, and wants to go elsewhere as
an Assistant, he can.
a. I see, yes. Oh, and have you bought mc the Alarum I
asked you to get me last time ?
c. Yes. I made inquiries for you at all the shops in the city
here, and there were none, but a man in our trade has gone to
Tientsin lately, and I have asked him to try and find one at the
Foreign stores there, and if there is one, I will bring it for you
on his return.
a. I'm really very much obliged to you.
c. Not at all. And now 1 must be going back. Good-day to
you, Sir.
PART II THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 31
a. You are off home again then ; much obliged to you for your
trouble in coming.
c. Thank you, thank you ?
No. 15 o. Have you come from your house, Sir?
b. Yes.
a. How is it I haven't seen you these last few days ?
b. I've been away shooting,
o. With whom ?
b. With a neighbour of ours.
a. Where did you go to shoot ?
b. To the Eastern Hills.
a. When did you come back ?
b. Last night.
a. What sort of bag did you make ?
b. We shot some pheasants and hares, and also a wild boar.
a. Why then, you had good shooting this time.
b. Yes, the shooting was good enough, but still we had a
pretty hard time of it.
a. In what way ?
b. Well, we were each of us riding our own horse, and when
we got to within a mile or two of the Eastern Hills, there was a
market-town, so we found an inn in the place, where we put up.
Next day, after we had finished our meal, we baited our two
horses at the inn, and then shouldered our guns and strolled off
to the hills. When we got there we only shot some pheasants
and hares at first, but towards sundown a wild boar suddenly
broke cover. We both fired and killed him. Where we were,
there was nobody to be hired to carry the beast on a pole, so we
dragged him back to the inn, and when we had reached it, we
slung him on to one of the horses, and we ourselves took it in
turns to ride the other. When we got home we were so tired we
couldn't move. Pretty hard work, wasn't it ?
a. Well, you had hard work, but still you had some shooting.
Now a connection of ours went out shooting some days ago, and
not only shot nothing, but he lost his horse.
b. How did he come to lose his horse, out shooting ?
a. Well, he told me he rode a horse to the Northern Hills to
shoot, and tied it up to a tree at the foot of the hill, while he
shouldered his gun and went up it in search of game. He
searched for a long time but not a single thing could he see, so
32 THB GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. PAET 11
down he came, and when he got to the bottom and looked, his
horse was gone. Just then it suddenly began to snow, and he
searched for a time, knowing as it was, all about the place, but it
was nowhere to be seen. Well, by this time it had got dark, so
he found a ruined temple, and there he made shift to spend the
night. Next morning he felt very unwell, but there was no help
for it, and he managed to get as far as the Yamen and reported
the thing to the authorities. The official there asked him about
the way he lost his horse, and then said, " I will send a man to
make a thorough search for your horse, and if he has been stolen
by any of the people of the place, he is sure to be found sooner or
later ; but if he's been stolen by some passer-by, then he luori't
be recovered ; meantime you had better go home. " So he hired
a donkey and came back, and after reaching home he grew worse
and hasn't recovered yet. Wasn't that wretched luck ?
No. 16 a- Haven't you heard that our friend Feng Tzu-yiian is dead?
b. No, I've not ; when did he die?
a. I was told this morning he died last night.
b. Do you know from what illness 1
a. I'm told it wasn't a natural death.
b. How did it happen ?
a. It is said he took opium.
b. What did he do that for ?
a. The story I've heard is this. A friend of his in the country
came to Peking last year with several thousand taels, which he
gave into his care, and then went home. Well, this year he came
up to town again and asked f(ir this money, whereupon Tzri-yiian
denied having got it. So the man went lo the Yamen and entered
a charge against him. When Tzii-yiian was summoned to the
Yamen and interrogated, he denied the whole story, and said,
" If I had kept his money, there must have been some evidence of
it in writing; now he has none whatever. It is an attempt to
extort money from me on his part. " The Magistrate then asked
this man whether or no he had any written evidence. >"No, " he
said, " we were on such good terms that none was drawn up at
the time. " " Well, " said (he Magistrate, " since there is no
evidence in wriiing, — merely your verbal statement, — I can do
nothing for you in the matter, " and so the parties left the Court.
The other man was so angry at this that he went home and, not
very many days after, hanged himself. On the District Ma-
gistrate coming to hold the inquest, they shook out from the dead
man's leggings a Dying Declaration, which was an accusation of
Tzii-yiian; and when Tzii-yiian heard of the scandal this had
caused, he got alarmed and took opium.
tAIli" li THE GUIDE TO KUAN flUA. 3^
b. What you mention reminds me that this Spring I heard
vaguely of his having gone to law with some one ; 1 suspect it
was about this.
a. Probably it was that.
6. There is something else too which very likely you don't
know of. Before we were acquainted with him he had already
been guilty of a piece of rascality.
a. What was that ?
b. Why, you know he used to keep a cash-bank.
a. Certainly, he did.
b. During that time a friend of his, from one of the provinces,
lived by his leave in these premises, where he afterwards was
taken very ill, and before his death he said to him, " In tliat box
there are more than a thousand taels. You and I have been
friends all this time, and I hope after my death you will send all
my money and things back to my family for me. " He promised
to do so at the time. However, after the man's death, he changed
his mind about it, and only sent back the man's effects to his
family, but secreted these thousand and odd taels, and when the
man's family afterwards wrote and asked him whether the de-
ceased had left any money, he wrote back and said he had not.
Later on he fell ill, and while he was at home nursing himself, one
of his assistants in the shop bolted with several hundred taels, and
on his recovery he closed his business.
a. From whom did you hear that ?
b. I heard it from an apprentice who had learnt his trade in
his bank.
a. Well, having committed such a rascally thing as he had
previously done, he should have reformed instead of committing
another one, and now he has brought his own death on himself.
b. But don't you know, all these unscrupulous people are
generally like that : as soon as they see money, they immediately
throw all thoughts of retribution to the winds. The fact is, that
his death by taking opium simply serves him right.
No. 17 a. What did that man Ma come in just now to see you about ?
b. He said he wanted to take something out of pawn, and
asked me to lend him a few dozen tiao, and besides that he asked
me if I could find him a place in the service of some official.
a. And did you promise to do so 7
b. Yes, I did. I told him this, — I said, " I've no ready
money by me just now ; wait until I go and borrow some for you,
6
M tMe GUlbE TO klAN HUA. tARl* ii
and if I succeed in getting it, you take it, and if I cnn't, then you
had better find some other means. With regard to getting you
a place with an official, I will certainly recommend you as soon
as one offers. "
a. Jf you will take my advice, you won't interest yourself for
him about either of these things,
b. What?
a. He certainly Tron't pay you back if you borrow money for
him.
b. How do you know that ?
a. I know he won't repay you in the future money you lend
him now, because before he hasn't paid other people money he
has borrowed from them.
b. He is hardly likely to fail to pay these few dozen liao, I
think.
a. He wouldn't pay a few tiao, let alone a few dozen. And
besides, he doesn't really borrow this money to take a thing out
of pawn with.
b. What in it for then if it's not for that ?
a. It's to gamble with.
b. What, does he gamble ?
a. He's Yery fond of it indeed, he is in gambling-houses all
day long.
b. Who are there at his home ?
a. His mother is dead long ago, but his father is still Hying,
b. Has be no brothers and sisters 7
a. He has no brothers older or younger than himself, he has
one elder sister, who married long ago.
b. Hasn't he married yet ?
a. No, not yet.
b. What age is his father 7
a. He must be over seventy now.
b. What is he ?
a. He's a carpenter by trade. He used to keep a small
timber yard, which he gare up afterwards ; now, he depends
altogether on working for other people to make enough money
to get along with.
b. And this man himself, what can he do 7
a. He can't do anything whatever, except spend money.
PART II THB aUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 35
b. Has he learnt no trade tben 7
a. Yes, he learnt for a time.
b. What did he learn ?
a. He was in a druggist's store learning the business, but
after he had been there a month the manager discharged him,
b. What for ?
a. For being gluttonous and lazy, and for not keeping the
rules of the establishment.
b. Well, and afterwards did he do nothing else ?
a. Yes, afterwards he went for a time into service with an
official.
b. What official ?
a. Someone holding a provincial appointment some years ago,
who came, to Peking for Audience and stayed in a Club in the
Chinese city, to whom he was recommended as a servant. This
gentleman used to send him out every day to buy all sorts of
curios and objects of art, and he made no end of money ; in two
months he had made a good many hundred taels. The gentleman
found ont this failing of his afterwards and dismissed him.
Now, I suppose, these hundreds of taels are all spent, and so he
comes to you to borrow mnni-y for him, bnt if you take my advice,
you will neither borrow money nor find a place for him. If you
do the one, he won't pay yon, anil if you do the other, he will
certainly do you no credit; far better make up your mind to do
nothing for him.
b. Well, from what you say, he will come to grief when his
father dies.
a. I prophesied it of him long ago, that after bis father's
death he was certain to take to begging.
b. Well, what reply am I to give him about these two
applications of his to me ?
a. Just tell him that you are not able to borrow the money,
and that there's no situation to be had.
b. Very well, I will speak to him as you say, and prevent him
from expecting tbem.
No. 18 «. Li Ch'i!
b. Sir!
a. Take this set of volumes to the Pao Wen T'ang, the
booksellers in the Liu Li Ch'ang, and tell Mr, Yii, the manager,
to have jt fitted jn boards ; and also give him this list, and tell
36 THE GUIDK TO KUAN KCA. PART II
him to take one set ot volumes of each of the works mentioned in
it, and to give them jon for the time to bring back_ for me to
look at.
b. Yes, Sir ; if you have nothing pise for me I could go at
once, then ?
o. I've nothing else, you had hotter go now.
b. Excuse my troubling you, gentlemen ; is Mr. Yii, the
manager, in the shop ?
c. Yes ; please come in and take a seat.
b. Excuse me, Mr. Yii, for troubling you.
d. Ah ! Mr. Li, are you come from your place ?
b. Yes, I am.
d. Have you come on business ?
b. Why yes ; my master told me to bring this set of volumes
and get you to fit it in boards ; and then, you see this list here,
I was to tell you to take -one set ot volumes from each of the
works mentioned in it and give them me to take back for the
time for him to look ati
d. Then I'll just put this set of volumes into boards. We
have two of the books in this list in the shop ; all the others I
must go elsewhere to get.
b. Very well, if you'll give me the two you have now in the
shop first to take back and go and procure all the rest elsewhere,
I will come back again here in a few days and fetch them, eh ?
d. There's no occasion, I think, for you to come here and fetch
them ; in a few days, if I can procure them, I will bring thera
myself to your place.
b. Yes, that will be better still.
d. Here are these two sets wrapped up for you.
b. Well, I will say good-bye to yon.
d. Good-day.
b. Please, Sir, I gave Mr. Yii that set of volumes and told
him to fit them in boards, — and they've only got two of the books
you wanted in- the shop, and they have given me two sets from
them to bring back for you to see, and the rest Mr. Yii must go
elsewhere for, and in a few days, if he can procure them, he will
bring them himself.
PART ir THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 37
a. Very good ; put those two sets in the book-shelves for the
present.
d. Excuse my troubling you, Mr. Li.
h. Ah, Mr. Yii, have you just come into the city 7
d. Yes, I've just come in.
b. What are these books you've brought ?
d. They are those books your master ordered to be got the
other day, which I have got and brought here.
b. Master has gone to Tientsin.
d. When did he go ?
b. He started yesterday morning.
d. Has he gone on duty ?
b. No, on private business of his own.
d. How many days will he be away ?
b. He'll have to be ten days, including the journey there and
back.
d. Then how about these books I've brought ?
b. Master left word to say you were to leave the books here
for the present, if you brought them.
d. Well you see, here are six sets of volumes. There were
eight books mentioned in the original list, you brought back two
sets the other day, and to-day I've brought one set from each
book, — eight sets of books brought altogether, first and last.
And here is the list too which I should be obliged by your giving
to your master ; it has the cost of all these books written on it,
b. Yes ! and the set to be fitted in boards, have you finished
them?
d. They are finished ; I forgot to bring them with me to-day,
I'll bring them some other day when I come again, eh 7
h. Very well.
b. When do you think I'd better come ?
b. Well, I should think master won't come back before the
end of the month. I'll tell you what, when he's back, I'll come
out of the city for you, eh ?
d. Oh there is no occasion to put you to the trouble. At the
end of this month or the beginning of next, I shall be coming
into the city on other business, and I can come here on mj way
apd inquire,
38 THS aUIPK TO KUAN HUA. PART II
b. Yes, that would do.
d. Then I will wish you good-day.
b. Good-day to you.
d. We shall meet again soon.
No. 19 a. How is it you've been not at home every time I've come
to see you ; what has kept you so busy ?
i. I have been arranging a dispute.
a. And what was the dispute you have been arranging? Is
it anything I may be told or not ?
b. Oh, there's nothing in it that mustn't be told. A friend
of a relative of mine has been litigating with somebody, and my
relative asked me to come forward and reconcile them.
a. Some question of, accounts?
b. No, about purchase of some goods.
a. How did that come to lead to litigation ?
b. Well, it was this. My relative's friend is named Shen,
and keeps a large Foreign Goods store in Pao Ting Fu called
Hsin I. He came here this summer, and stayed at the Fu
Sheng Inn, in the eastern suburbs, and ordered sixty bales
of piece goods at the T'ai Ho Foreign Goods warehouse in Main
East Street here. It was stated in writing in the Note of
Contract of Sale that delivery of the goods was to be made in
two months. When the time came last month, Mr. Shen went
to T'ai Ho, and asked if the goods had arrived: "No," they
said, "not yet." So Mr. Shen waited some days longer and
then went and inquired again, — still the goods had not come.
Well, a few days ago Mr. Shen went to a warehouse in the west
end of the suburb on other business, and there he heard tliat
a dealer had lately bought sixty bales of piece goods from the
T'ai Ho Firm through a broker called Wang, and that the price
paid by this dealer was higher than the one agreed upon by
himself, Shen, but that the money had not been paid yet, nor
the goods taken delivery of. It struck Mr. i^hen that these were
no doubt the sixty bales he had bargained for, and that T'ai
Ho now wanted to make a larger profit by reselling them to
another man, and he was very angry indeed. So the other
afternoon he went to T'ai Ho, and asked them abont it, and they
denied that there was anything of the sort ; but afterwards,
on his mentioning Wang, the broker, by name, they were obliged
to admit it. But, they said, next month there were sixty more
bales of piece goods coming, and they told him to wait for these.
IVlr, Shen wouldn't wsiit, — he said he would have th« sixtv bale?
fART li THE GUIDE TO KUA>' HfA. tv
they had got now. T'ai Ho refused to give them him ; if he
really could not wait for those other sixty bales, they said, the
only course was to return the original Deposit, burn the Note
of Contract of Sale, and consider the whole transaction cancelled.
No, Mr. Shen wouldn't agree. It wouldn't do to return the
deposit merely, they must also undertake to make good the
profit made. But T'ai Ho positively refused to admit their
liability to do this. So Mr. Shen drew up a formal charge, to
which he appended the Note of Contract of Sale, and brought
his case against the T'ai Ho Firm in the District Magistracy.
The case came on before the Court the day before yesterday,
and the Magistrate, after hearing a general statement of their
case from both parties, directed them to go out of Court and
get someone, before going farther, to try and effect an arrange-
ment. If none was possible, further pleas to be put in, and
another hearing to be held. Bo my relative applied to me to
assist him in coming forward and reconciling them, which we
only finally managed to do yesterday evening.
a. And how ?
b. We did it in this way ; we did make T'ai Ho give Mr.
Shen the sixty bales actually in their hands first of all, and
they are to tell the other dealer to wait till the other lot of sixty
bales arrives next month, and he will be given those. Well,
all parties have agreed to this. Yesterday evening, delivery of
the goods was made, the money was paid down, and to-morrow
Mr. Shen is to present a Declaration of Reconciliation at the
District Magistrate's and terminate the matter.
No. 20 «. Have you come from the shop ?
b. No, I'm just back from the T'ien Sheng Pawnbrokers',
where I've been making tenders.
a. Have you dined ?
b- Yes, I've had my dinner.
a. If you've not, I can tell the cook to get you something to
cat at once.
b. No, really I've had dinner ; I had it away from home with
a friend of mine.
a. Oh, very well. Were there many things to-day at T'ien
Sheng's 7
b. Not many curios and works of art, but a lot of clothing,
and copper and tin ware.
a. What did you tender for ?
h. For two watches, nothing else.
iO THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. tART il
a. I think tendering seldom pays, one nearly always loses.
b. Well that depends on one's luck. If a lucky man goes and
makes tenders, he is ^ure to come across great bargains ; yrhen
he tenders, the pawnbroker lets him have things dirt cheap, so
that he is able to make a heap of money. If an unlucky man
makes a tender for a thing, he's let in at once, — the pawnshop
having been let in, when it was pledged, he is too, when he
tenders for it, and not only doesn't make money, bat actually
loses a lot by it.
a. It's perfectly true, what you say. Some years ago our
shop made a number of tenders and lost money in every ca&e,
so now, no matter what pawnbrokers we are asked by, we never
go and tender.
b. But I tell yon, last year there was an instance of a man
making a good thing by tendering. He was a distant connection
of ours, and in the tenth moon last year he was invited to tendpr
by the Heng Shun pawnbrokers' in the Western City. He bid
for a copper watch, four taels, and the pawnbrokers sold it hini.
When he got liome and examined it, blessed if it wasn't a ^old
watch, and he polished it up properly and sold it for more than
forty taels, — a thousand per cent profit. Now that was coming
across a good bargain, and a paying one too.
No. 21 1- Oh, I've just been to your hotel for you, but the assistants
said you had gone to the west end, so I came to try and meet
you on your way back, and I have done so by a lucky chance.
How came you to go to the west end so early ?
b. Why, a steamer came in this morning, and the people in
our hotel had hired a wheel-barrow for a visitor, to carry his
baggage ; the barrowman carried two boxes wrong, and the
visitor was angry about it, so the shopmen, not knowing what
to do, sent somebody to my house for me. I was just up, and
when I heard of this I made haste and washed my face and went
ofT to the hotel and saw the visitor. He told me in reply to my
question, that his name was Ch'en, and he was a Fuhkien man,
in the Kiangsu public service. He was now on his way to
Peking. His steanner arrived this morning, and he came ashore
and stopped at our hotel, where he told our people to hire two
wheel-barrows for him. He ordered his servant t,o go yiiih.
these to the steamer and bring oil his baggage, but when it was
brought to the hotel, and he looked at it, two red leather triinks
were missing, and besides th^is amongst the luggage there were
two white leather trunks, that weren't his, with tiie three words
" Hsii Tzii-Ch'in" written on them. Then he asked his two
servants how it was that two boxes had been taken wrong. It
PAKT II THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 41
wasn't their fault, they said, they had both been on board getting
together the small odds and ends ; the two wheel-barrow men
came on board themselves and removed the boxes, and that was
why they had been taken wrong. So the visitor told our people
to tell the wheel-barrow men to go at once and recover his two
red leather trunks. They went and searched for some time,-
but couldn't find them, and as he was thoroughly angry, and
insisted on getting, his boxes, our people got rather bothered
and sent off in a hurry for me.
o. And you have recovered your visitor's boxes 7
b. Yes, I have now found this Mr. Hsii. Mr. Oh'e's two red
leather trunks are with him, and I'm now going back to the hotel
to hire a wheel-barrow first to wheel off Mr. Hsii's two white
trunks, and bring back the two red ones instead.
a. How did you discover this Mr. Hsu ?
b. I inquired at all the hotels in our street first, and there
being no such person there, I went westwards and asked at each
hotel, one after another. When I reached the Yung Li they fold
me that a visitor of the name of Hsii had just arrived, so I went
into his room, and asked him his style, which he told me was '
Tzii-ch'in. Then I told him about the luggage that had been
mis-sent. " Oh," he said, " my luggage has just been brought, —
I haven't counted it over yet. Just let me go over it and make
sure." When he had done so, he said, " Two of the trunks are
wrong. Two white leather trunks of my own are missing, and
there are two red ones too many." As what he said just corre-
sponded, I said to him, " I'll send a wheel-barrow in a minute to
bring your boxes, and you can give them these two red trunks to
take back," and then I came away. And what pressing business
have you on hand, that you are hurrying off for me so early ?
a. Why, we have rather a pressing call upon us to-day and
want to apply to you to let us have temporary accommodation for
a few hundred dollars.
b. I can ; come with me to the hotel and fetch them.
No, 23 a. Is it true, what I hear, that your relative Wang Tzu-ch'iian
has been denounced ?
b. Yes, it is.
a. Do you know on what charge ?
b. Well, during last year I heard he was going to be de-
nounced, but without much believing it, Now, however, he has
actually been denounced. A few days ago I saw Tzu-oh'iian's
eldest brother, and according to him, he has been disgraced on
account of two cases. One of these was that, in the autumn of
7
42 THE GUIDE TO KUAN SUA. PAR* ll
the year before last there was a cash-bank robbery in the District
City, and several hundred taels plunder were carried off and not
a single one of the thieves was caught. Then the Governor
dendunced him, took away his button, and gave him so many
months time to remains at his post, telling him to capture the
thieves as quickly as possible. When the limit of time expired,
he still hadn't caught a single thief. Well, they gave him several
extensions of time, right up to last winter, but the gang were
never caught at all. This spring, as luck would have it, a man
in the District City went into someone's house in the middle of
the night and murdered two persons, the murderer making his
escape. So when there was this further case of "flight after
murder," the Governor denounced him to the Throne for dismissal.
a. Then he has already left his post ?
b. Yes, he is living in the provincial capital.
a. What sort of a fortune has he made ?
b. Fortune ! he hasn't a penny in the world.
a. Then why should he remain living in the provincial capital,
if he's in such straitened circumstances ?
b. Oh, he would like to come back, but he can't do so all at
once.
a. Why not ? Can't find money for travelling expenses ?
b. No, it isn't that. After cashiering him, the Governor sent
a Deputy to his Yamen, to examine the Treasury, and it was
found that there was a deficit in his Land Tax receipts of over
4,000 taels. When the Deputy asked how he came to have such,
a deficit as that, he confessed that he had misappropriated the
money ; and so, on the Deputy's reporting this to the Governor,
he sent and had the things in his residence sealed up, and trans-
ferred Wang Tzu-ch'iian himself to the provincial capital, giving
him two months time in which to refund the amount of his deficit
to Government on the Land Tax account, and if he didn't refund
within the limit of time, he would apply for Imperial sanction to
seize his house in Peking. So Wang, in his extremity, sent one
of his domestics with a letter to Peking to see his brother, to tell
him to find some way or other of raising 5,000 taels for him at
once, and to give them to the man to bring back. His brother
was in a great state on reading this letter, and came to me, and
asked me to sell his shop-premises in the Chinese city, which I
did at once, fortunately enough I must say, for 5,000 taels, and
his brother gave the amount to the domestic, that had come, to
take back.
a. And how about the things in his residence, that were put
under seal, if he refunds this dbficit'in full ?
PABT II THE GUIDB TO KUAN HTTA. 43
b. Oh, after he has refunded the money, of course his Chiefs
will send some ofificer to his place to remove the seals, and give
him back his things again ; and then he can come back.
No. 23 a. Tell me, why has your friend Ch'ien Fu-ch'ens pawnshop
commenced winding up its pawnbroking business ?
h. He's about to close ; the business doesn't pay.
a. Why, isn't it said that line of business is a capital one?
How comes it not to pay ?
b. Ah, you judge by appearances only. When he first started
pawnbroking it wasn't with his own money only. He had a rela-
tion in the public service, who lent him more than, 10,000 taels to
use free and without interest, — he himself having only a few
thousand, — and with this he started. The business for some
years was very good indeed, and his profits vrere pretty large.
But the year before last his relation was appointed to a prefecture,
and wanted his 10,000 taels back. However, in spite of this
money being withdrawn, liis business might have struggled along,
when he suddenly took a whim into his head to go into the opium
trade. He began by only buying a chest or two for sale, on which
he made a proiit, as it so happened, and this encouraged him, and
he bought seven or eight chests more, and again sold them at a
profit. The consequence was he grew bolder still, and just before
the river closed last year, a hundred chests of drug arrived for a
Cantonese dealer, and hearing there were no more steamers com-
ing, he thought if he bought up these hundred chests, and kept
them for sale during the winter, he must make a good thing of it.
So off he went to this Cantonese dealer's and talked it over with
the Manager, lie wanting to take these hundred ches;ts on two
months' credit, and the Cantonese agreeing. Two or three days
after his purchase another steamer suddenly came, in, briijiging five
or six hundred chests of drug, and down went the market-price
with a jump, so all he could do was to dispose of all his at once,
at a loss of several thousand taels, which brought down his
pawnbroking business too, in the crash. And the whole of his
misfortune is the result of his giving up a safe business through
this over-eagerness to get rich.
a. Well, you know, the only people who never remain rich for
long are those who go in for the opium business ; even if they
make a fortune by it, it is only a short-lived pleasure ; naturally
not many years pass before they are ruined.
6. That's a matter of course. How can a man long enjoy
wealth made in a trade which benefits himself by injuring others ?
a. In my native place there was a wholegsde opium-house
called Heng Yiian, which had a very large; and i?fiqbly-known
44: THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. FAET II
business. The proprietor, a man named Hao, used to go himself
to Tientsin and buy drug from a Foreign hong,— as much as
several hundred chests at a time, — and there must have been quite
several dozen assistants in the shop. For several years he made
a lot of money, had a house with ever so many buildings, and
more than a hundred persons of all ranks in his household, and a
large stud of horses and mules, and was a wealthy man of that
sort. Last year he become absolutely beggared.
At first I didn't understand how it came about so quickly,
but afterwards, on making particular inquiries, I found that ac-
tually for several years, whilst his business was making money,
the proprietor never went to the shop at all, but stayed at home
all the time enjoying himself, and for a long time he had not even
struck a general balance of his books.
Every day at dark the shop assistants used to secretly remove
opium, he knowing nothing whatever about it. Last year,
however, two friends of Hao, who knew that things were wrong
in his shop, told him to go there, and make up his accounts and
take stock. So then he went, made up his accounts, and found a
Debit Balance of many tens of thousands of taels. And beside
on taking stock, only a few chests of drug remained. When he
asked the assistants how it was the books showed a Debit
Balance, and the stock was short, they all said they didn't know.
So he had nothing for it but to sell his house and his stud, and
just managed to pay what he owned the Foreign Hong, and after
that closed his shop. But from the vexation all this caused him,
he fell ill and died; all his dependents left, and there only
remained the members of his own family, and now they are in
such poverty that if they get one meal they go without the next.
So you see what comes of selling opium.
No^ 24 a- When did you come back ?
h. A short time age.
a. From Kiangsi, was it not ?
h. No, from Kiangsu.
a. Didn't you go to Kiangsi originally ; how is it you are
returning now from Kiangsu ?
b. I went to Kiangsi first, aud then afterwards to Soochow.
a. And how have things gone with you since you've been
away?
h. Capitally, for the few years I was in Kiangsi ; but after
my arrival at Soochow nothing has gone right.
a. Why did you go to Soochow, then, if you were so well ofi
in Kiangsi ?
PAST II THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 45
b. Why, my patron was appointed last year to a post in
Yunnan, and proposed to invite me to accompany him, but I
objected to the distance and was unwilling to go, and proposed
to return to Peking. He dissuaded me from that, and said
there was a chiijen of his year, a man named Ho, who was
an Expectant Taotai at Soochow, and he wanted to give me
an introduction to go there, and undertake the drafting of his
official reports. I was willing enough, and so he despatched
me with a letter of introduction from himself to Soochow. On
reaching there I found this gentleman had two secretaries, both
' of them Chehkiang men, who, as soon as they found me there,
imposed so much on my ignorance that 1 was obstructed in
everything. When they began to talk in their own patois, I
couldn't understand a single word; if by any chance I asked
them any question, they would pretend not to know and wouldn't
tell me. Even when out walking they used to leave me by
myself. Finding their manner so extremely unsociable, I thought
"If we are to go on like that, why we shall have an open
quarrel," so I threw up my engagement and came back.
a. How did this gentleman, Mr. Ho, treat you 7
b. Oh, he treated me well enough. But when I gave up my
engagement he asked me what my reason was for doing so, and
as I couldn't well mention that I didn't get on with my com-
panions, I said I had a matter of importance in Peking which
required me to return there for a time. However, he said he
hoped when I had finished with it in Peking I would go back.
a, Well, now you are back, do you mean to go away again
or not ?
6. Now that I'm back, my first intention was to be examined
tor an Official Writership, and supposing I passed, I should have
liked to serve in Peking, and not go away, but on my arrival
I found the examinatien was over, and now my idea is this, —
if there is anything suitable to be had I will go, it there is
nothing that suits, then to remain in Peking for the present.
a. Well, there is a place to be had away from Peking, — I
don't know whether you would accept it.
b. What sort of place ?
a. A very great friend of mine has lately been appointed to
the Prefecture of T'ai Yuan in Shansi, vacated on promotion.
Two days ago he asked me to engage some one as Despatch
Writer for him. I have no one at present in my eye whom I can
recommend, and now you have returned, if you care to accept it,
I would give you the recommendation.
b. What is this gentleman's name ?
46 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. PART II
a. His surname is Ch'ang, and Ch'un-pu is his style.
b. A Bannerman ?
a Yes, a Bannerman.
b. What is he like ?
a. An exceedingly honourable, and an exceedingly kind man.
b. In that case you might speak to him on my ijehalf.
a. As to salary, now what would you propose ?
h. Thais easily arranged ; I'll leave it to you. Provided the
person is agreeable, what does it matter how much or how little
pay there is ?
a. I can assure you that you will be certain to get on well
together. Then to-morrow I'll see him and speak to him about
you.
b. Thank you, thank you.
a. Not at all.
b. Now you yourself, have you no duties at present ?
a. No, how could I ? Ever since my return on sick-leave
my old complaint has been chronic. ^
b. What do you do at home every day then ?
a. Oh, on fine days I can go and look up my friends and talk,
and when it blows or rains I just stay at home and read.
b. Why, then you are quite a man of elegant leisure.
a. Elegant leisure ! Wasting away my time, that's all !
No. 25 «• I'll tell you an amusing thing.
b. What's that ?
a. One night towards the end of last month, some time after
midnight, I had just gone to sleep, when I heard in the back
court a man jump in with a heavy thud. It staitled me out of
my sleep, and supposing it was thieves, I called at once to the
servants to get up and be quick and take lanterns and show a
light. So the servants, hearing there was a man, at once got
up, lit lanterns and got sticks and went to the back court.
Meanwhile I got up too, opened the room-door and went to the
back court to look. When I got there I heard the servants
saying they had caught a man ; that he was very well dressed,
and didn't look like a thief. Then I heard the man say, " Don't
haul at me, my ankle is sprained and hurts me very much.
I'm not a thief. I'm making my escape." When I heard'him
say he was making his escape, I went forward and looked, and
saw a very nice-looking young man, and on looking at him
PART n THE GtriDB TO KUAN HUA. 47
closely I recognized him as an educated man named Chiang,
living in the Chinese city, where we had twice met in a curio-
shop, and had mutually taken to each other.
So then I made two of the servants give him an arm each and
walk him about' for a while, and he got all right. After that
I invited him into my study, and when he was in there and saw
it was me, he look very sheepish. I asked what had happened
to him, and he said he had been playing in a gambling saloon
behind our house, when suddenly an oflScial with a number of
police had gone there and made a seizure. He had ran out
meanwhile, but finding no place to hide in, he had climbed up
on to the top of the wall and jumped down into this courtyard.
And so,, after giving him some advice to give up gambling
any more, I made him stay the night, till daylight when he
went back.
Yesterday he came to thank me, and he told me he had now
taken an oath never to gamble again after this.
b. He has a strong will, then, to be able to reform at once
like that, as soon as you gave him your advice. I used to have
a friend who was an opium-smoker, but when I advised him to
give up the habit, why he was so angry with me that he will
have nothing more to do with me.
a. A very curious person, then, your friend ! Why should
he be angry with you for advising him to give up smoking 7
b. He really was a perfect fool. He used not to smoke,
but afterwards, from being much with a friend who did, he
gradually got to acquire the craving. At first he didn't smoke
much, but then he took more and more, until last year his face
had the regular " opium complexion." and he lost all energy
Thinking him in a very bad way, I said to him. " Take my
advice and give up smoking ; for if you go on doing so, I'm
afraid it will go badly with you. I will buy you some anti-opium
medicine from Shanghai, and if you take some every day
according to the directions, no doubt you will gradually break
off smoking." Well, he heard what I said, and agreed ; and so
I got a friend of mine to buy some anti-opium medicine in
Shanghai, costing a good many dollars, and sent it to him. A
few days after, meeting one of his servants, I inquired whether
he had stopped smoking, but his man told me that he hadn't
taken any of the anti-opium medicine and was smoking more than
ever. That wouldn't have mattered, but I afterwards heard that
he said at a friend's house that I was officious ; that without
any occasion I had advised him to leave off smoking, aiid that
he didn't at all like it ; that he daren't take the anti-opium
medicine I had sent him, because, as he said, he was afraid it had
poison in ii, intended for him. Well, my friend couldn't allow
48 THE GUIDE TO KUAK HTJA. PART II
this to pass, and told him, " You've no right to say that. A
man means well, doesn't he, when he advises you to give up
smoking. And why should a person poison you, who has no
grudge against you ? What you say is most unjust ! " From
that time he was angry with this friend- of his also. And this
year, he didn't come and pay me a New Year's call, so I know
he has broken o& acquaintance with me. Did you ever hear of a
man with such a disposition as that ?
No. 26 a. I'll tell you an irritating thing.
b. What it is ?
a. That man Chiang, whom I know very well, the other day
conspired with some other people, and they swindled me out of a
good many thousand tiao.
h. Why, how did he succeed in swindling so much out of you ?
a. He came to my house the other day, and said an acquaint-
ance of his was now having a private gambling club at his house,
and he invited me to go and play. So I went. When I got
there and looked, I found seven or eight people there seated and
playing. I didn't know one of them, and so he introduced^me,
and told me there were no strangers, and that he knew them all.
So I sat down and began to play, and won a score or so of tiao
and then we broke up. Last night I had meant not to go, but
as he insisted on my doing so, I couldn't help myself, and went
again, and I then lost a good many hundred tiao. " Oh, it
doesn't matter," he said to me, "go again a few times and you'll
win several thousand tiao from them." Well, I believed what
he said, and went with him again five or six times, and lost
over 4,000 tiao more, and they closed their club.
Every day there were always two or three men coming to ray
house wanting the amount of my gambling debt. I went to see
Chiang, but he was invisible and wouldn't see me. So I pawned
two boxes of clothes to enable me to pay this debt. Yesterday a
friend of mine told me that it was all a conspiracy against me,
deliberately got up by Chiang with these other men. Most
aggravating, is it not ?
b. Certainly, it is detestable on Chiang's part. However,
you yourself are to blame too, for if you had not gone with him
to gamble he couldn't have swindled you.
a. That's perfectly true. Still the man's nothing less than a
brute, to be on good terms with me and yet help other people to
cheat me.
b. Speaking of conspiracies to defraud people, I'll tell you of
a case. In my part of the world, one year, some of the bad
PART n THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 49
characters of the place opened a gambling saloon, simply with the
intention of swindling people, and lots of people did get let in.
Another thing was, that they were a desperate set of blackguards,
and so if anybody that lost money to them couldn't pay, he had
to settle accounts by giving them his house or land property.
Well, where we lived there was a rich man, who was very clever,
and very kind to the people about there too, and when he heard
of this he was very angry. So one evening he drove in his own
cart to the gambling house. When he had gone in and found these
fellows, he gave his name, and said he'd come on purpose to play ;
and hearing this, and knowing him as a local magnate, they
were all highly delighted. So they had a private consultation.
" As this is his first visit, " they said, " we'll let him win a few
times to begin with, so that he will be willing to come again,
and then one fine day we'll make him lose to the tune of ten
thousand tiao or so, and we shall make our fortunes. " Having
made their plans they sat down and began playing, and sure
enough he did win, and they paid up there and then. After this
he went again twice and again won, and again they paid cash.
Well, one evening he went again, and they played from watch-
setting right on till close on daylight, and he had lost more than
10,000 tiao; so when it had got to be broad daylight he said to
them, "I'll go home first and get the money ready for you, and
at noon you can come to my house and get it, " which they
agreed to do. Back he went, and at midday two of them went
to his house to get the money, and were announced by the
servants. He called them into his library and asked them who
they were and what they had come for. " Why, " they said,
" how is it you don't know us ? We have a gambling saloon at
so-and-so. You've forgotten, but last night didn't you play at
our place and lose over 10,000 tiao, and tell us to come for the
money at this time ? " Directly he heard this, the moneyed man
said, in rage, " Don't talk nonsense ! I, a man of property,
play with rascals like you ! You must be out of your senses.
If you want to do me, you've mistaken your man ; be off directly
both of you, and think yourselves lucky, otherwise I'll send you
both to the Yamen and have you punished for extorting money ! "
They were so frightened at hearing this, that they didn't dare
say a word, and made off as quick as they could.
No, S7 a- Why, what's made you look so deadly pale in the face ?
b. I have been unwell for some days.
a. How's that?
b. I interfered in another person's affairs, and I have rather
given offence, and it has brought on an attack of the spleen,
8
50 THE GUIDE TO KUAN KUA. PART H
a. In whose affairs was it, and how did you give offence ?
6. Well, last month our friend Wen Tzu-shan commissioned
me to buy gome land for him. I knew a man named Sun, living
to the East of the city, who had a property of over a ch-ing that be
wanted to sell, and so I took him to see Wen Tzfi-shan. Later
on they both went to the East of the city, and viewed the land,
and afterwards asked my good offices in arranging the price for
them. A thousand taels was decided on, and agreed to on both
sides, and three days ago was fixed for the Agreement to be
signed and the money to be paid over. Well, three days ago
Sun and I went to Wen Tzii-shan's, but when we got there, he
hadn't got up, and we waited for him some time in his study till
he did. When he saw us, he said he couldn't buy that land,
and when we asked him why not, he said he had been raising
money for some time, but the amount was short of a thousand
taels. We asked him how much he had raised, and he told
us 950 taels. " Very well, " said Sun, when he heard this, "let
it be 950 taels then!" and accordingly the Agreement was
signed and the money was paid. He put me in a very disagree-
able position with Sun, for if he really and truly hadn't been
able to raise this fifty taels there would be some excuse for him,
but with means like his, he can put his hand on fifty thousand
taels, let alone fifty. I hate him. He deliberately takes advan-
tage of a man and puts me into the false position with him. So
when I got home again that day, the more 1 thought over it the
more angry I felt, and owing to this my old complaint came back
and I fell ill.
a. Well, do you know Wen Tzii-shan's younger brother is
worse than he is. He was once my partner in business, and with
all the stock that was sold by him, when it came to the division
of profits, he always paid me my share short by two or three
strings of cash, knowing I shouldn't like to ask him for them,
but he used always to say, " Oh, this time I owe you two or three
tiao; in a day or two I'll make it up to you in some way."
However, he never mentioned it again, and after a good long
time / used to forget too, and then I thought no more about the
matter. By this meanness I must have lost several hundred tiao
in a few years. Then again, if you take the way he treats his
friends, and the terms he is on with his relatives, he absolutely
understands nothing about it. It is always "Take care of
Number One ; " that's the sort of fellow he is ! Last year there
was a death in his family, and he begged me over and over again
to ask two friends to help him at home by sitting up all night
with him. So I asked two very good friends of mine, who sat up
with him five or six nights, and did all they possibly could for
him. And when it was all over he never even went and thanked
PABT 11 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 51
them for all their trouble, and one day afterwards meeting one of
them in the street, he bent his head down and passed on. The
fact is, he is quite unprincipled. Such a disposition as his is too
hateful you know ! And I've heard recently he's doing still
worse. He is lending money at high rates ; whoever borrows
money from him pays 8 per cent per month. He's become
notorious for his exorbitant rates of interest. I knew how it
would be long ago. He's a rich man, but it won't be long before
he's ruined. The ancients said, and it's a certain truth, " Ill-
gotten gains don't prosper long. "
No. S8 a. So I hear your brother has returned. How is it I haven't
seen him out ?
b. He has been ill since he came back.
a. How's that? Did he get fever on the journey ?
b. Well no, not fever, but a shock.
a. What sort of a shook ?
b. He met pirates when on board his boat.
a. Tell me how it was.
b. He was on his boat in company with a friend. There was
one servant and one boat. One evening, while the boat was
anchored at a place, some ten or more pirates came on board
from the shore, armed with torches, swords, and spears, and came
into the cabin, after cutting open the boarding. They presented
their swords at my brother and asked him, " What have you
got ? " " Oh, " said my brother, " our things are all lying about
in this cabin ; there's nothing anywhere else. " So the gang
took the boxes, bundles and cash, and went off with them, leaving
them the bedding. Luckily, my brother had a money-belt on, in
which there were some ten ounces of gold or more, and they also
saved a few dozen taels. At daylight they went to a landing-
place, and my brother and his friend, after talking it over,
thought of disembarking and travelling by land. His friend
being quite willing, they removed their bedding, and at the
landing-place they hired two carts, and came on by land. When
he got home he felt ill, and the doctor whom he called in said he
had received a shock which was accompanied by a touch of the
prevailing sickness.
He is taking medicine now, but he's not well.
No. 29 «• Your speaking of your brother's encounter with pirates on
his journey, reminds me of an incident I'll tell you about. My
father's elder brother, now dead, was once going with a friend to
Kansuh. They hired two carts and took two servants, each
going in one cart, and so they started. One day they came to a
52 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. PAST H
place where their carters didn't know the road, and they missed
their way.
They went on until it was nearly dark, bnt not a town conld
they find. They were all in a great state of mind, but there was
nothing to be done, and so they wandered blindly on. They
travelled along till close upon the watch-setting, and then they
reached a large wood, from the further side of which a little
gleam of lamp-light was visible. So their two carts made for
this light, and on coming close up they saw it was an inn. Out-
side there were two meal -sellers' sign-boards hanging; the inn-
door was shut, and looking out on the street was a window with
a lighted lamp inside. Well, they called out to open the door,
and drove in. When they got inside and looked round, the
place was quite lonely and deserted, without a single visitor. So
they selected three rooms and brought in their luggage, and then
told the people of the inn to get some water for washing, make
tea, and get some food ready. My uncle saw the inn-people
were such a dubious-looking set that his suspicions were rather
aroused. When they had finished their meal, and while his
friend was on the k^ang arranging the baggage, in came one of
the inn-servants to make some tea. My uncle noticed that all
the time he kept on looking at the baggage on the Jc'ang, and,
seeing this sort of thing, my uncle's doubts increased. However,
he didn't like to say anything for fear of alarming his friend.
After drinking his tea he went to the back yard to relieve himself.
When he got there, he saw three rooms, one was a w.-c. and the
other two were rooms for stacking provender. After my uncle
had entered the w.-c. and while he was relieving himself, he
heard two men come from the front court, push open the door of
the room with the provender, and go in to get some fodder. He
then heard one say to the other, " What did the Master arrange
with you when he called you away just now ? " Then he heard
the other man say, " It was arranged like this : at dead of night,
you and I are to go and kill the two carters, and they three will
go and kill the two visitors. I have agreed with the Master that
after the job is done, the two carts shall be given us for our
share, one cart apiece, and that never mind how much money the
two visitors have got, that's to be no concern of ours at all.
What I mean to do is this : when you and I have got hold of
our share, early to-morrow we'll give up our business here, and
go back home, one of us in each cart. After this we'll both
reform and not do any mischief to people any more. What do
you thing of that ? " The other man said, " You're right, that's
a first-rate plan. " When they had finished talking, he heard
them go oflf to the front side. " Well, " said my uncle to himself,
" no wonder I thought the inn-people such a rascally-looking lot.
No doubt about it, this is a 'flash' inn." Well, after this he
PABT n THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 58
came out of the w.-c, went to his own room, and told his friend
all he'd heard. His friend on hearing this was terribly frightened.
So while they were both in their room in great trouble, and not
knowing what to do, they suddenly heard a large number of carts
coming along, until there was a knocking at the gate, and when
that was opened, they saw six Convoy carts enter, with two
visitors and four Escort men. " There's no fear now" said my
uncle, " we can go to sleep directly in security." And then they
sent one of their servants across and asked the Convoy carts,
and were told the latter were going to start next morning at the
fifth watch. My uncle's party slept till the fifth watch, then
rose, told their carters to put to the carts, and went off in company
with the Convoy carts. In that way they just managed to avoid
this great danger. A narrow escape, wasn't it 7
No. 30 o- I say, I'll tell you a story.
In our village there lives a man who is pretty well off, and
who has always been very stingy. He has never helped anyone,
nor given any money in charity. Well, some days ago a married
younger sister of his came to his house, in spite of the rain, and
said that her husband had now got employment as accountant on
board a sea-going ship, which had put to sea two days ago, and
that now, having nothing to eat in the house, she had come
through the rain to try and borrow a picul of rice and a few taels
until her husband's return, when they should be paid back without
fail. When the man had heard this, he told his sister he had
no rice and no money, and he couldn't possibly provide her with
them, and said she must go and borrow elsewhere. So the sister,
finding he wouldn't do anything, broke out crying, and he seeing
her do so went off out of her way in the sulks. Now there was a
neighbour of his living in the same compound, a cheery sort of
fellow, who was very angry at hearing that he wouldn't do anything
for his sister, and so he asked her in, lent her a picul of rice and
several taels besides, and hired a donkey for her into the bargain,
and then sent her back.
When the man returned and heard from his people of his
neighbour lending his sister rice and money to take back with
her, not a word of any kind did he say, but pretended not to
know. Now that night, as it happened, a thief came, who bored
a hole in the back wall of the house, got into his room and stole
some dozens of taels and some clothes from him. Next morning,
when he found there had been a robbery and he had lost things,
being afraid that his sister, when she heard of his losing his
money and clothes, would be sure to exult over it and come to
ask about it, instead of going to the Yamen and giving notice of
the robbery in his house, he even asked his neighbour, living in
the same compound, not to tell people he had been robbed. But
54 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. PAST II
do you know, the same night this thief had stolen his things, as
luck would have it, when he reached the main street he got
arrested by the night-patrol and sent to the Yamen. The ofl&eial
asked the fellow from whose house the money and clothes were
stolen, and he then confessed they were stolen from so-and-so's
house in such-and-such a village. Thereupon the officials sent a
runner to tell the person concerned to receive back the stolen
property. When this man heard this he was much disturbed, for
it wouldn't do not to go and receive his things from the Yamen,
while if he did go he was afraid of his sister hearing of it. So he
thought of a way by which he asked this neighbour of his to
assume his name and go and receive his property at the Yamen
for him. His friend agreed, and went instead ; but he despised
the man for his former refusal to help his sister and determined
to pay him out. So after receiving over the money and the
clothes from the Yamen, he sent them all to the sister, and on
reaching the house and seeing him, he told him a lie, and said,
" After coming from the Yamen just now, when I got into the
street I came right on your sister. She asked me where I
had been to, and I said I had been to the Yamen to receive your
money and clothes for you. Then she told me to give them to
her, and as she is your own sister I couldn't well refuse to, and
so I did give them to her."
The man, on hearing this, not only didn't venture to get angry
but he had, on the contrary, to express his thanks. And now
everybody who hears about it says it was a smart thing and done
by a smart man.
No. 31 «• Speaking of that miserly fellow meeting with his deserts,
I'll tell you another story. One year when I was lodging at an
inn in the South, there was a Shansi merchant stopping in the
same house. One day there suddenly appeared a poor fellow,
also a Shansi man, who was all in rags, and who wanted to see
this merchant. The inn-servants showed him in, and when he
saw the merchant he said, " I've wandered to this place. I can't
go home because I've no money for the journey, and am in the
greatest distress. Yesterday a fellow-countryman of ours told
me you had come here on business, and were staying at this inn.
I was very glad to hear it, and so I've come to see you and to beg
you, for the sake of Auld Lang Syne, to lend me a hundred taels to
pay my expenses to get home. When I get there I will find some
means of repaying you." " Oh," the other man replied, " I've
already laid out all my money in stock; just now I haven't got a
single tael in hand. Think of some other plan, for really I can't
give you any help." The poor man, when he heard him say he
couldn't give any help, wept, and the merchant then went into an
inner room and sat down. Now there happened to be a Ssu-chuaa
PART U THE aUIDE TO KDAN HUA. 55
man staying in the same inn who went to the room to have a
chat with this merchant, and seeing this poor man sitting in a
chair weeping, he asked him for what reason he was in such
grief. The man replied : " This merchant used to be a near
neighbour of mine in my native place. In years gone by, while
he was poor, I have often helped him with money and food ;
afterwards too I lent him money to start in business, and now he
has grown rich. I have lost money in my business in this part
of the country and have none to pay for my journey home. I
come to him to borrow a hundred taels in order to go back, and
he refuses to lend it me. That is why I am in such deep grief."
When the Ssu-chuan man had heard to the end of the story, he
went into the inner room and asked the merchant, " This story of
your fellow-countryman's that he has given you help in former
years, is it true ? " " Yes," said the merchant, " it's true enough.
Unfortunately I have no money at present to lend him." " Well,"
said the Ssii-chuan man, " supposing, for instance, I lent you a
hundred taels, which you gave him for travelling-expenses home,
and you repaid me in a month from this, giving me an I.O.U. —
no interest charged either, — would you be willing or not?"
Well, he was obliged to say he was willing, whereupon the Ssii-
chuan man brought a hundred taels from his own room to lend
him, and made him give it to the poor man to take away with
him, got the merchant to write him an I.O.U. , which he kept,
and after a day or two the Ssu-chuan man moved from the house
also. After a few more days the merchant opened his box and
saw at once that a hundred taels were missing, and the I.O.U.
was lying there.
Then he discovered that the Ssu-chuan man was a conjuror and
knew the art of spiriting things away ; that he had spirited away
his hundred taels, and given them to the poor man to take with
him. Some time afterwards one of the merchant's servants let
out the story, and everybody said, who heard it, that it served
him quite right.
No. 32 «• I tear your brother has been engaged in a lawsuit; is it
true '!
b. Yes, quite true,
a. With whom ?
b. With a rascal living in our town.
a. And what about 1
b. It happened like this. One day my brother went pigeon-
shooting in a wood to the north of the town. Well, he fired,
and without his knowing it, there happened to be someone
standing outside the wopd, who was leading a horse. AH of a
56 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. PART II
sudden the horse, hearing the report of the gun, was startled and
bolted away. The man, in his annoyance, caught hold of my
brother, and told him to make good the value of the horse.
" Don't get excited," said my brother, " which way did the beast
gallop?" " North-west," said the man. " What colour is he ? "
" Chestnut said the man. " Well," said my brother, " this
business is easily managed. I'll go at once with you into the
town, and get myself secured in your presence by a substantial
guarantor. Then you go and look for the horse first, and if
afterwards you can't find him, and he's really lost, I'll pay up for
him, that's all. The man was very well pleased at this. So
my brother and he went along together to the town, and ray
brother got secured to him by Ch'uan Shun, the grain-dealers, and
then he went to look for the horse, while my brother came home.
After a bit the man comes back to Ch'uan Shan's and says,
" The horse is lost, and I haven't been able to find him, " and
wants to see my brother. Well, the grain-dealers sent one of
their apprentices to our house to fetch my brother. As soon as
the man saw him, he said. I looked for him a long time, but
I can't find my horse anywhere. I gave sixty taels for that
animal. Now, as a favour to you, I'll take fifty taels." " Oh,"
said my brother, " I don't call that making quite sure he's lost,
merely looking about in a general sort of way, as you've been
doing, and not finding him. Let me go and have another thorough
search for you. If after a day or two he doesn't turn up, then he
will really be lost. Plenty of time if I pay for him by that time."
But the man wouldn't have it ; he must be paid at once. Then
my brother began disputing with him about it, but the other
people intervened ; whereupon, what did the man do but go to
the Deputy Magistrate's and lay a charge against my brother,
and he was summoned by the people from the Yamen. When
he came before the Court he gave the true account of the matter.
The Deputy Magistrate then allowed my brother a Hmit of five
days and told him to go and try to find the horse. Accordingly
he went inquiring in every village, and afterwards heard news
of it. North-west of our town there is a village, where a man of
the name of Chao lives. Two days before this man had bought a
chestnut horse. Well, away went my brother to find out this
man Chao, and questioned him. Actually, the other fellow, some
days before, had sold his horse to Chao, agreed on eight taels
as the price, and arranged what day to bring the horse to him
and get the money. That day, when the horse heard the report
of the gun, as I told you, he bolted, and the fellow went after
him and caught him, took him to Chao's place, got the money,
came back and told my brother the beast was lost, and he must
pay him fifty taels for him. lify brother persuaded Chao to bring
the horse and go with him to the Yam^n as a witness. As soon
PA^ji'S 3;i th;?, gxudjs, to. k.va^ ^p;A. §7
as the other man saw that there was a witness, he had nothing
to say, and he himself acknowledged it was a swindle. The
Deputy Magistrate then gave him forty blows fo^ utter rascality,
and let him go.
No, 33 a. When I was at the Jung Fa Godown yesterday, I heard
you had sent them a hundred bales of cotton from your godown
one bale short ; how did it happen?
b. Qh, it's rather amusing, what you ipen<ji,an. Yesterday,
before sending tjiem the cotton, we gpt out a hpadredj tally-sticks,
^p,d afterwards gave one tally to each man tjjat c^.^ried a bale.
Wheji we h^d sent the >fhole of the hundj:e,d iaales, and a good
long while sifter, Mr. Wang, the Ma,i;iage,r of the Jung Fa
Godown, sent a man to our godown to ajsk why we ^ent them a
bale short. We told him, " We have sent a hundred bales of
cottoij; wh?it do you mean by 'sending a Ijale short '? " The
man sa.id <jhey had received ifli their godown ninety-nine bales —
one bale short. I was very much surprised at hearing l^is, and so
I went with the man to their pls^ce. As soon as Mr. Wang saw
me, he seemed annoyed and said, " Your godown-men are really
too careless ! How is it they've sent us a bale of cotton, short ? "
I asked him, " How do you know they have ? " " Oh," he said,
" when the cqtton had all been deliy;eired, and tlie t^Jly-keeper had
checked the tallies, there were ninety-nine tallies, — isn't that one
bale short ? " Then I asked them, " Which of you was it just now
in the godown that took tallies ? '^ One of the assistants
standiflig by said he had, I asked him, " Whjf n you vfere taking
the tallies just now, didn't you go anywhere el^e?" " No," he
said, " I didn't go anywhere, except that I had a sudden stomach-
ache and I went to the w.-c. to relieve myself for a short time."
So I said to him, " First of all, let you and me go and have a look
in the w.-c." When we went there together and looked, there was
a tally lying on the ground. I picked it up and took it along with
me to Mr. Wang. " Now then," I said, " whose are the careless
godown-men now ? Your assi.stant drops a tally in the w.-c. and
then you say we have sent you a bale shor,t ! Jt's true i;t is of no
great importance, but still you can't deny you have bieje;n a good
d?al too hasty." This made him look very sheepisji, and he didn't
utter a single word. Then I went on, " Although' we have found
the tally, let us go through the goods again all the same, and see
if they are short or not, and then we shall botli be more satisfied."
So I told their assistants to pass the bales from the godown into
the yard_, and counted them up carefully, and right enough there
were one hundred bales. " Well," I said, ',' ypu see plainly there's
no mi8ta.ke." " Yes," they replied, they saw it was a][l right, and
so I came baijk. Rather apjiusing, ^^^n't it ?
58 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. PART It
a. I told you once before, this Mr. Wang is a stupid feUow,
though you didn't quite believe me. The idea of his simply
taking the tallies and, without checking the goods, saying you
had sent him a bale short !
b. Well, do you know, this is what happened last year. We
bought a hundred taels worth of goods from their godown, and
gave them a bank-note for that sum. Two days afterwards he
brought back the note and said it was forged. I looked at the
note, and it had no mark showing it was forged, so I asked him,
" If it's a forgery, why has it no mark to show it 7 " He said
it had none because he hadn't gone to the House concerned.
" How do you know then it is a forgery if you haven't been
to the House itself ? " I asked him. " Oh," he said, " their
accounant thought it looked like a forged note." At such a wild
remark as this I said, " We'll take the note together and get it
cashed at the bank, and see whether it's forged or not." So
we went, and actually it wasn't a forgery at all, and we cashed it.
He couldn't hide his embarrassment, and took away the
money, looking very much confused.
No. 34 a. Mr. Manager, I've got a bad note here that I have brought
back to you.
h. Let me have a look at it. This isn't one of ours.
a. Why not 1
b. Because it hasn't got our endorsement on it.
a. But indeed it was got from you, I remember. Why do
you say now it wasn't ?
b. I'll tell you. If it was a note coming from us, it would
certainly have our endorsement, and our chop. As this has got
neither the one nor the other, why it can't be ours.
a. You say it hasn't your endorsement, but this note of mine
has an endorsement as being received from you.
b. It isn't enough merely to have your endorsement ae being
received from us; it requires to have our endorsement showing
the person we received it from.
a. Oh, well ! if it has your endorsement, and you won't
acknowledge it, why I'm helpless.
b. There's no reason why we shouldn't acknowledge it. If it
had been got from us, we should return it back to the other
person, we should lose nothing, so why shouldn't we recognize it ?
a. But it's possible you may have forgotten to endorse this note.
b. That's out of the question ! We couldn't forget to do so.
Besides, there's another reason, which I'll tell you. This note is
PAKT II THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 59
issued by one of the " sly " banks, and we have never used the
notes of these " sly " banks in our shop, so we are still more
certain it didn't come from us.
a. Well, if you insist on saying it didn't come from you, why
then I can't help myself, and I must grin and bear it, that's all.
b. I should advise you to take it back, and think it over again
from whom you got it.
a. "Will you change this lO-tiao note for me into five 1-tiao
notes and one b-tiao.
b. We haven't got any of our own notes for 1 tiao. Will it
do if we change it for the notes of another house 7
a. Yes, that will do.
b. Just count them and see that they're right.
a. Quite right ! Have these all got your endorsement 7
b. Yes, all.
No. 36 a- I say, I've just seen a bit of an excitement in the market-
town.
b. What was it ?
a. A Southern man had got hold of one of the natives and
was going to the Sub-District Deputy Magistrate's Yamen with
him to have him up, and a whole lot of people were following, so
not knowing what it was about, I went with them to the Yamen
to see what it all meant. Then I saw the pair of them reach
the Yamen, and the Southerner told the YamSn-runners, that they
two had a case to settle, whereupon they took them in. I went
in too, and saw the Deputy Magistrate take his seat in Court,
and both o^ them came up before him and knelt down. The
Magistrate first questioned the Southern man. " What's your
name 7 Where do you come from ? What is it you have come
to have decided ? " Then the Southern man made a kotow and
said, " My name is Yii-p'ei ; I come from Lin-Chiang-fu in
Kiangsi, and I keep a ready-made clothes shop in this place.
Last year I bought a concubine, so I rented a two-roomed
dwelling-house in Teng-Lung Lane, in the market-town here.
Just now I was at work in my shop, and sent an apprentice to
fetch something from my house. When he came back he said
there was a young man sitting in my house, but he didn't know
who he was. This made me feel very suspicious, and I hurried
home to see. When I got there I saw the street-door was closed.
I pushed it open, went into the room and looked, and saw this
man sitting there drinking tea, talking and laughing with my
concubine. Then I asked him, " Who are you and^what have you
60 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. ikki 11
come to my house for ? " He answered that he had come there
as a knocking-shop. I was very angry indeed on hearing that,
and gave him a slap in the face, and in return he scratched mine,
so then I dragged him here for the caie to be heard. Please
YouT Honour to ask him what he really did go to my house for."
Then ifhe Deputy Magistrate asked the other man, " What's
your name ? Where do you live 7 What are you ? fend why did
you igo to Yii-p'ei's hou^e ? " The man answeredy " My name is
Wang An ; I live in Hung Chu Lane in this town ; my usual
business is making short loans of money. Yii-p'ei's concubine
used to live in the same compound as I did. Two months ago
she borrowed from me ten taels at interest, and every month I go
to her house to get the interest on it. To-day the date had come
round again, and I took toy stE^mp and went to her house. The
concuhine asked me to step inside and have some tea, and I went
in. She gave me the interest, and after that she made tea in the
tea-pot. While I was sitting there, drinking my te!a, Yii-p'ei
came back. When he saw me he glowered all over, and with his
eyes staring at me he asked me, "Who are you? and what have
you come to my house for ? " When I heard him speak so rudely
to me, why I did get angry and said I came to his house as a
knocking-shop. At that he slapped me in the face, and I was
provoked and sci-atched his face back. Then he dragged me
here to have the case heard."
When he had finished, he tooked out a folded parcel of interest-
money, and showed it to the Magistrate. Then the Magistrate
said, " As Yii-p'ei doesn't like your going to his house, after this
you must go every month to his shop for the interest on your
loan. You are forbidden to go again to his house. If you do,
and Yii-p'ei comes and informs against you, I shall certainly
punish you for it," and with that he told them both to go back
again.
iio. 36 a- I say, I've got Something to tell you.
b. What's that ?
a. I came back from the country a short time ago. One day,
when I was stopping at an inn in a large market town, I heard
the landlord say, that some days before a man had gone with a
bangle to sell to a cash-bank in the town, called the Te Ch'eng
Bank. Well, the people in the shop had just fetched a pair of
scales to weigh the bangle, when another man came in who said
to the one who was selling the bangle, " I've just been to your
house to take you a Letter of Advice. Your servants said you
had gone into the street, so I went to try and find you, and
I happened to see you come in here." As he was speaking, he
pulled out from his breast a letter and a packet of silver, and said,
'PA.i'i il fritti GTJIDB TO itJAlN fiXTA. 6l
" Twill's is a Letter of Advicfe from 'Chetkiarig." tHfe toan who
was selling the bangle took the Letter of Adyic6, gave the man
who brought it a haTidrfed cash, and he went away. The man
with the bangle then said to the people of the shop, " My brother
has sent me some money fi'om Chehkiang, so I won't sell the
bangle. Shall I sell you the silver? There's another thing,
I'm no scholar, would you Open the letter and read it out to me ? "
So they gave him the bangle a^ain, opened the letter and read it
oiat to him. It began by sfmfjly saying that things were going
on well th«r6, and that his brother was not to be anjrions ; then
it continued, " I'm sending ybu ten taels now, which please use,
and when there's another opportunity I Will send you a further
remittance." The man then said, " Will you take the silver
away and ilireigh it, and change it for me into cash ? " The bank-
people did take it away and weigh it, and found there were eleven
taels. Theiy were delighted at this, and thought they would do
him out of a tael, so they changed it into cash as ten taels, and
gave it to him, and oS he went with it. After ti little while
another man came in with a note to cash, who said, to them,
" You've been d6ne ; the man who sold you the silver just now is
a swindler. It's bad Silver, what he sold you. How did you come
to Ifet him cheat you ? " As soon as they heard this they at once
gtrt the sycee-shears and cut open the silver, and saw at a glance
the silver was bad, sure enough. So the bank-people asked the
man, " Do you know the swindler's house 1 " He replied, " I will
take ytra to see him, if you will pay me for it." Well, the manager
gave the man a tiao, and told him to take them to see this other
man. The fellow took the tiao and went off with the two men
froni the bank. When they had reached the door of a con-
fectioner's shop, he said to the two men, " Look, there's the
swindler, eating pastry inside the shop. Go in and see him for
yotirselves." So in went the two With the bad packet of silver,
and When they found him they said, " This packet you sold us is
bad silvfer." " Well, " he said, " / didn't know whether it was
bad or not ; it was brought me, you know, from my brother in
the provinces. As it's bad I'll give yon back the cash." There-
upon he asked the manager of the confectioner's shop to see
whether the silVer Weighed ten tabls or not.
When the manager had taken the silver and put it in the
balance scales and weighed it, he said, "This is eleven taels."
Oft hearing this the man said to the two men from the bank,
"What I just sold you was ten taels; this paioket is eleven;
how can it be mine ? Yoti have brought some othter bad silver
and Want to cheat me ! " The two men from the bank made no
reply, and some other people who were there eating refreshments
were so indignant at hearing this, that they all wanted to lay
hands on the men from the bank, who had nothing for it but to
62 THE GUIDB TO KUAN HUA. PAET n
take the packet of bad silver as quick as they could and run
away back.
No. 37 "• Your story of the swindler reminds me of a thing I will tell
you about. Some years ago, in my part of the country, there
used to live a celebrated doctor named Pang. He possessed a
title and had a small fortune of his own, and used to receive
several dozens of patients every forenoon. One morning a man
came to him, who seemed by his dress to be a servant in some
large establishment. On seeing Dr. Fang he said, " I belong to
such-and-such a house. My master and mistress are both ill,
and wish to come and consult yon ; and they would be glad if
you will be at home to-rnorrow morning," which Dr. Fang said
he would be. Next morning the same servant again appeared,
accompanied by another man carrying a bundle in his hand.
The servant entered and said to Dr. Fang, " I beg your pardon,
Sir : Master first, or Mistress first 7 " Your mistress first, of
course, " Dr. Fang answered. The servant then took the bundle
from the other man's hand, and went out with it, while the latter
sat down on a seat and waited. After the consultations were
over and all the people gone. Dr. Fang asked the man, " Have
you come to consult me ? " " No," he said, " I come from a
second-hand clothes shop ; I'm only waiting here for your servant
to bring me out the clothes." This surprised Dr. Fang very
much, so he asked, " What servant of mine ? What clothes have
you brought?" "Why," the man replied, "the servant that
came in along with me just now, didn't you tell him the Mistress
was to see first, and then he took the clothes inside? " " What
did that man tell you ? " asked Dr. Fang again, " that he was my
servant ? And what piece of clothing did you bring anyhow ? "
The shopman said, " This morning that man came to our shop,
and said he was your servant, and that you wanted to buy a lady's
fur-cloak, and that we were to bring one for you to look at, and
if it suited you would keep it. He told one of us to come with
him, so I came." " Now, look here," said Dr. Fang, " that man
is no servant of mine, and I don't know who he is. He came
here yesterday and said he belonged to the so-and-so's, that his
master and mistress were ill and wished to come and consult me,
and told me to remain at home for them this morning. When he
came in just now and asked me, ' Master first, or Mistress first? '
I thought his master and mistress had come, and that's why I said,
' Your mistress first, of course.' I meant I would see his mistress
first. I know nothing whatever about any clothes. You be
quick and go and try and find him." When be had heard
this, the man from the second-hand clothes shop understood that
the other fellow was a swindler and had made off with the
clothes.
PAET 11 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 63
No. 38 o. Kuo Pu 1
b. Yes, Sir !
a. Go and ask the teacher to come to me.
b. The teacher has come, Sir ; he is sitting in the outer room.
a. (to c.) Ah ! have you rested yourself, Sir ?
c. Yes, I have ; I hope you have too.
a. Well, I don't feel very tired. There's something I want to
consult you about.
c. What is that ?
a. It's about the diary I kept while we were on our trip ; it
wants putting in order ; and to find someone to copy it out.
c. Well, if you will get me out the rough draft, I will look
over it first.
a. And there's one thing in it I have forgotten ; I wish yon
would think of it for me.
c. What is it 7
a. It was when we were having breakfast in the inn at San
Ho Chen, I heard one of the visitors say that some man stopping
at a temple somewhere had hanged himself, which got the priest
of the temple into trouble, and also that there had been some
legal proceedings ; but I don't recollect exactly how it all was.
Do you remember 7
c. Ah ! Yes, I remember that.
a. Then tell it me again please.
c. The visitor who was breakfasting said that there was a
temple where he lived called the Shui Hsien Miao, in which a
man was stopping who hanged himself one night. Next day, as
soon as it was light, the priest gave notice to the authorities, and
the District Magistrate with his examiners held an inquest. The
examiners, without making -a thorough inspection, said the man
seemed to have been strangled. On this the Magistrate took the
priest to his Yamen and asked him why he had strangled his
visitor. The priest answered, " I have neither any old grudge or
recent grievance with the man ; how could I have strangled him 7 "
The Magistrate, not believing this, applied corporal punishment
to make him confess, but it was all in vain, — he would not
confess, so the Magistrate then imprisoned him. Now the priest
had a novice, who was so disturbed by this that he went to the
provincial capital and laid a charge at the Governor's Yamen,
whereupon the Governor deputed the Magistrate of the adjoining
district, and he took skilled examiners with him and held a second
inquest at the temple, when it turned out that the dead man had
H THB G.UIDE TO. S.Vm ^M: f.'^% ,U
died by hanging. The Magistrate of the acjjpining distript haying
finished an accurate report of the facts to the Governor, then
degraded the Magistrate who held the original inquiry, and
punished the examiners who n^a,de the original ijaspection, and
rel^eased the priest. That was the story.
a. Yes, you're quite right ; that was it. I wish you would
insert it in the diary, — what do you say ?
c. Yes, certainly. When I have put it in proper order, who
is to transcribe it ?
a, I was going to engage someone to copy it.
c. If it is transcribed there would probably be some clerical
errors in it.
a. Then what had I better do ?
c. Well, if you're not in a hurry, I should thi,nk I might
transcribe it when I have time.
a. Oh, if you would take the trouble, I shpnjd be very much
obliged indeed.
c. No trouble at all.
No> 39 a- It is dull drinking our wine and doing nothing, as we are
doing to-day. Why shouldn't we fill up and play a few rounds
at morra 7
b. All right. Let you and I have a round first.
a. Why, that will be giving away the game to me for nothing,
won't it 7
b. Don't begin boaating yet. It's not certain who wins and
whp loses, you know.
a. Here you are. Four seasons making money.
br Si;?es !
a. Quits !
6. Five golden prizemen.
a. Look 1 how's tha,t?
b. Oh, you're losing. This time you only won by a perfect
fluke-
a. Drink your wine first, and we'll compare notes afterwards.
b. I've drunk it already.
a. When 7 I didn't see it.
b. Ask the others whether I've drunk it or not.
a. Qeiixt\ev[i^n^ did you see him dripk 7
PART n THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 65
c. We didn't notice.
a. The others haven't seen you ; it is evident you're shirking
it. Be quick and drink.
b. I've drunk already ; I can't drink again.
a. If you don't, we'll all pour it down your throat.
b. This is awful ! Well now, look here, I can't stand much
liquor, let my forfeit be a funny story.
a. Yes, that will do ; and if you don't tell a good one, you'll
still have to pay the forfeit.
h. Well, listen ; it is really a good one.
a. Out with it then.
b. The story is against the Censorate, so it's a good thing
there are no Censors in the company.
a. Just you tell your story. There's no one here who won't
take your side.
b. Well, listen. There was once a countryman who was very
poor and quite without means. So after turning the matter over
in his mind, he thought he would go to Peking and be a eunuch,
and have a fine position and make plenty of money. So he went
to Peking and entered himself as a pupil under an Imperial
eunuch.
a. But wait a bit. Your story needs explanation. There
would be no difficulty, of course, even for such a raw countryman,
in coming to Peking and going straight into the Palace, would
there ?
b. Well, I'm going to tell you. He got someone to introduce
him.
a. Well, why didn't you tell us that clearly at first ?
b. Don't be so excessively critical, and let me go on at once.
a. Go on. What happened next?
b. Well, having got the eunuch to be his tutor, he begged him
to instruct him in all matters and look after him. So the eunuch
sent him into the Imperial Palace as a domestic servant. One day
His Majesty's orders were given that refreshments were to be
served, so the countryman said, " The Everlasting Lord wants
luncheon ! " The eunuch cried out at him with, " Don't speak
in that stupid way ! You must say, ' The Everlasting Lord
desires to be served with Imperial Kefreshments.' " So be made
a note of this in his mind. One day commands were given for a
grand Court banquet, and the countryman again said, "The
Everlasting Lord wishes to give a dinner-party." Again the
eunuch scolded him : " You've used the wrong words ; you ought
10
66 THB GDIDK TO KUAN HUA. PART II
to have said, 'The Everlasting Lord desires to give an Imperial
banquet.' In future recollect well. For example, the Palace
Gardens are called the 'Imperial Gardens ;' the soldiers of the
escort are called the ' Imperial Guard.' "
The countryman heard this, and all of a sudden it all flashed
upon him, and he said to himself, " Why, of course ! You put
on the word 'Imperial' to everything that's in sight of the
Emperor. I understand it now. From this time I shall be an
old hand at it." One day, as he was passing the gate of the
Palace Gardens, he trod in a lump of excrement, which made
him very angry, and he was just going to swear when he thought,
" I suppose it's, been left by His Majesty," whereupon he pointed
with his finger at the lump and said, " If I didn't think you were
an Imperial Privy Counsellor, I would give you a good cursing
and no mistake ! "
a. It's lucky there are none of those gentlemen among the
company, or your mouth would have been swollen with twisting
by this time.
b. Well, my mouth isn't twisted. Now you should tell us
something.
a. My joke is against District Police Masters.
b. That's fun. We must all listen,
a. It's called the Ten Orders of a District Police Master.
b. Let's hear what you call the Ten Orders.
a. Listen. He is addressed with honour for one whole
lifetime : he has two pieces of bamboo borne before him : he
receives three times ten taels of salary : he summons the ti-paos
of four quarters : he inflicts Jive blows on the face : he sends
circulars to the six directions : he depends on the District Officers
of the seventh rank : he builds a figure of eight shaped wall : he
tacks on his uniform a badge of the ninth rank : and he doesn't
get his ten shares of enjoyment.
b. Good. The other nine sentences are all right, but the last
one is too bad.
a. If there were a District Police Master here to-day, wouldn't
you just have to make your peace with him !
No. 40 a. Have you kept at home this last day or two for the New
Year, and not gone out at all ?
b. I go out every evening.
a. Then why don't yoa come tp me bere ?
PAET n THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 67
h. The last few days I and some friends of mine hare been
guessing riddles in the evening at the entrance of the Ts'un Ku
Chai curio-shop.
a. Who set them ?
b. They were set by a chiijen.
o. Were they well written ?
b. Not bad at all.
a. Did you succed in guessing any ?
b. Yes, I took off some.i
a. What were they ?
b. One that I guessed was, " The character yen (word) without
the top dot : four passages from the Four Books."
a. Tell me, what were the passages ?
_ b. One was, " What words are those ? " ; one was, " Without
giving it the dot ; " another was, "The last words were but in
jest ; " and the other, " How true these words ! " ^
a. That was a hard one to guess.
b. I guessed another, which was three passages to be solved
by a single word.
a. Tell me, what were they ?
b. Listen : " Tzii-lu said, ' It is that,' Yen-hui said, <It is
like that,' Confucius said, ' It is not that ; in that lies a right
line.' " The word mieh (^) solves it.^ And another of four
sentences to be solved by one word : " With ten its mouth is
filled, but say not it is field, having nought for its head or its tail,
it worried a hsiu-ts'ai to death." I took this off by guessing the
word Fish (jf^).*
a. Those two were very ingenious.
b. Yesterday evening I guessed two more. One was : " The
course of history passing the Dragon Gate : " to be solved by a
man's name in the Four Books. Answer : Fish the Chronicler.^
The other was : " The sacrificial meats in shrines to the Virtuous
Dead ; " to be solved by a passage from the Four Books.
Answer : " Few there be that eat of them.''^
a. Very neat, those two.
b. There was another, guessed by a friend of mine : " Playing
chess on a wei-ch'i board ; " a sentence from the Four Books to
solve it. Answer : " Tzru-Iu answered not." ^
a. That is even neater. Do you know, some years ago I
guessed a conundrum : "At the ea«t end of the street clearing
the drains, and at the west end unclean ; " to be guessed by a
68 THH GUIDB TO KTJAN KUA. PAET 11
couple of nursery rhymes. Answer : " Puddles on this side,
devils on that." ^
b. Better than ever. I consider that will quite bear com-
parison, in point of cleverness, with those composed by this chiijen.
a. And I'll tell you one more. Last year a friend of mine,
who is a Chief Clerk in a public office, asked me to write him a
pair of New Year Scrolls. I wrote for the first, " Wishing you
the compliments of the season for the despatch of last year, I
have the honour to acknowledge the receipt of, etc., etc., etc.,"
For the second I put, " A Happy New Year from one who is
with great truth and regard. Your Excellency's most obedient
humble servant." ^
h. Too bad of you, really. How could you use their shop-
phrases 7 I've no doubt he would never hang that pair of New
Year Scrolls.
a. No, of course he wouldn't hang them up. " Very well,"
he said, " I can't hang these up, but I shall keep them because
they are quite in our line, and hereafter they will be an heirloom."
b. Don't you talk such nonsense ! Put on your things and
let's go for a bit of a stroll.
a. Wait a moment while I change my things,' and I'll go with
you.
Notes to No. 40.
'The Blip of paper on which a riddle is written is attached to the
lighted lantern, which thuB renders it legible in the surrounding darkness.
When guessed, the riddle is removed from the lantern.
^This and the following acrostics require explanation, especially as
in English translation the word-play must be lost. The four passages of
the first are respectively, Mencius, Ch. 2, Fart 1 ; Analects, Ch. 6, Part 1 ;
ibid., Ch. 9, Part 1 ; and ibid., Ch. 7, Part 1. I have translated them as they
are in the original classical text, except the second, which has here been
purposely changed by the substitution of ^ wu (not) for the ^ im (I)
of the Analects. The clue being the character s yen (=word or words),
maimed by the absence of the top dot, the first passage is made to read,
"What 'word' is that?" g.d. thus imperfectly written the character is
not yen (word) at all. The meaning of the second passage, as properly
written, is, "I hold with Tien," the latter being a man's name. But a
forced application is given by a double pun and the use of a different
sense for the second character. Thus im (I) is changed to wu (not), yii
takes the sense of giving, in place of that of holding or agreeing with,
and by a second pun tien has its ordinary rendering of a dot or stroke,
instead of being used as a proper name. The third and fourth passages
require no explanation beyond this, that in both "words" must be
changed to "word." I think this is quite enough elucidation for an
acrostic of which the character of the point turns on the point of a
character. '^
PART n THE aUIDK TO KUAN SUA. 69
' This riddle hinges on the likeness in form 'between the characters
Ta yeh and Ti mieh, and involves also the use of the former as a final
particle in the written language. Thus, the three speakers may be supposed
to say either " It is so, or that," etc., or " It is (the word) yeh," etc. The
passage translated "In that lies the right line" OlSb^'r') is from
the Analects, Ch. 7, Part 1. In the Classic, Confucius refers to the right
line of conduct to be followed by a son in the embarrassing, indeed
painful, position, where his parent having permitted himself an indul-
gence in the uncertain joys of sheepstealing, the son afterwards becomes
cognizant of the fact. But here, the " right line " is a physical not a
moral one, being the vertical middle downstroke which distinguishes
TSj yeh from »^ mieh.
* The character Jf^ y-u (fish) thus Solves this riddle. The numeral
I* Mh (ten) within |Ij h'ou (mouth) forms the character pg tHen
(field), two strokes above and four dots below which convert it into yil
(fish), while they are also the upper and lower parts, or the head and tall,
of the character 4|| «JJ* (nought or not).
= He is mentioned in the Analects, Ch. 6, Part 1. " The course of
history " corresponds to 5E sMh, meaning both history or a historian ;
"passing the Dragon Gate" corresponds to Jf^ yil (fish), standing here
for the li yil or carp, which, according to an old saying, is transformed
into a Dragon after passing the Dragon Gate, for which see Matbes'
Manual, p. 282. The phrase is used of successful graduation for degrees.
« Ta Ssio, Section 10.
' Analects, Ch. 4. Part 1. Tzu-lu is the name of one of Coiroucius'
disciples, but the two words are very neatly applied in this case to solve
the riddle by taking txii, lu as "the moves of the pieces" which pw tui
" do not correspond," namely in the two games of chess and wei-ch'i.
' Pu han-ohing has not only the meaning of physical uncleanliness,
but of that more dreaded infection caused by the presence of " the spirit
that walks in shadow."
It is worth noting that the syllables ahui and huei are considered
to rhyme, though in the orthography of Sir T. Wade this is disguised
by a slight difference of spelling.
» " I have the honour," etc., and " Who is with great truth," etc.
These formal expressions beat convey the spirit of the equally formal and
official phrases in the text.
70 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HTJA. PART HI
PART III.
No. 1 o- Who's there 7
b. It is me.
a. Come in.
b. I've brought the lad you told me to find for yon the other
day, Sir. If you've time just now I'll bring him in for you to
see, and if yoa like him you can keep him.
a. Of course, yes.
b. This gentleman is Mr. ChSng ; make your duty to him.
a. Where does he come from, and what's his name ; how old
is he, and what's his place in the family ?
c. I am a Shantung man ; my name is Chang ; I am eighteen
years old and the eldest son.
b. He has been many years in Peking ; he doesn't speak like
an outsider. He used to be a neighbour of ours and very sharp,
but he has never been a servant before, so he must be trained by
degrees.
o. That is all right. I've only recently come here and haven't
yet engaged anybody ; and I don't quite know whether it's
necessary to have a guarantee or not.
b. That's as you wish, Sir.
a. Very well, let it be this way then, — as he comes on your
recommendation, will you be guarantee 7
b. Yes, I will. And from when shall he begin to attend on
you. Sir?
a. H'm. To-day is the 28th ; two days more to the end of
the month. Oh, the best way will be just to tell him to come
on the 1st of next month.
b. Yes.
a. And there's his bedding and so on, tell him to bring that
with him too,
b. Yes, Sir ; and we must fix on a room for him to live in.
a. Well, I think that empty room facing south, and next the
bath-room, on the west, behind the white wall right at the end
of the court, would do for him, wouldn't it 7
PART in THI GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 71
b. To be sure, that would be a capital place.
« • • * *
b. Mr. C. has sent a man with a note for you, Sir.
a. Oh ! Mr. C. asks me to see him. I'll go now at once.
Then let the matter be settled in that way.
No. 2 a. Boy !
b. Yes, Sir !
a. Make some tea for the teacher.
b. What tea do you want, Sir, coffee or black tea ?
a. Neither, make some Japanese tea.
6. There's no more tea left, Sir, in the pewter canister.
a. Very well, you know the tin canister on the second shelf
of the cupboard in the inner room, — well take that; and after
this, whenever you see the tea in the canister is coining to an
end, even if I don't tell you, just replenish it.
b. Yes, Sir.
a. Make haste and get the tea, I'll make it myself.
a. Ask the teacher to have whichever ;cup of tea he likes best.
And yesterday you never looked what you were about, and put in
ever so much tea. It was made so strong that it was altogether
too bitter to drink. Didn't you see what faces Master Wu kept
pulling when he was drinking it yesterday 7
b. Yes, another time I will take more care when I'm making
the tea.
a. And the teapot, and cup and saucers, that are in the tray
on the tea-poy, bring them all here, and then see whether there's
any fire in the chafing-dish.
b. Yes, Sir. It's nearly out.
a. Then look sharp and bring some boiling water, and while
you're about it bring some live charcoal with you.
b. What do you call " live charcoal," Sir ?
a. Oh, what a fool you are ! Don't you even know what " live
charcoal " is ? Well, I'll tell you : charcoal that hasn't been
lighted is "fresh charcoal," and red-hot charcoal is "live charcoal."
b. Yes, Sir. Here's the hot water ; will you make tea, Sir ?
o. H'm, this spittoon is quite full. Take it away and rinse it
out and then bring it back.
b. Yes, Sir I
72 THB GUIDE TO KUAN KUA. PART HI
No. 3 a. Who's there ?
b. It's getting late, Sir ; get up at once.
a. H'm. Get some water for washing.
h. The water for washing is brought, the water for your teeth
is poured oat, and the soap-dish is on the washhand-stand.
a. Where's the tooth-powder ?
h. It's in the drawer of the table, with the tooth-brush.
a. Bring a towel.
h. Yes, Sir.
a. What are you in such a hurry for ? You needn't wash the
floor yet ; do that when you've folded up the bedding. You'll
have to change the pillow-cases and sheets to-day.
b. Yes, Sir. Will you have breakfast now, Sir ?
a. H'm, well yes, bring it. I don't want the eggs boiled so
\ard as they were yesterday ; the softer the better.
b. Yes, Sir, Will you have hot buttered toast to-day ?
o. No ; and look here, don't burn it.
b. Yes, Sir.
a. There's no spoon, nor salt-cellar.
b. Here they are, Sir ! Have you enough white sugar ?
a. Yes ! Ah, this egg is boiled just right.
a. Oh, there's a thing I want to ask you about. — I'm told the
milk sold here in Peking is always more than half water. Is
that so ?
b. Perhaps it may be so with the milk bought by ordinary
households, but they wouldn't dare to adulterate what we use
in this establishment.
a. In buying milk here, do yon buy it by the catty or by the
bottle ?
b. By the bottle or by the bowl. As a rule the price is not less
than nine pai a bottle, and two pai a bowl. Any more coffee, Sir 7
a. No, take away. I'm going to Mr. C's rooms. If anybody
wants to see me, let me know.
b. Yes, Sir.
No. 4 a. Sir, your boy has come to say your dinner is ready, and will
you go and have it.
b. All right, I'm coming.
* • * • •
a. Here I
c. Yes, Sir !
PART III THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 73
b. You ask me to come to dinner ; then why have you da\rclled
so and not served it ? What have you been about ?
c. Why, the coalman has just sent the coal-balls, and I weighed
them, and then the bill he had made out was wrong, and I went
over the memo, slip to see how many times he had sent. That's
what made late in getting dinner on the table.
b. Very well. And how much are the coal-balls a picul ?
c. Four tiao and more a picul.
b. Well, now get dinner.
c. Yes, Sir.
b. Tell the cook the chicken-broth he made for tiffin yesterday
was bad. Tell him to be more careful in skimming off all the
grease when he makes it to-morrow.
c. Yes, Sir.
b. Give me a helping.
c. Yes, Sir.
b. This isn't my rice-bowl ; it is your young master's,
e. Ah, I've brought the wrong one ; I'll change it for your's.
Sir.
b. Never mind about changing it. There's still a very
necessary thing wanting, — ^jnst think a bit.
c. Yes, yes. Sir ; — knives, forks, spoons, cruet-stand, plates,
dislies, chop-sticks, are all there, — I really can't think of anything
still wanting. Please to remind me, Sir.
b. No wine-glasses !
c. Why, of course ! I clean forgot them.
b. What is this ?
c. It's broth made of taros and chicken.
b. This is just to my taste. I think the cook must have put
in some Japanese Pish sauoe.^
c. Yes, Sir, I think very likely.
b. This is very good beef. Give me some mustard and salt.
c. Yes, Sir.
b. Now then ! Look here, you've knocked over this bowl
with your sleeve; get a duster at once and wipe it.
c. Yes, Sir.
'The term here used, mu yii, "wood fish," is in Japanese,
Katsudbushi. The fish is salted and smoked, and thus preserved and dried
looks very like a piece of light-coloured wood.
11
74 THE GUIDE Tb KtJAN HUA. PART III
b. You're always irl such a hurry-scurry in what you do. Just
look how you have made this brand-new table-cloth all over
dirty stains.
c. Please to orerlook it, Sir, for after this I will really be
careful about things.
h. Give me some salt vegetables.
c. There's no pickled cabbage to-day. I've got some soured
beancurd and some pickled cucumber. There is soy in the
cucumber already. Shall I add some more vinegar ?
h. No, I've finished now ; take away everything.
c. Toothpicks, Sir !
h. H'm. Bring the tea, and go and have your dinner.
No. 5 a. To-day is the 9th ; aren't you going to the Lung Fu 8sii,
Sir?
h. H'm. I have asked Mr. Wu to go with me. Go and ask
if Master Cheng is in or not.
a. I saw them just now go out; most likely he isn't in,
b. Very well, get out my clothes.
a. Which clothes do ^6u want ?
b. European.
a. Will you wear the woollen cloth ones or the linen ones ?
b. Well, it is rather cool to-day, so get out the black cloth
coat and that pair of striped grey linen trousers.
a. Look, Sir, it is this waistcoat and shirt you want, isn't it ?
b. Oh, I can't bear this set of studs, get those crystal ones
instead. How limp this collar has been starched ! Besides, the
dirt on it hasn't been washed dff ; and it has been ironed down
the wrong way. When the washerman comes to-morrow, just
tell him he must take more care in his washing, and he must use
more washing-powder in starching. And when he's spirting the
water over a thing, tell him to take an iron and iron it thoroughly,
so as to do the thing properly. Take out that pair of half-shoes.
a. Yes, Sir.
b. TheSe Socks rather want mending; tell the maid to get a
piece of patching and put it in.
a. Yes, Sir.
6. Don't go away yet ; stay and help me to dress. Where do
you want to go ?
a. To get a (Sfert for ^ou, Sir,
PART in THE C(U1BB TQ KUA^ HUA. 7$
b. Nq nee4 for that ; it's not far ; I can walk.
a. It looks better to drive.
b. Well, there's plenty of time to get one when I've finished
dressing.
a. Yes, Sir.
h. Give me the shoe-horn, and pull the bottom of my trowsers
down; and bring me a handkerchief, and the gold watch.
a. Do you want your cigar-case, Sir ?
b. Yes; and fold up the Japanese clothes I've taken off, and
mind you brush them.
o. Yes. One moment, Sir, there's a bit cr-eased here that
wants pulling out.
b. Is it smoothed out now ?
a. Quite smooth, Hir.
b. Well, I shall go and sit in Mr. Blank's room until you've
got a cart.
a. Yes, Sir.
No. 6 a. Please, Sir, the cart's here.
b. Tell him to go first to Legation Street, and from there to
the Liu Li Ch'ang. I want to buy some curios.
a. Yes, Sir ; if you are going to be there some time, Sir, I
think it would be best to hire it for the single journey.
b. No, there and back; it will save all further bother. Is the
cart you've engaged clean ? Is the body of it large or ^mall ?
And is the mule a good one 1
a. All very good ; this one to-day isn't a cart from a stand.
h. Then it's a cart that will go anywhere, eh ?
a. No, not one of those either ; it's a private cart.
b. A private cart ! Then how can it ply fpr hire ?
a. Well, their master has no employment just now, so for fear
the beast should get troublesome from want of work, he has told
the carter to put it to, and take it out for a day's hire. If you
don't believe me, Sir, you can see in a minute. It isn't only that
the mule is so fat, and that the cover and cushions of the cart are
suited to the weather and the time of year, but there are curtains
too.
b. Oh ! Then no doubt it's a very good one. But there's
another thing ; if the driver is a raw hand, when he gets to the
stone road at the Ch'ien MSn, he's sure to drive into all the ruts
76 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. PART m
and make one giddy and dizzy by the bumping, — even the back-
side of the person in the cart gets swollen by the jolting.
a. Oh, this one here is a clever driver ; he will never do like
that.
b. What's the charge 1
a. I've settled with him for six tiao; that includes the money
for his food too. If it's very late when you've driven back, why
you could give him a little extra for something to drink. Do you
want me to go with you, Sir '!
b. H'm. Well, yes ; you can ride on the shafts and come
with me.
a. Yes, Sir.
b. Put in the coloured rug first, and spread it out. And
haven't you got two official hats? You can lend one to the
carter to wear.
a. Yes, Sir. Do you want a stool to get in with ?
b. H'm, yes. Keep that end of the stool steady with your
foot. Oh, quick ! fetch my stick.
a. I've brought it; here it is, Sir. Better stick it indunder
the rug.
b. H'm. Now look sharp and get up.
a. (to the mule J Get up !
No. 7 a. Boy!
b. Sir !
a. I don't feel very well to-day. When the teacher comes,
tell him I shan't work to-day, as I am unwell, and so you needn't
show him in.
b. Yes, Sir.
a. Bring me that stool, and put the pipe-tray on it. I won't
take any breakfast this morning, but just bring me some coffee,
and then tell the cook he needn't get a meal ready, but to make
me a little rice congee, quite soft, but not to break the grains of
rice, not too thick and not too thin,— about the consistency of
treacle.
b. Yes, Sir.
a. Just pull the counterpane farther up.
b. Yes, Sir. Do you feel better just now. Sir? The flowers
you ordered, just now have come : shall I put them in the Juchow
porcelain rase ?
PART III THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 77
a. Yes, that will do. Just now my head still seems heavy,
and I feel nausea. Be quick and get my card, and go to the
Legation, and ask Dr. Ynng Chi to come.
h. Does Dr. Yung Chi visit patients ?
a. No, but this is a matter of friendship ; and besides, his
medical attainments are very high. He hasn't been here long,
but he has become quite famous in Peking.
h. That's true ; I've heard Chinese gentlemen say Dr. Yung
Chi's treatment and medicines are wonderfully effective.
a. The only thing is though, that Chinese who are friends of
his are always asking him to go and see their cases, so that he's
not often at home, and I'm afraid this time yours will be a
fruitless errand.
6. It's a good thing that your illness is not serious. Sir.
Supposing he's not at home, shall I ask some other doctor to see
you, Sir 2
a. In that case, yes, you might call in a Chinese doctor.
h. Our doctors all follow the native practice of medicine, which
is not the same as the foreign methods of treatment. Wouldn't
it be better to ask Dr. Dudgeon, of the Shih I Yuan, to attend
you, Sir?
a. Well, yes, it would be as well.
h. If you please, Sir, just the very thing. Dr. Yung Chi has
called to see you.
a. Well, that is fortunate ; ask him in at once, and get some
wine and refreshments ready.
b. What wine shall I open. Sir ?
a. Oh, open some champagne and bring some claret if there
is any. See what there is, in the way of fruit and refreshments,
and bring whatever there is.
h. Yes, Sir. You have the corkscrew locked up, haven't you.
Sir?
a. Yes ; it's on the top shelf of the cupboard, with the
screwdriver. Get some tea.
h. Yes, Sir.
a. Pour out some wine.
b. Yes, Sir.
a. Bring some cigars.
a. Show this gentleman out for me.
78 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. PART III
b. Yes, Sir. The Doctor has gone ; he told me to tell you
that the powder was to be taken in three doses, and you were to
be sure to take it just before sleeping ; and he said, too, that
you were to avoid eating anything cold and uncooked.
a. Why didn't he tell me th^t just now ?
b. I suppose he only just thought of it.
a. Well, in the evening serve it up to me.
b. Yes, Sir. Will you take some gruel now. Sir ?
a. Bring it in if it's ready, and bring me some pears too.
b. But didn't the doctor tell you to avoid eating cold and
uncooked things ?
a. H'm ; well, I won't have them then.
b. No, Sir.
No. 8 a. In a day or two I want to go to the Nankou Pass, and on
my way back, round by the Western Hills, so as to visit any
pretty scenery in the neighbourhood, and then come home.
Would you like to come with me ?
b. Of course I would. Sir. If you were to go through fire and
water, I would go with you. Sir.
a. Have you ever been there before ?
6. Yes, I went once last year with another gentleman. Do
you mean to go in a chair or to ride. Sir ?
a. Oh, anyway will do for me,- but I'm going to take your
Mistress, so tell me beforehand all the difierent articles we shall
need.
6. Well, as Mistress is going too, there's no doubt we must
take some extra things. Because you see. Sir, from the time we
will leave here, and as soon as we stop at an inn, there is one
thing you wouldn't think of. Sir, and that will be wanted, for it
is very important for Mistress, because if she were to want to
relieve nature, I'm afraid there would be no convenient place
for her.
a. Then how shall we manage ?
b. Our own women always take their own close-stools when
they travel, so we must take the same thing too this time ; or
else take along a very long and broad piece of cloth, besides
getting four bamboo poles ; then after we get into the inn, and
have settled down, we can put up a screened-ofi place as a w.-c.
That might be done.
a. Oh, now I shouldn't wonder if there were some other
inconreuience of the kind, eh ?
PART ill TflE GUIDE TO KUAH HtjA. 79
b. Well, Sir, I'll tell you; not to speak of having to take
bedding and other articles, we must carry vpith us some extra
stores for Mistress' food too. And supposing you want to go
and bathe at T'ang Shuan, yon will hare to spend several more
days, and of course you will want still more things for the time
you stay there.
a. Well, then, to-morrow first engage a chair, and a mule, and
then carefully think over what food we must take, get it all ready
and pack it in a hamper, for convenience of carrying it.
b: Yes, Sir ; you need not give yourself any trouble about
taking the things, as you've got me. As soon as the traps and
the provisions are all put up properly, I will hire a cart, and put
them all in it, and then I can look after the things and ride at
the same time very nicely.
No. 9 «• Oh ! I have had such a job ! But to-day at last I've
managed to rent a house. It used to be a small temple ; the
rooms are beautifully clean, and the rent isn't high.
b. Where is it ; and how many rooms are there ?
a. Outside the Ch'i-hua Men, west of the temple of the Sun.
I don't know what the name of the place is. The house has
three rooms in the main-building, with four side-rooms, besides
two rooms facing the main range. In the East single there's a
kitchen and a room for you. I must find a place to put up a
w.-c. after I've moved in.
b. And when do you mean to move. Sir ?
a. I want to move over to-day as soon as possible, so as to be
able to reckon from the beginning of the month, when paying the
rent there.
b. Then I must make haste and put all the things together
to-day.
a. H'lln. Well, first move all the small things into the court-
yard. Sweep the carpeit first with tea-leaves, roll it Up ^nd cord
it. Then take the bookshelves and the cupboard, and the rest of
the heavy things, pick out the strong ones and pack them in the
big cart that Liu Erh has hired.
b. Yes ; and I think. Sir, it will be safer if all your small
articles outside are put in a large packing case, and the coolie
carried them on a pole.
a. Very good, but all the crockery must be carefully wrapped
in paper. If the bedstead can't be carried, it must be unshipped
and put together after it has been taken across, and then the
curtains can be put up as before.
80 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. PART III
b. Must the nails that the scrolls and the inscription tablet
used to hang from be pulled out, Sir ?
a. H'm. Hi ! hi ! Do take care and not knock all the dust
on the wall down ! Why don't you pull them out with pincers
instead of knocking them out with a hammer ?
b. Yes, Sir.
a. Hi ! Tell the coolie to be careful, when he's going through
the front gate, not to spoil the table by knocking it about.
b. Yes, Sir. I'd better go along with the things, and arrange
them beforehand as they were before, hadn't I ?
a. No, you needn't do that yet. When the place has been
swept, and the carpet put down ; the tables and chairs can be put
anywhere for the time, until I go over and arrange them properly
in their places ; and if you can't do it all by yourself you can get
someone to help you. But everything must be taken over within
the day, mind that !
b. Yes, Sir.
No. 10 «• It's a fine day to-day, and there's no wind ; you must air
the clothes.
b. Yes, and shall I air the bedding too ? »
a. H'm. Bring a piece of cord first, and tie it from this post to
the tree ; when you've done that, hang the clothes on the line to dry.
b. Yes, Sir. Then perhaps I had best carry out the leather
trunk and the box into the court.
a. H'm. Here are the keys, open the boxes yourself. The
fur-cloak, the fur-coat, and the long cloak without sleeves, that are
hanging on the clothes-horse, must be aired in a shady place.
b. Yes, Sir. * • I've shaken out the clothes, and put them
to air in the sun. Will you go and have a look. Sir.
a. H'm. Well, I'll go and see * * What's this ? Didn't I
tell you the skin-clothes must be aired in the shade? What have
you hung them up with the other clothes for ? Surely you know
if you ever put skin things in the sun, the fur turns yellow.
b. Yes, Sir. Then shall I get a stick and put it through
them and hang it on the nail ?
a. That will do ; and presently you must shake them out
thoroughly.
b. Yes, Sir.
a. And those clothes there must be sorted into double things
and wadded ones.
6. These ones are wadded.
PART Hi THE GDIDB TO KUAN HUA. 81
a. Begin hanging them on a line from this end and go straight
on to the other end.
b. Yes,- Sir. I think at midday they should be turned the
other side about, and the ones that have been in the sun change
places, and make those that are in the shade get the sun, don't
you think so, Sir ?
a. Yes, that will do very well. And now finish doing this,
and then take the boxes and knock them out.
b. Yes, Sir ; and till what time would you like the things
aired before I put them away ?
a. Wait till the sun is just over the hills about, but mind, you
must fasten the cord up into the room and let them be exposed
to the draught, otherwise if the woollen things are put into the
boxes with the heat still in them, their gloss will go oS them and
they will be spoilt.
b. Yes, Sir ; and what about the silk and satin things ?
a. They are just the same, so this evening put them by as they
are, for the time, and to-morrow morning put them away as they
were before in the boxes, in layers and with paper in between ;
put in some camphor, cover them over with a wrapper and stuff
it in tightly all round on each side, and put on the lid, or else the
camphor will evaporate.
b. Yes, Sir.
a. Here, wind up the string as it was before and hang it on
the beam in the store-room,
b. Yes, Sir. Please, Sir, I can't remember at the moment
how you fold the Japanese clothes.
a. Oh, what a useless creature you are ! I took such pains to
show you, and you've forgotten it again. You've no memory at
all. Look here, they are folded like this. First fold over the
left-hand lower edge, then take the right-hand lower edge and
fold it over on to the top of that, after that take the dress and
give it a pull out, double the collar over on top, smooth it out
flat, fold over the two sleeves outside each side, give another
double over, and there you are.
b. Thank you kindly for showing me. Sir.
No. 11 a. Boy 1
b. Yes, Sir !
a. I'm going to invite some people to dinner to-niovrow ; sfo
into the Chinese city and engage a place.
b. How many guests do you intend to ask, Sir ?
12
82 . THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. PART m
a. About ten, I think, there will be.
b. Oh, then a dining-saloon will be better than a restaurant.
a. What's the difierence between the two ?
b. In a dining-saloon the dinners are ready laid ; in a
restaurant the dinners are either ready laid or you can order
things separately. But when there are many guests a dining-
saloon is best.
a. What are "dinners ready laid" ?
b. A "dinner ready laid" means one with eight principal
dishes and four sorts of cold vegetables, and any "extras" wanted
besides can be had at will.
a. And when you order separately ?
b. Then you tell them to do for you on the spot whatever you
have a fancy for.
a. Oh, then the dinner ready laid will be more comfortable;
but mind, the dishes ordered must be plain, not rich.
b. Which dishes, Sir, do you think would be most to liking of
your guests ?
a. Oh, I can't call to mind the names of the dishes ; yoo must
choose some that are not too rich, and decide as you think best
after consideration. You had better give 100 tiao a table. I
want huang chiu not shao chiu, for wine.
b. Will you go to the. theatre?
a. Well, I understand at Chinese dinners they generally go to
the theatre, so I will do the same.
b. If you want to engage them immediately, I am afraid there
won't be any boxes to be had ; if there aren't, will ordinary
seats do?
a. Yes, they will do ; if you take boxes, mind and find ones
that are not behind a column.
b. It's of no consequence, I suppose, whether they are on the
left or the right side of the stage.
a. The right side is best ; on the other the gongs are such a
nuisance. Another thing, — the last two days when I was at the
theatre, I saw a man eating in the box opposite ; is that all
right ?
b. Why yes, Sir, quite. It is mostly done when there are
hsiang kung invited to meet the guests.
a. Who do you call hsiang kung ?
b. Haven't you seen very good-looking young actors often
standing at tbe side of the stage, Sir ?
PART III THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 83
a. Oh, I remember. Yes, certainly, there are people like
that. What do they do ?
J. Sometimes they sing on the stage, sometimes they come in
with the wine. If you would like to to see, Sir, to-morrow when
I go to the dining-saloon, I can send a slip of paper, and tell one
or two to come in with the wine ; it adds very much to the
exhilaration of drinking.
a. Why, it would be very jolly.
h. If you would like a Military Piece, Sir, you will have a
Castanet accompaniment. If you like a piece from civil history
you have a flute accompaniment.
a. I should like flutes best.
6. Then will you hear the San Ch4ng or the Ssu Hsi?
a. The' Ssu Hsi, I think.
b. Then I will go now and make arrangements.
a. Oh, and the tips for the waiters, and the theatre-money, —
I will pay them to-morrow through you.
b. Yes, Sir.
No. 12 a. Have you changed those ten dollars yet ?
h. Yes, Sir, I have.
a. What did you get for them ?
5. 114 taio 4: pai 4.
a. What rate for the dollar ?
J. 1 1 tiao 4 jmi 4.
a. How's that ? That's a better exchange than yesterday.
b. Yes, Sir, the value of silver has risen.
a. How is it, it has risen again ?
b. Because of the heavy fall in the market-rate.
a. Who fixes the market-rate then ?
b. You don't ^ndertand, Sir. At the Chu Pao Shih, outside
the Ch'ien Men, there is a Silver-Market. Very early every day
people from all the cash-banks in Peking go to the market to buy
and sell silver. If there is much silver on the market on a
particular day, the rate falls : if there is little, the rate rises.
When the buying and selling is all arranged, the amount of cash
for which a tael exchanges becomes the rate of that day, and all
the cash-shops in the Tartar City go by this rate. There can't be
any certainty about the buying and selling ot silver ; each day has
its own rate, •
84 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. PAET III
a. Then how much does a dollar exchange for in taels ?
b. The general rate is reckoned as seven mace to the dollar,
and the trade-dollar and the Mexican dollar are supposed to be
the same value, and the Japanese dollar to exchange for a little
less ; but practically there is no difference. Here are the notes,
Sir ; they're all issued by Ho Feng.
a. I simply can't read the amounts written on the notes ;
what do they have such writing as that on them for?
b. This is a large bO-tiao, note, this is for 1 tiao, these are
small notes for 5 tiao, 4 tiao, 3 tiao, and 2 tiao. This is the small
change for the 4 pai 4.
a. Yes, I will count over the notes myself.
b. Do you make them right?
a. Yes, quite right ? but this bO-tiao note will be of no use ;
take it away and get 5 iiao's worth of cash, and change the rest
into small notes.
b. Yes ; do you want them from the same bank?
b. If the same bank has no small notes, you may exchange
it for some from another, but mind, the bank's name must be a
reliable one. "
b. Of course. I'll change it at the Ssii Heng, that will be
quite safe.
a. Well, go and do so.
No. 13 a. Where have you been ?
b. Just now my own elder brother came in from the country
to see me, and told me my mother was very ill. He took me
outside to speak to for a time ; that's why I have been all this
time, and wasn't able to tell you, Sir.
a. That's all nonsense. Never mind how long you go out for,
you ought to let me know.
b. Yes, I shan't venture to be so thoughtless in future. Sir.
Oh, and another thing. I want to ask a few days' leave to go
home and tend my mother while she is sick.
a. Is your mother really sick ; aren't yon getting leave on
false pretences ?
b. If I were as bold as bold could be, Sir, I could never dare
to bring down a sickness on my mother.
a. Well, as it is true then, how many days' leave do you want
to have ?
b, If my mother's illness is not serious, I will come back in
two or three days, but if by any chance my mother should have
PART III THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 85
something mortal, then I'm afraid I should be some days
longer.
a. When youVe gone, have yon got a substitute?
h. There's a friend of mine who has been in service in the
French Legation ; I can get him to come and take my place for
a few days.
a. What is he like ?
b. Well, there's nothing else against him except that he
smokes a little opium.
a. H'm. No, I don't want an opium-smoker. The best way
will be this, you needn't find a substitute, but get Mr. Wu's boy
to look after me for you for a few days.
b. That will be better, yes.
a. When do you want to go ?
b. If you will let me go. Sir, I will get away from the city
this evening.
a. Well, if you want to get out of the city to-day, as it's
getting on now, don't dawdle, but look sharp and put things
away.
b. There's one other thing, Sir, — I hope you will advance me
next month's wages.
a. I haven't got so much money, so I can't advance you the
whole of it. I'll give you ^3 in advance, and besides that I will
make you a present of ^1.
b. Thank you, Sir, for being so kind.
a. Well, now go and fetch Mr. Wu's boy, and give him over
everything that concerns the room, so that he quite understands,
and fetch out the lamp-globe you broke yesterday, and give it
over to him, and tell him to-morrow to match it with another of
the same kind.
b. Yes, Sir.
NO' 14 a. There's a visitor coming to-morrow ; take the coolie with
you and clean out the guest-room,
b. Yes, Sir. There's one of the three divisions that has the
awning broken and the framework of the awning fallen down, and
the paper of the wall has peeled off from the damp.
a. H'm. Yes, you're right. Well, you must tell a paper-
hanger to come and paper it.
b. Yes, Sir. You have some flowered white paper by you,
haven't you, Sir ?
86 THE fiUIDB TO KUAN HUA. PART III
a. Yea, ever so many reams of it. You must paper the lower
half of the walls with foi-eign paper, and put a border of the blue-
lined paper all round on the awning.
b. Very good, Sir. And we must buy a dozen or so of millet-
stalks to lash the framework together.
a. H'm. Well, can you have it all finished in one day ?
b. The days are so long now, we can finish it in the day quite
well.
a. And the scaffolding, — have we to furnish the man with the
poles ?
b. 'No, they bring those themselves.
a. What else is there to be bought ?
b. Why, there's the flour to make paste, and some bamboo-
slips, and some hemp-cord — three things.
a. Well, first of all go and sweep out thoroughly the two
divisions in the outer room, and if there are any cobwebs on the
awning you must sweep them away ; sweep the dust off the walls,
and thoroughly dust the folding doors ; clean the glass of the
windows, too ; then take a duster, dip it in water, wring it dry,
and scrub the floor ; and mind and be careful not to dirty the
wall with the duster. Now go and set to work.
b. Yes, Sir.
o. Here !
b. Yes, Sir !
a. I've just got a letter, it's no good ; the visitor will be here
directly.
b. Why, but the awning hasn't been papered; what had we
better do ?
o. Well, look here ; go at once and clean out the room, and
ask the gentleman to put up with it for the time.
b. Yes, Sir.
a. Listen ; there's a cart hag pulled up outside the front gate ;
it's probably the visitor.
b. It you please, Sir, it is the visitor arrived.
a. I'll go and receive him first ; you tell the coolie to be quick
and sweep out the room, and you go out and bring in the luggage.
b. The luggage is all brought in ; will you ask the gentleman
to count over the number, and see if they're all right.
a. Yes, the gentleman says they are quite right.
b. Oh, and the carter says you've forgotton to give him his
$2 for the fare.
PART III THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 87
a. Take out these two dollars to him then, and go and see it
the room has been cleaned out ; take the luggage and move it
into the room and arrange it properly, and then come and make
some tea and draw some water to wash with.
h. Yes, Sir.
No. 15 a. What ! another lamp-globe broken.
b. So there is ; that's another one spoilt.
a. I'm always telling you, when the lamp is first lit the flame
wants to be low, and then, after a bit, to be turned up higher ;
but you never pay any attention ; you've got no memory at all.
Last year you did the same thing, — you never improve. The
fact is, you didn't pay any attention to what I told you ; what
do you mean by it ?
b. Well, it was because of my being careless for once.
a. Oh, it isn't only "for once" that you have been careless.
You never at any time have been careful. Take last winter for
instance, — you never once cleaned* the stove. This year, when
the fire was left off, you didn't even clear out the coal left inside,
and you didn't put any polish on the stove, but just threw it into
the lumber-room, and after some time it was all covered with
rust. And the coal too, stacked like that in the courtyard, any
day it might catch fire.
b. I didn't know it was.
a. Then you must be blind 1
b. It is the coolie's business, not for me to look after.
a. Don't talk such stupid nonsense ! Can't you tell the coolie
to put it away ?
b. I have told him ever so many times, but he won^t mind.
a. Don't keep on making excuses. You're always so obstinate.
6. How am I obstinate ?
a. Well, tell me then, yesterday when I came back, where
had you gone ?
b. I hadn't gone anywhere at all.
a. Then what do you mean by taking no notice when the things
in the room here were all topsy-turvy and had brought ever so
many flies in ?
b. Why, a friend of mine came and kept me some time, so I
couldn't put things to rights.
a. Well, I don't care ; but after this, when I go out, you will
just have to make the room quite tidy, fold up the clothes, put
88 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. PART HI
on some coals in the amall stove, bank up the ashes, see what
there is that isn't -vranted, empty out and throw away whatever
has to be emptied or thrown away, — then you'll have eyes in
your head; but never to do a thing until you are told of it, is
that the way a man should do ? Besides that, you are for ever
smashing things, — it isn't the way to do at all. Then lately you
have got another bad habit, — when your friends come you take
out all sorts of things of mine and use them. Do you think
that's the right thing ?
h. When have I taken your things, Sir?
a. Don't refuse to acknowledge it. Yesterday you took some
of my tea, for I came in very quietly and saw you.
b. I didn't take it.
a. As you say you didn't take it, I will go just now to your
room and search.
b. You can go and search and welcome.
a. Look here ! What's this ? Are you still stubborn ?
b. I bought that myself.
a. Here it is, the thing stolen and the man that stole it. If you
still refuse to confess, go and be d— — d to you, I don't want you !
b. Don't get angry, Sir. I did take your things, Sir ; please
forgive me.
a. Well, since you've confessed, I'll keep you. But in future,
if you continue to have these bad habits you will have to march
at once.
b. Yes, Sir ; my respects to you, Sir, and thank you for your
kindness.
No. 16 a. Oh please, Sir, your bridle is broken.
b. Broken, where ?
a. The bit is broken.
b. Then take it to the saddler's to be mended.
a. Yes, Sir.
b. And look here, latterly the saddle, stirrups, and the girths,
and all that gear, have got fearfully dirty. Why don't you look
after them ?
a. Not a bit. Sir, every day I look after them.
h. Then how could the iron-work on them have got rusted 1
a. It's because I haven't rubbed them with brickdust.
b. The last few days I have ridden, the pony has seemed weak
in the feet, and kept on stumbling ; what's the reason of that ?
PART III THB GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 89
a. It's true, Sir. / noticed he had a trick of that, too.
b. I think very likely he's cast a shoe, or perhaps been badly
shod, — it may be that possibly.
a. Well, I'll take him to the veterinary surgeon's to-day and
have him shod over again.
i. Yes, you might. And another thing, — how is it the beast
never makes flesh ?
a. "What, not make flesh ! It's you can't see it. Sir, that's
what it is.
b. I can see perfectly well. I know what it is ; it is because
you don't feed him at night. If the beast goes on not
putting on flesh, why, I won't let you have the contract for
his feed.
a. Don't say that. Sir. Whether it's bran, black pulse, red
millet, Indian corn, or hay, there's none of them I don't give him
plenty of.
b. This morning I saw a whole lot of water standing outside
the stable-door ; what water was it 1
a. That wasn't my doing ; it was the man that looks after the
bath-room did it.
b. Tell him to come here then.
a. Yes, Sir, I'll go and find hkn.
c. Do you want to have a bath now. Sir ?
b. I've got a question to ask you first. What did you throw
the dirty water from the bath outside the stable for?
c. It wasn't thrown there. It's the mouth of the drain is
stopped up, and the water has OTerflowed.
6. Then you will have to clean the drain out.
c. Yes, Sir ; I will go and clean it at once. Isn't to-day the
day you have your bath, Sir ?
b. Have you heated any bath-water ?
c. Yes, it's all ready and poured into the bath.
b. Then take the towels and soap and come with me. Step
forward a pace first until I have finished making water.
c. Yes, Sir.
b. Look here, you must sweep the bath-room floor clean, and
not make it so slippery as this.
c. Yes, Sir. Is the water too hot, Sir ?
13
90 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HOA. PART HI
b. It is rather; put in a little more cold, and give me a
scrubbing.
c. Yes, Sir.
h. Is there much dirt on me ?
c. Not very much.
h. Well, rub me quite clean,
c. Yes, Sir.
No. 17 a- I am going to Shanghai, so pack up my things.
b. How soon do you start, Sir?
a. In a day or two.
I. Then shall you take the heavy baggage too ?
a. No, no. I mean to ask some friend to sell it by auction.
This evening and all night I will separate the things to be
sold by auction from those I'm leaving, and then you arrange
them.
b. Shall I empty out these boxes first, and stick these small
odds and ends inside 1 *
a. All right, but when you have, you must wedge them all
tightly in with packing-straw or cotton-wool, so that they shan't
shake about.
b. Yes, of course ; and what about the clothes ?
a. As soon as they are packed in the leather trunk, make
them into one bundle with the soft-stuff things.
b. Very good.
a. And the books in the bookshelves, the rubbings, and the
scrolls, — wrap them all in paper.
b. I'll just take out the characters from the presentation
tablet; the frame can't be taken, — what's to be done with it?
a. Never mind that for the present.
b. The boxes are packed, Sir ; when the lids are put on, I
might nail them down at once, I suppose.
it. Yes, certainly. Give me that sheet of red paper, I'll write
some labels to stick on the boxes.
b. The lock of the leather trunk must be turned and it must
be packed in packing-matting, and after that corded up, and then
it will be saved from being knocked about by the cart.
PAST III THK GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 91
a. Quite right ; and the knots in the cord must be tied quite
tight, in case after the box is put in the cart it might shake loose.
Be quick and send the coolie to buy two sheets of eiled paper,
to wrap up the silks in.
b. Yes, Sir ; and hadn't I better take down the cloth portiere
and roll it up ?
a. Very well ; and put the cover on the sunshade ; and then
take these writing-materials and pack them in the white box for
presents.
b. Shall I roll up your bedding now 7
a. Fold up the double coverlet and the wadded quilt, and put
them inside the mattress-cover. The mattress I shall want
spread in the cart to-morrow.
b. Yes, Sir ; and how would it be, do you think, to-morrow,
to make the box in matting fast at the back of the cart ?
a. All right ; and before packing the crockery yon must dip
some paper in water and stick it on to it to make it safe.
b. Yes, that's a capital plan. If you please. Sir, Mr. C. has
sent somebody with a parting present for you.
a. Bring it in. Take out a card and tell him to go back and
give my thanks for it.
No- 18 «• What have you been doing ?
b. I've been watering the flowers in the garden.
a. How are the flowers looking ?
b. Just now they are in full bloom ; there's a beautiful show
of blossoms.
a. What's all that mud on you hands ?
b. I have been handling soil in the garden.
a. As soon as you've had you meal, I want to send yon with
a present.
b. Yes, Sir ; for what house is it ?
a. For Mr. Hsii, at the Hou Men.
b. Then I'd better have my head shaved now first.
a. Oh, it's not enough to have your head shaved, you must
have your queue dressed.
b. It's all done at one time, shaving and dressing the queue.
a. You must put on some cleaner clothes, too. Your common
ones you do your dirty work about the house in, they'll never
look nice. When you go to another house, if you want to do the
proper thing, you must be tidy.
92 THE GUIDE TO KUAN fiUA. PART HI
b. The fact is, Sir, I haven't got any boots or hat.
a. You can borrow a hat and a pair of shoes from the other
servants. Now look ^arp and go and get ready ; don't waste
time.
b. I'm quite ready now, Sir. Please give me what orders
von have for me. And have you sorted out the presents,
Sir?
a. Look here, here are four boxes of things, and here's my
official card.
h. I must go and hire a cart then ?
a. Not at all, the things inside are fragile, and the cart might
jolt them, so you will have to tell the coolie to go along with
you and carry them.
b. Yes, that will do very well.
a. When you get there say, " These things are special local
prodnots brought by my master, who has recently come back from
the country, which he hag taken the liberty to send for your
master's use; " and you must be sure and leave the cardf then
come back home.
b. Yes, Sir ; then I can go now, Sir ?
a. Oh, and besides that, go into the garden and pick a few
bimches of flowers and take with you, and leave them at Mr. Wu's
house on your way.
b, I've come back. Sir.
a. Was Mr. Hsii at home ?
b. Yes, Sir, and he called me in and said, " Your master
should have kept these things, that he has brought back from
ever so far oS, for his own use; why should he have troubled
himself to think of me ? It makes me feel quite uncomfortable."
With that he gave me a card in return, and I was to thank you
for your kind attention, Sir.
a. Yes, and what's that red packet you have in yonr hand ?
b. Oh yes, to be sure ! I was going to tell you. Sir, it is a
present that the gentleman there gave me. I did want not to
accept it, but Mr. Hsii said, "You just take it; if you don't
accept it, why I shall be angry," and so I felt forced to accept
it from him.
a. Well, well, go and rest a bit.
PART III THB GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 93
No. 19 a- Have you finished washing your face ?
b. I have, Sir.
a. I want to send you out to buy some things.
b. What things, Sir ?
a. I want to get some mushrooms from outside the Wall, some
dried prawns, and some dough-strips.
b. Shall I buy them at the Ssu P'ai-lou?
a. No, not from the Ssu P'ai-lou. Those shops there haven't
a single good one amongst them.
b. Then shall I go into the Chinese city to get them ?
a. The best way will be to get them in the Chinese city,
at a salt provisions' store on the east of the Ch'ien Men
Street.
b. Ah, yes ; their things are certainly good, but rather dear.
a. They are, but nothing out of the way.
b. How much do y®u want. Sir ?
a. I want one catty of mushrooms, a catty and a half of
dried prawns, and ten strips of dough. Now how much are the
mushrooms a catty ?
b. Some are 6 tiao 4, and some 4 tiao 8.
a. The cheaper ones are not so good, no doubt ?
b. Of course.
a. Then buy the dearer ones, but make them give you full
weight.
b. They wouldn't dare to give short weight.
a Well, it is the way of these trading people to be in the
habit of asking extravagant prices, so don't you simply agree to
what they ask, you must bargain back.
b. But you don't know. Sir, the large shops have all fixed
prices ; they wouldn't think of asking extravagant prices.
a. That's all right then. Also bring some fresh fruit from
outside the city, for me.
b. What sort of fruit do want. Sir ?
a. Are there any apricots and plums to be had still ?
b. No, there are no more of those two kinds now.
a. Then buy some pears, peaches, apples, sha-kuo-tzU [a small
variety of apple], some small, red apples [^piri^-tiu], dried dates,
and grapes, — those sorts.
6, How much of each ?
94 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. PART lU
a. Buy one catty of grapes, and one of dates, and get ten of
each sort of all the rest.
b. Yes, Sir.
a. Take this AO-tian note with you ; and besides getting these
things, mind and buy some sugar-candy and arrow-root with the
spare cash.
b. Yes, Sir ; then I'll be going now at once.
a. Wait a bit ; look here, here is a bad lO-tiao note ; take it
to the Wan Shun Furriers' shop in the Chu Shih K'ourh, and
tell them it is a forged note, and they are to change it immediately
for another and give you that to bring back.
b. But how do you know it is their bad note, Sir ?
a. I marked it ; and besides, I went there to buy something
some days ago, and they got it for me.
b. After that have yon anything more, Sir 7
a. Yes, I have. As yon come back, just take that tailor's
shop on your road, and inquire if the article I ordered is ready or
not ; if it is, wrap it up in a parcel and bring it home.
No. 20 a. Chang Fu !
b. Sir !
a. Come here ; I've something to say to you.
b. Yes, Sir, what have you to tell me ?
a. There's a gentleman, that has been promoted to be Consul
at Canton, who is looking out for a servant, and I'm thinking of
recommending you to him. Would you like to go or not ?
b. I'm much beholden to you, Sir, for your great kindness, and
I should like to go, but then I don't know for how many years it
will be.
a. This gentleman would probably have to remain three ye&rs
at Canton. If he is willing for you to stay with him there for
three years, what do you say ?
b. Yes, I wouldn't mind that.
a. But there's one thing now ; if this gentlemen, when the
three years are up, should be promoted to another place he would
pay you your passage and send you back here ; and if before the
end of the three years he discharges, you, he will also pay your
passage back here. But if, before the three years are up, you
yourself leave his service to come back, then you'll have to find
the passage-money, and it will be no affair of big whateyer.
b. Yes, I understand. Sir.
PART III THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 95
a. Then about wages ; the gentleman offers to give you $10
a month, and he will find you in clothes all the year round,
what do you say 7
h. I'm quite willing to take $10 a month wages, but there are
two things, Sir, I'd be much obliged if you would mention, Sir.
a. What are tbey ?
b. One is, I hope you'll first ask the gentleman to adrance me
$10 as an allotment to my family. The other is, that five or six
dollars a month of my wages should be paid in Peking to my
family, so as to save the trouble of their getting the money to
Peking from a distance.
a. Yes, I'll speak to him about that ; that can be managed.
But about advancing you $10 as allotment-money, what sort of
cteduction a month do you propose ?
b. It can be as the gentleman pleases ; he could stop a dollar
or two dollars every month.
a. Very well.
b. If the gentleman agrees to these two things, I should like
to pay the money to my family through your hands, Sir.
a. Very proper. As soon as it is all settled I will write a pay
order and give it you. Someone from your family can be sent to me
on the first of each month, with the pay order, to fetch the inoney.
h. I am much obliged to you. Sir. Now, after I'm gone. Sir,
you will want another servant, won't you, Sir. What do you
think if a relative of mine came into your service, Sir ?
a. How old is he ?
b. Eighteen this year.
a. Has he been in service before ?
b. Yes, Sir, he was in service first in the Russian Legation.
a. Well, let that stand over for a bit, because there's a gentle-
man that has recommended a servant to me. He is coming in a
day or two on trial. If he won't do, then tell your relative to come.
b. I'll wait till I hear from you, Sir, then.
a. Within the next day or two put all my things in order, so
that you can hand them over to the new man, and reckon up
everything outstanding from first to last.
h. Yes, Sir ; and supposing everything is decided, when shall
I commence work ?
a. Well, there are eight days more from now to the end of the
month,— then, of course, you'll begin work on the first of next
month.
6. Very well.
96 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. PART lY
PART IV.
No. 1 a. This is His Excellency our newly-appointed Minister. H.E.
has called for the purpose of paying his respects to Your
Highness and Your Excellencies, the Grand Secretary and the
Ministers.
b. Ah, we have been looking forward to this moment, and that
we should to-day be so fortunate as to meet shows, I assure you,
a predestined connection between us.
a. The Minister begs to inquire after the health of Your
Highness and Your Excellencies.
h. Thank you, thank you ! Pray beg H.E, [the Minister to
take the seat of honour.
a. The Minister says that he could not venture to take that
seat, which he begs Your Highness will take.
b. But that is impossible ; this being H.E.'s first visit to our
Office, the place of honour is his by right.
a. In that case, tbe Minister says, he shall bow to your wishes.
b. Quite right, quite right ! When did H.E. arrive in
Peking ?
a. On the 16th of this month.
h. We have long ago heard what an impartial administrator
H.E. here is, and what an extreme value he sets upon friendly
relations. Now that he has been appointed to represent his
Government in this country he will not fail in his conduct of
relations to be guided in all things by a spirit of justice and
fairness, to the advantage of the people of both countries.
Nothing could be more fortunate !
a. The Minster says that Your Highness and Your Ex-
cellencies are far too flattering. He is painfully conscious of his
own deficiencies and of his unfitness to undertake this responsible
position, in which he shall at all times beg Your Highness and
Your Excellencies to afford him your advice.
b. His Excellency is really too modest. It is we who will beg
advice from H.E.
a. The Minister says that that would be presumption on his
part.
b. May I enquire how old H.E. is ?
PART IV THE GUIDH TO KUAN HUA. 97
a. The Minister is sixty-one this year.
b. H.E.'s care of his health must be excellent indeed, to have
passed his sixth decade and remain so vigorous as he does. Here !
(Servant) Dja !
b, (to servants) Some refreslwnents and fruit, and heat some
wine.
a. The Minister says that, this being his first visit to Yonr
Excellencies' Yamen, he could not think of trespassing on your
hospitality.
6. H.E. is punctilious. It is true we have met H.E. to-day
for the first time, but we seem like old friends, and besides, there
is nothing here but some ordinary refreshments to help us to
prolong the interview. I hope H.E. will give us the honour of
his company and not decline.
a. The Minister says that he really feels disturbed at having
put Your Highness and Your Excellencies to such trouble.
6. Not at all. There is nothing here at all adequate to meet
the occasion ; I hope H.E. will excuse it.
a. Thank you, thank you ; the Minister says this is altogether
too sumptuous an entertainment.
b. There is nothing here at all ; it is quite inadequate.
b. Allow me to offer Y.E. a glass of wine.
a. The Minister says it is really too great an honour.
b. Pray be seated Y.E.
a. The Minister begs Your Highness to accept a glass in
return.
b. No, indeed, I could not venture to accept that.
a. Then I will return the toast to Yoxir Highness and Your
Excellencies on behalf of the Minister.
6. You are our guest. Sir, how could we allow it? Well, let
us fill our own glasses then.
a. Very well, since obedience is better than deference.
b. No ceremony, no ceremony. Ask H.E. to try some of this
dish.
a. The Minister begs that Your Highness and Y.E.E. will
not pass the dishes to him, but allow him to help himself.
b. If H.E. will eat heartily, why we will not help him to the
dishes.
o. The Minister says he will on no account make any pretences.
6. Tbat'3 capital !
14
98 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. PART IV
b. Pray take a libtle more Y.E.
a. The Minister says he is fully satisfied.
b. Then ask H.E. to come and sit in the room over there.
* * * « »
a. The Minister begs to inquire of Your Highness and Y.B.E.
when he can present his credentials ?
6. With regard to that, we will communicate officially with
H.E. in a day or two, after we have memorialized His Majesty
and requested his commands as to the date.
o. Then he will await word from Your Highness.
b. Very good.
a. The Minister desires to take his leave now and to return
home.
b. Why should we not have a little more conversation ?
a. The Minister has some other important business which
requires him to return and dispose of at once, and prevents him
making a long stay here. He begs to express his thanks to
Your Highness and Your Excellencies for your trouble.
b. The merest trifle, not worth mentioning, done without any
ceremony whatever.
a. Not at all.
b. We shall return this visit shortly at your Legation.
a. You are very kind indeed. Pray Your Highness and
Y.E.E. do not come out.
b. Good-day, good-day !
a. Au revoir, au revoir !
No- 2 as. I hope Y.E. has been well since we last met.
h. Thank you, Your Highness, quite well ; and I hope Your
Highness has been in good health lately.
a. Yes, thank you.
b. And your Excellencies the Grand Secretaries and the
others have also been well I hope.
c. You are very kind. Did you return, home comfortably
the other day?
b. Quite ; I am much obliged to Y.E.E. for your kind
inquiries.
a. The object of our visit to-day is, in the first place, to offer
our congratulations, and, secondly, to return Your Excellency's
call.
PAST IV THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 99
b. You are too kind. Yonr Highness and Y.E.E. the Grand
Secretaries and the others are more than polite.
d. I hope you will excuse us for coming late.
b. Don't mention it. What is the gentleman's name ? for
we have not met before.
c. Of course ! We had forgotten. Let me introduce you
to each other. This gentleman is the newly-appointed Minister
H.E. ; this gentleman is Liu tajen, one of our colleagues.
b. I am delighted to make your acquaintance.
d. The pleasure is mutual then. I hope you will forgire my
absence the other day, when you were good enough to call, but
I was on leave at the time.
b. Don't mention it ! May I ask what is Your Excellency's
native place ?
d,. I am a Kiangsu man.
b. Which of the public offices are you a member of ?
d. I am at present Vice-President of the Board of Civil Office,
and a member of the Tsungli Yamen.
b. Ah ! And when did Y.E. take your degree ?
d. I took my chii-jen's degree in the chi mao year, and my
chin-shih degree in the huei wet.
b. What provincial posts have you held ?
d. I have never held a provincial appointment. From the
kuei wei year, after my success I took up my position in the Han
Lin Yuan. Later on, I was appointed once to a Literary
Chancellorship and once to a Chief Examinership.
b. In which province were you appointed Literary Chancellor ?
d. I was appointed Literary Chancellor in Ssu-ch'uan, and my
subsec[uent appointment as Chief Examiner was in Shensi.
b. What is Y.E.'s age ?
d. I am forty-seven this year.
b. It is easy to perceive that Y.E.'s abilities must be great,
when you have held such distinguished posts before reaching yonr
fiftieth year.
d. You flatter me ; it is all due to good luck. Indeed I am
ashamed of my want of talent, — I am a mere stop-gap, that
is all.
I. Y.E. is over modest. I have prepared a few refreshments
to-day, and I hope Your Highness and Y.E.E. will stay here and
chat for a while.
100 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. PART IV
a. You are very kind, and we ought rightly to take advantage
of your hospitality. Unfortunately, to-day a matter has been
specially remitted to us by Imperial Decree, which we have to
return and attend to at once, so we must beg to be excused.
b. In that case, then, I will not press you to stay.
a. Then we will come and pay our respects to you another
day, and take leave of you just now.
b. Thank Your Highness and Your Excellencies for your visit.
a. Not at all. Pray do not come out.
b. I must see you ofi".
a. Thank you, thank you.
No. 3 a- Allow me to introduce to Y.E. this gentleman, who is our
newly-appointed Minister. H.E. has come to-day in order to pay
his respects to Your Excellency.
I. Ah ! I am delighted to meet him.
a. The Minister hopes Y.E. is well.
I. Ah ! I hope he is well.
a. The Minister thanks Y.E.
I. And the health of His Imperial Majesty your Sovereign,
has been good ?
a. Yes, the Minister says that the health of His Majesty our
Emperor has been recently excellent, and he begs to inquire
whether H.I. Majesty has been enjoying satisfactory health,
l. Yes, His Imperial Majesty has been enjoying most satis-
factory health. I beg H.E. will take the seat of honour.
a. The Minister begs to yield that to Y.E.
I. Impossible ! His Excellency having come here is entitled
to the seat of honour.
a. The Minister protests that it would be presumption on his
part.
I. Pray be seated. May I ask when H.E. left his own
country ?
a. On the 10th of last month by our calendar.
I. I hope the journey has been a comfortable one.
a. The Minister says that, under Y.E.'s auspices, all has gone
very well on the journey.
I. What stay did H.E. make in Shanghai?
_ a. The Minister remained only two days in Shanghai before
coming on here,
PART IV THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 101
/. It is a very long journey to make, to come here overland.
I don't know if there is any news that we might learn?
a. The Minister says that there were a number of historic
spots on the road, but that there is nothing new so far as the
politics of the present day are concerned.
I. Indeed. And what day has H.E. decided to leave for
Peking ?
a. The Minister intends going North the day after to-
morrow.
/. Why should H.E. hasten his departure so ?
a. Because the terra of his Mission is about to expire,
consequently he cannot loiter.
I. Is H.E. going by river or by road ?
a. He intends travelling by river, on account of the quantity
of baggage he has.
I. Have the boats been hired yet ?
a. We have sent a man to-day to hire them ; to-morrow,
most likely, they will all be ready.
I. Tell H.E. that I will despatch two petty officers with
twenty men, to escort him to T'ung-chow.
a. The Minister says he is extremely obliged to Y.E. for
being so kind.
I. Not at all. It is my duty to do what I can for H.E. on his
arrival here.
a. The Minister says it is a great favour on your part.
I. Then I will send off a despatch this evening, advising the
Tsungli Yamen that H.E. the Minister is starting for the North
by river the day after to-morrow.
a. That will be excellent. The Minister will also have a
despatch for our Legation in Peking.
I. Yes, that will be even better.
a. And now the Minister says he must take leave.
I. Ask H.E. to stay awhile and give mc the pleasure of his
company for a little longer.
a. The Minister has still some business that he must return
and despatch at once.
I. Well, then, I must thank H.E. for coming to see me, and
to-morrow I shall return his call.
0. The Minister would not like to put Y.E. to that trouble.
1, I am bound to.
10'2 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. PART IV
a. Pray do not come out.
I. I must see you off.
a. Thank you very much.
No. 4 '-I come to-day to return Y.E.'s call, in the first place, and
in the second, to thank you for your visit.
a. You are very kind, and really too punctilious, Your
Excellency.
I. Not at all, it is de rigiieur. Is your departure fixed for
to-morrow ?
a. Yes, I start to-morrow for certain.
I. The boats, I suppose, are all ready.
a. Yes, they are all quite ready.
I. Then at what time to-morrow shall you begin your journey?
a. Probably about nine o'clock in the morning.
I. In '. that case, at eight to-morrow I shall come over and
see you off.
a. Oh, I really could not think of putting you to that trouble.
Our meeting to-day fulfils everything, and some other time, when
I come again or when Y.E. goes up to Peking, we could spend
a few more days together.
I. In that case then, as you don't wish it, I won't come over.
a. Thank you. And when does Your Excellency expect to
go to Peking ?
I. Probably at the end of the eleventh month, when I shall
certainly not fail to call on you at your Legation.
a. In the event of your coming to Peking, I hope Y.E. will
drop me a line beforehand, so that I may make preparations to
receive you.
I. Thank you ; before I leave I shall, of course, do myself the
honour of informing you first.
a. There is another favour I should like to ask of Y.E.
I. If there is anything, Y.E. has only to mention it.
a. Thank you. Our Consul here is very young, and, moreover,
this is his first post, and he is wanting in experience as yet, so
I trust Y.E. will be somewhat tolerant. I hope, too, Y.E. will
advise him in all matters, so that he may have something to guide
him. I shall appreciate it as a kindness done to myself.
I. Your Excellency is too modest. The Consul you mention,
though young, is very intelligent. For some months past I have
PART IV THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 103
heard by report how satisfactory his treatment of international
matters has been. I have a great respect for him. Only, having
lived in China but a few years as yet, I suppose he can hardly
be perfectly informed as to our Chinese social organisation, and
popular manners and customs. If, whenever he finds something
that ha doesn't quite understand, he will apply to me, I will, in
deference to your desire, explain it fully to him.
a. Your Excellency is excessively laudatory ; he is at present
only learning the duty of his post.
I. And now I must be saying good-bye, as I have another
engagement.
a. Then good-bye until we meet in Peking.
I. Yes, and as soon as you have reached Peking, I hope you
will send me word, as a consolation for your absence.
a. Yes, on my arrival there, T will not fail to do myself the
honour of letting you know.
I. Very well, to-morrow morning I will send a petty officer
here with some men to be at Y.E.'s disposal.
a. Very many thanks. It really is exceedingly kind of Your
Excellency.
I. My duty merely ! Pray don't move.
a. Good-bye, and au revoir.
No. 5 a. I hope Your Excellencies the Grand Secretary and the
other Ministers are well.
h. Thank you, thank you. And you 1
a. Quite well, I thank Your Excellencies.
b. Please be seated.
a. After your Excellencies.
b. Have you had much to do lately ?
a. Well, not very much.
b. About what matter have we to take your instructions at
your visit to-day ?
a. I have been sent to your Yamen to-day by the Minister to
speak about a matter of public business.
b. Oh ! Please tell us what it is.
a. It is this. Last month, one of our interpreters, who was
provided with a passport, visited a certain place. On reaching
the place, he put up at an inn ; whereupon, what should happen
but the people of the place, in their ignorant curiosity, collected
every day at the gateway of the inn, in groups of four or five
104 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. PART IV
and crowded together to stare, some of them using very rude
language. Besides this, the Interpreter heard it rumoared that
the people intended to make trouble, so, as the inn was not far
from the Police Station, he thereupon went there, meaning to
see the Police Official and ask him to take measures to keep
order and prevent disturbance. Strange to say, the Official
actually excused himself from seeing him on the plea of being ill.
Our Interpreter had no other course than to go off again and
call at the District Magistrate's Yamen. When he got there,
he sent in his card, and after he had waited a long time, a door-
keeper came out and said the Magistrate was entertaining visitors,
and couldn't receive him. So the Interpreter came back to the
inn, and the first thing next morning he returned again to the
Magistrate's Yamen and asked to see him. Then a clerk named
Wang came out, and asked him into the Board office. The
clerk Wang asked him what he came for, and he told him all
about it, — that the people intended to make trouble, and that he
wished to ask the Magistrate to take means to protect him. The
clerk then declared that the Magistrate was engaged ofiSoially
and couldn't receive him. The Interpreter said, "Well, since
the Magistrate is so busy, it would be inconvenient for me to
ask to see him. Only I hope you will give my message to' the
Magistrate and mention that I have asked him at once to keep
order, so that no catastrophe may occur, and that the matter is
urgent." The clerk Wang made profuse promises to do so, and
our Interpreter then took his leave and returned to the inn. And
it is an actual fact that he waited two days more in the inn,
without a word of news, the people collecting in larger and larger
crowds, and freely using the most outrageous language, so that a
riot seemed inevitable.
Seeing how threatening matters looked, he sent off a letter
reporting affairs to our Minister, and at the same time started
for the Prefecture, with the intention of personally begging the
Prefect to instruct the Magistrate to give proper protection.
However, we don't know what may have been done when he got
to the Prefecture. But the receipt of his Report has greatly
surprised the Minister, because he feels that subjects of the
Powers, when travelling to any place, provided with passports,
have a right to be protected according to Regulation, by the local
authorities ; and not only is this mentioned in the Treaties, but
Imperial Commands to the same effect have repeatedly been
received ordering the Provincial Governors-General and Governors
to give orders to the local authorities to conform scrupulously
to the Treaties in the protection of foreigners. It is perfectly
incomprehensible how it is that, while Viceroys and Governors
of Provinces can act up to Treaty provisions, the local officials —
Magistrates of Departments and Districts — still regard the duty
PART IV THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 105
of affording protection as a perfectly itnnaaterial matter. The
Minister now begs Your Highness and Your Excellencies the
Grand Secretary and the Ministers, to move the Provincial
Governments to give orders to their subordinates that it is
essential, in order to observe the Treaties, that in future, wherever
foreigners with passports may travel, the local authorities should
do their duty and render them all possible protection.
b. Quite so. "When you get back, will you tell H.E. the
Minister, vrith regard to this case, that a despatch shall be sent
to the place to-morrow, requesting the Governor of the Province
to ask the District Magistrate and the Police official why they
wouldn't receive the visit, and the reasons for their not maintain-
ing order. If it appears that they have acted with negligence,
they shall certainly be denounced by name. We will also again
request the Provincial Governments to issue stringent orders to
the Department and District Magistrates, that whenever after
this a foreigner visits any place, they must not fail to observe
the Treaties and give him every possible protection, and that if
they refuse to make every possihle eHort to do so, they shall
certainly be impeached to the Throne by name.
a. Yes, if Your Excellencies will take that trouble, our officials
and people in general will \>» most deeply grateful.
b. Not at all. It is a thing we are bound to do our utmost in.
a. Well, I will return and report to the Minister exactly what
Your Excellencies have said.
b. And on your return pray give His Excellency our kind
inquiries.
a. Yes, I shall certainly tell him.
b. Good-day to you.
a. Au revoir.
No. 6 <*• I have been deputed to-day by the Minister to call on Hia
Highness and Your Excellencies the Grand Secretary and
Ministers to verbally acquaint you with a matter of Public
business.
b. Ah ! what is it ?
a. It is this. Last month, a steamer under our flag, called
the " Feng-shun," came to Tientsin from Shanghai. She had
got as far as jnst above Taku, when she came in collision with
and damaged a Chinese merchant-vessel at anchor there. After
the '' Feng-shun's " arrival at Tientsin, the Master reported the
matter to our Consul. Moreover, he stated in his report that
the place where the Chinese yessel was anchored, was where she
15
106 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HDA. PABT IV
obstructed the fairway of steamers ; and he asserted that the
cause of her being run into and damaged by the steamer was that
she had not anchored in accordance with the Harbour Eegula-
tions, and therefore he was not liable for such damage. Our
Consul afterwards received a despatch from the Taotai, saying
that the Chinese junk-master Chou Li-ch'cng complained that
while his vessel was under way off Taku, the steamer " Feng-
shun " came up astern and collided with her, knocking off her
rudder and damaging her side. The Consul then replied to the
Taotai's despatch, mentioning that the Master of the " Feng-
shun " had declared that the Chinese junk was at anchor in the
liver, that the collision was occasioned by her having anchored
in the fairway of steamers, and that under the Harbour Eegula-
tions he was not liable. However, the two Powers should, before
taking further steps, each of them depute an officer to proceed
together to the scene of the collision and make an inspection,
and afterwards decide as to the question of liability. The Taotai
accordingly deputed an officer who accompanied our Interpreter
to the scene of the collision, and they made their inspection.
The petition of the junk-master Chou Li-ch'eng stated that
the junk's rudder had been broken off, and the side of the vessel
damaged, but on their making their inspection, only the rudder
had been broken off, and no damage had been done to the junk's
side. This point therefore disagreed with the original statement.
Again, according to the junk-master Chou Li-ch'eng, on the day
in question his vessel was run into while under way, but the
Master of the steamer said that Chon Li-ch'eng's vessel was not
under way in the river, but" anchored and obstrxicting the steamer
fairway, and it was owing to this that she was run into. The
Taotai insisted on disbelieving the account given by the Master
of the steamer and on believing that of the Chinese junk-master.
Our Consul argued, in discussing the case with the Taotai, that
as for believing the story of the Chinese Master, why he had
asserted in his original statement that the steamer had knocked
off his rudder and also damaged the junk's side, but as soon as
she was inspected it was found that only the rudder had been
knocked off, and no damage done to the side. From this fact
alone it was evident the junk-master's story was not to be believed.
But the Taotai, though he had nothing to meet this contention
with, all the same urged the Consul to order the Master of the
steamer to pay an indemnity for the cost of repairs. The
Consul, on the faith of the Master of the steamer, said that as
the Chinese junk had been run into through not anchoring in
accordance with the Harbour Regulations, there was no legal
liability for damages, and if he, the Consul, were to compel the
Master to pay for the cost of repairs, he could not prevent him
from protesting against the decision. Unfortunately, the Taotai
PART IV THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 107
altogether dissents from the Consul's views, and as they have
argued the case without result, the Consul has no coarse open
to hina but to report fully to the Minister and request instructions
how to proceed. The Minister has sent me here to inquire from
Your Highness and Your Excellencies what ought to be done in
this case, in order to prevent controversy.
b. Although His Highness is not present to-day, our view is
that the statements of the two parties in the case being conflict-
ing, cannot be depended upon, and that the Consul should be
officially instructed by K.E. the Minister, and the Taotai by us,
that they are to call upon the two parties both to bring witnesses,
and afterwards to hold a pint investigation, when, no doubt, the
true facts will be elicited. If you will inform H.E. of this on
your return, and if he sees no objection to it, would he send us
word, and we will then write to the Taotai.
^ a. Yes ; then I will return and let the Minister know Y.E.'a
proposal, so that he may consider it and send you a note.
b. Yes, then that will be the arrangement.
a. Well then, I will bid you good-bye for the present.
b. Good-bye, good-bye.
NO- 7 ci- How do you do ?
b. (^Taotai) Thank you, quite well. And how are you ?
a. I am much obliged for your inquiries.
b. Please take a seat.
a. After you, Sir.
b. Have you been busy lately ?
a. "Well, not ver?/ busy.
b. To what business do I owe the honour of your visit to-day ?
a. It is a matter of business which I have been deputed by
the Consul to-day to come and consult you upon.
b. What is it ?
a. It is this. There is a native merchant of this place, called
Liu Yiin-fa, who chartered a sailing vessel flying our flag, al
Foochow and loaded her with a general cargo for this port. He
agreed to pay $4,500 as freight, of which he had paid down
$1,500 at Foochow, and it was expressly stated that the balance
of $3,000 was to be paid over on arrival at this place, to which
the Master then agreed. All this was arranged without any
broker or mercantile firm as intermediaries, but was simply an
understanding come to directly between the two parties. Four
days ago the ship arrived here, and early on the rollowiug
108 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. PART ,IV
morning Liu Yiin-fa, with some lighters, took delivery of the
rargo, lightered it, and conveyed it to the Customs' Examination
tihed for examination. He then told the Master he was going
home to get together the freight, and would be back on board in the
evening, when he would hand over the full amount of the balance
in cash, and he also wrote his address and gave it to the Master to
keep. So the Master, thinking the man to be a respectable merchant,
allowed him to go away. When the evening came, Liu Yiin-fa
didn't return on board, and even up to yesterday night he still
hadn't come back to the ship. The Master therefore despatched
a man to go and look for him at the place he had written down
as his address, but as he couldn't be found, the Master couldn't
help becoming suspicious, and in consequence reported the matter
to the Consul, who wrote a note to the Commissioner of Customs
asking him when Liu Yiin-fa paid the duties, to temporarily
detain the goods and not release them until the freight had been
paid in foil. The Consul afterwards received a note from the
Commissioner in reply, saying that if Liu Yiin-fa paid his duties
in full, the Customs had no power to temporarily detain the
goods, so that he would be unable to do as requested in the
matter. The Consul, fearing Liu Yiin-fa might suddenly pay
the duties, and the Customs release the boats and their cargoes,
and that in this way this money for freight would not be recovered,
has sent me here to ask you to write to the Commissioner of
Customs, if Liu Yiin-fa pays his duties to temporarily detain
the boats and their cargoes, and when he has paid for the freight,
the Consul will notify you officially, so that you may write to
the Commissioner to release the goods. He entreats yon most
earnestly to oblige him by doing this, and we shall be most
deeply grateful.
h. Well, as to that, officially speaking, when Liu Yiin-fa has
paid the full duties, the Customs have really no right to detain
the boats and their cargoes ; but as the Consul asks me a favour,
I will, merely from private regard for him, ask the Commissioner
to temporarily detain Liu Yiin-fa's boats with their cargoes.
And as soon as he has paid the freight, please let the Consul
send me word of it, so that I may notify the Commissioner, and
the boats and cargo be released. But this is only done on this
occasion by way of obliging, and must not be used as a precedent
for the future.
a. If you will be so obliging as to do so, we shall really be
infinitely grateful.
b. Not at all ! In a short time I will send a note to the
Commissioner.
a. Then I shall say good-bye.
PAKT IV THE GDIDE TO KUAN HUA. 109
h. Good-bye, good-bye.
. a. Au revoir.
No. 8 a. I have been sent here to-day by the Taotai to see you, Sir,
on business.
b. What business is it ?
a. Your wrote to the Taotai some time ago about a native firm
dealing in foreign goods here, called Ch'ing Ch'ang, the head of
which, Chao Hsi-san, had bargained to buy sixty bales of Kussian
cloth from the foreign firm of T'ien Sheng. You said that a
written agreement had been made, and that when the goods
arrived last month, the foreign merchant pressed Chao Hsi-san
to take delivery, but he would not do so, and tried to find fault
with the goods. And. you asked the Taotai to give orders to the
Chih hsien to summon Chao Hsi-san before him for examination.
Since then the Chih hsien has reported on the case. He says
the man has now been summoned, and this is what he states.
Last year, before the river closed, he bargained with the foreign
firm of T'ien Sheng for sixty bales Eussian cloth, and signed a
written agreement. He paid a hundred taels deposit, and it was
distinctly stated that the goods were to be delivered and the
price paid without delay on either side in the first ten days of the
third moon of this year. When this date arrived the goods had
come to hand, and the T'ien Sheng hong sent a message to him.
He then took his muster to the foreign hong, and opened the bales
and compared them ; among them were ten not up to muster,
and for that reason he refused to receive the goods, and
demanded to be paid back his deposit, telling the foreign merchants
to dispose of the goods elsewhere, but they would not give him
back his deposit. Well, they separated without coming to any
agreement, and to his surprise, the foreign merchants have actually
laid a complaint against him for refusing to take delivery, which
he has done simply because the goods are not up to muster, and
not in the least because he wants an excuse to get out of his
engagement. The Taotai wrote to you giving the substance of
the Chih hsien's report, and afterwards received your reply that
what Chao Hsi-san stated in his evidence before the Magistrate
was an ex parte statement and was insufficient as proof, and
asking that the Chih hsien might be instructed once more to make
Chao Hsi-san take delivery of the goods and make payment of
the money. Now the Taotai says that although Chao Hsi-san's
statement is an ex parte one, yet, unfortunately, as he affirms that
he has refused to take delivery on account of the goods not being
up to muster, if he is now compelled to receive and pay for them,
it will not make him feel he has been treated with justice. If
110 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. fAKT IV
we accept Chao Hsi-san's statement as the trutt, then the foreign
merchant will perhaps not be contented. •
Now the Taotai has thought of a good plan, and has sent me
to discuss it with you. He proposes that, some day this month,
he and you should hold a joint investigation and summon the two
parties, telling the foreign merchant to hire some men to carry
the sixty bales into Court, and that you. Sir, and himself should
hold a sitting, and have a public inspection of the goods, and then
and there give judgment as to which is in the right. I don't
know what you will think of this proposal.
b. I had not made up my mind about this matter, but as the
two parties each have their own version, it will be difficult to
decide. The Taotai's scheme is very satisfactory, still in my own
opinion it would be well that the Taotai should instruct Chao
Hsi-san to invite two Chinese merchants, and I should instruct
the T'ien Sheng hong to procure two foreign merchants, and for
them all to meet at the Mixed Court, where the four merchants
would inspect the goods, and see whether they do or do not
correspond with the samples, and make their verdict authoritative.
If these four should decide after inspection that the goods and
the sample correspond, the Taotai could then make an order that
Chao Hsi-san should take delivery and make due payment. 'If.
they should not correspond, I could then examine the head of the
T'ien Sheng hong, and then decide on some action in consultation
with the Taotai. That is my own view; what do you think
of it?
a. The way you suggest, Sir, is still more perfectly satisfactory
in every respect. I will go back and report this to the Taotai
before sending you a reply.
h. "Won't you stay a little longer ?
a. I cannot stay long, because I have official duties to attend
to. I will pay my respects to you another time. Sir.
h. You are very good.
3. Pray don't come out, Sir.
h. All, revoir.
No. 9 a- The Consul has sent me here to-day to consult with you on
a matter of business.
h. What is the business ?
a. It is the case of the debt due by Chu Hsiao-shan, the
Compradore of the firm of Pao Ch'ang.
b. I have already written a despatch to the Consul about that
case. I don't know what the Consul's opinion upon it is.
PART IV THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 11 J.
a. The Consul's view is this. When Chu Hsiao-shan was
first engaged by the Pao Ch'ang firm, written security was given
by four firms — Hsiang Li, Jen Ho, Fu Shun, and Chin Ch'ang.
The security-paper expressly said that, in case of defalcation, etc.,
on the part of Chu Hsiao-shan, besides reimbursement being made
by realising his private effects, whatever sum remained unpaid,
the four guarantors would shai-e the liability for equally. This
they all agreed to abide by. The other day the Consul received
your despatch, in which you say, that besides reimbursing
Tls. 1,000 by realising Chu Hsiao-shan's private property, the
guarantor Chin Ch'ang, the silk piece-goods firm, must be made
liable for the payment of Tls. 2,000 of the Tls. 4,000 remaining
unpaid, and the three guarantors, Hsiang Li, Jen Ho, and Fu
Shun, proprietors of foreign-goods warehouses, must share the
liability equally between them for the remaining Tls. 2.000.
The Consul finds it really difficult to understand your dealing
with the case in this way, and he therefore sent me here to
inquire for what reason you do not keep to the provisions of the
security-paper, and make all the four guarantors share and share
alike, instead of singling out the Chin Ch'ang hong to pay more,
and the other three hongs less, than their shares.
b. The reason why I make the Chin Ch'ang hong pay more,
and the other three hongs less, is this. When I summoned the
four guaranteeing firms before me the other day for an in-
vestigation, three of the proprietors of the shops, Hsiang Li,
Jen Ho, and Fu Shun, pleaded that although when the security-
paper was originally drawn up it did provide that in case of
future defalcations on the part of the Compradore Chu, besides
his private effects being realised for the repayment of the debt,
the amount of the debt then left outstanding should be paid in
equal proportions by the four guarantors, yet for some years past
the Chin Ch'ang hong had constantly borrowed money from Chu
Hsiao-shan to trade with, and that for these loans Chin Ch'ang
paid no interest. Consequently, for some years he has derived a
good deal of benefit from Chu Hsiao-shan, while we three guaran-
tors have had no monetary dealings with Chu Hsiao-shan during
these years, and have never derived any benefit from him. If you
now make us all equally responsible for his defalcations, it will be
most unjust to our three firms.
Very well. Then I asked the head of the Chin Ch'ang hong
whether what the other three said was a fact. He admitted that
he had constantly borrowed money from Chu Hsiao-shan to trade
with, and that it was quite true he had benefitted to a considerable
amount by him ; and that is why I gave judgment for Tls. 2,000
to be paid by the Chin Ch'ang hong, and for the other three
guarantors to pay the Tls. 2,000 between them.
112 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. PART IV
All four parties signed a formal statement that they were
willing to accept this award, — indeed, I exercised no great
pressure in the matter. In what way do you consider this
decision unjust ?
a. Well, I hope you will excuse me, but I will take the liberty
of making one remark upon it.
b. Pray don't hesitate to speak out plainly, whatever you have
to say.
a. Then in my opinion, such a decision hardly seems quite fair.
b. In what way not quite fair ?
a. Your view is that because the Chin Ch'ang hong has for
some years derived benefit by Chu Hsiao-shan, you should now
adjudge them to be bound to pay more, while the other three
guaranteeing firms, Hsiang Li, Jen Ho, and Fu Shun, not having
derived such benefit, are to be called upon to pay less. Now, in
my humble opinion, in deciding this case you should be guided
by what was said in the security-paper, and as that expressly
mentions that the four guarantors should share the same degree
of liability in making good any future deficit on Chu Hsiao-
shan's part, if yon now single out the Chin Ch'ang hong to^ pay
more, it is not only a departure from the original agreement of
the security-paper, but the other three guarantors will probably
think it a lucky escape, which they were scarcely entitled to. As
for the argument that the Chin Ch'ang hong constantly borrowed
money from Chu Hsiao-shan to trade with, without paying
interest, and that as they have enjoyed a considerble amount of
benefit from him for some years, therefore you adjudge them
liable for a larger amount, why, the loans from Chu Hsiao-shan
to the Chin Ch'ang hong were affairs of purely private friendship,
and have nothing to do with this case, and yon have no right to
import their private transactions into this case at all. As for
the three other guarantors, who are trying to pay less than their
share, let them give whatever untrue evidence they choose, but
as far as you are concerned there certainly can be no occasion to
decide in accordace with their assertions. Suppose, for instance,
that among the four guarantors two had derived benefit from
Chu Hsiao-shan, and two had not, ought the two who had be
made to pay, and the other two who hadn't, to hold themselves
aloof altogether? And, therefore, in the interests of justice, you
are bound to call upon all four guarantors, as the security-paper
provides, to make payment in equal proportions, and not make
any distinctions as to paying more or paying less.
b. Your argument is founded on the strict rule, and mine is a
modification to meet the circumstances.
PART IV THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 113
«. You may speak of " a modification to meet the circum-
stances," but such modifications are permissible only when a
strictly regular decision would be impracticable. Now in this
case there can be no obstable to a strictly regular decision being
given, so why should there be such a modification ?
b. Well, since yon consider my award not quite fair, will you,
when you get back, consult with the Consul, and later on there
is no reason why we should not devise some thoroughly well-
considered scheme.
a. In that case we will discuss the matter again, and I will
say good-bye to you, and go back.
b. What is your hurry ? Stay and chat for a little while
longer.
a. I have some other work to do, so 1 will wish you good-bye
for the present.
b. Good-bye to you.
a. Au revoir.
No. 10 a. My visit to your Yamen to-day is to confer with you on a
matter of business.
5. Ah ! Pray tell me what it is.
a. It is about the case in which the Chinese foreign-goods
hong, Hsin Ch'eiig, are indebted to our nationals, the Heng Yii
firm, for goods supplied. When the Heng Yii firm the other day
laid a complaint against the Hsin Ch'eng hong, I first of all
called Wang Pao-shan, the principal of the Hsin Ch'eng hong,
before me and questioned him. His statement was that a native
firm of general dealers of this place, called the Fu Shun Chan,
owed him some Tls. 10,000 and more for goods supplied, which he
had repeatedly pressed them for, but which they had not yet paid ;
that if he could recover this sum, he would, besides paying back
their Tls. 5,000 to Heng Yii, have a balance over and above of
Tls. 5,000, and he begged me to address you officially, so that
you might give orders to the District Magistrate to summon the
principal of the Fu Shun Chan before his Court and recover this
amount, when he could repay his debt for goods supplied by the
Heng Yii firm. As I was afraid that the debt to Heng Yii
would not be settled, I wrote to you officially to ask you to
instruct the District Magistrate to have up and examine the
principal of the Fu Shun Chan and recover from him the sum he
owed Hain Ch'eng, with the object of rendering possible the
repayment of their liability to the Heng Yii hong. Yang ta-
laoyeh, the deputy whom you sent to my office yesterday, said it
was suspected that the principal of Hsin Ch'eng had induced the
16
114 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. PAKT IV
principal of the Heng Yii foreign hong to bring forward a false
charge, and to sue the Fu Shun Chan for their debt, in Hsin
Ch'eng's interest, and thair if the steps asked for were taken,
it would be the beginning of a system of foreign merchants
taking up and interfering in legal proceedings ; and he begged
me, before proposing anything further, to find out as to this by
making close enquiries. Accordingly I sent for the principal of
the Heng Yii firm again, and I did closely question him. He
declared that it was perfectly true that the Hsin Ch'eng hong
owed his firm Tls. 5,000 for goods supplied, as their books would
show. He knew nothing about the Fu Shun Chan being
indebted to the Hsin Ch'eng hong for goods suppljed. With
regard to his request that I would move you officially to direct
the District Magistrate to summon the principal of the Fu Shun
hong for examination and the recovery of the amount owing, it
was quite true that that was Wang Pao-shan's suggestion, and
not a plan arranged between them two. So now, having clearly
ascertained that there is no sharp practice in the matter, I have
again to ask you to ask as I requested.
b. Yes, but though you have ascertained that there is no
dishonest dealing in this matter, all the same, the only proper
course is, that the foreign merchant should sue Hsin Ch'eng, and
that the latter should lay his complaint against Fn Shun, each
account being separately settled. If the parties were to be
involved at discretion, although there might be no sharp practice
in this case, it would be difficult to prevent abuses arising in the
future, and precautions against them must be taken ; do you not
think so yourself. Sir ?
a. Yes, I think what you say is very reasonable. There's only
one point, and that is, that I would ask you to direct the District
Magistrate, when Wang Pao-shan comes to the Magistracy with
his plaint against Fu Shun, and the Magistrate recovers the
money owing to Hsin Ch'eng, not to let Hsin Ch'eng take away
the money for the present. The Magistrate should detain the
Tls. 5,000 that Hsin Ch'eng owes to Heng Yii, and let Wang
Pao-shan take the rest. Do you think that plan feasible ?
h. Why, yes, I could give instructions to the Magistrate to
take that course.
a. In that case, I will send you a despatch to that effect
to-morrow, meanwhile I will take my leave, if you will allow
me.
b. Good-bye then till I next see you.
a. Good-bye to you.
6. Au revoir.
PART IV tBB guide to KUAN HUA. 115
Mo. 11 a. My best congratulations to you.
b. The same to yourself.
a. Seeing, in the Peking Gazette yesterday, the news of youi-
selection, I have come to-day to express my congratulations.
b. I am much obliged to you for your trouble. Please take a
seat.
a. After you.
b. Have you been much occupied with official business lately ?
a. For some time, yes, I have had a great deal of business ;
I have had no time to myself at all.
b. What makes you so busy ?
a. It is all the business connected with the Autumn Assize.
b. Why, the Autumn Assize is nearly over, is it not ?
a. Yes, at least it will be by the end of this month.
b. Ah ! When will you be presented to the Commission of
Scrutiny ?
a. Probably on the tenth of this month.
b. What sort of a post is it ?
a. Well, it is a medium post.
b. With your talents, Sir, it won't be long before you are
transferred to the leading Magistracy.
a. Oh, I don't venture to aspire to that. This is my first
official appointment. I am quite contented to get an easy post
and be saved from the fear of making some blunder. If it had
been one of the laborious and difficult posts, I should feel I was
not competent for the position and that I should excite general
ridicule.
b. Ah, you are too diffident. Sir.
b. Then about what date is your departure ?
a. Well, it will be about the first week or so of the 11th moon.
b. And how many days do they allow you ?
a. The time allowed is three months properly, and if anything
of importance happened I can apply for another month's leave.
My own idea is that, if, when the time comes, there is nothing
special, why I needn't apply for leave.
b. Do you take your family with you on this occasion ?
a. Well, I think travelling in the winter will be so very cold
that there would be all sorts of inconveniences if I took my
family, so I intenfl this year to go first to my post, and next
116 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. PART IV
spring to send one of my household to come and meet my family,
which will be more convenient.
b. Yes, if you arrange that way, it will be better, no doubt.
Well, I must be going off to the Yamen. We will have some
more talk another day.
a. Well I shouldn't like to detain you long, as you have
official engagements. After I have been presented to the Com-
mission, I shall call at your house and make my compliments.
b. You are really too good. Pray don't move.
a. Please don't stop ; of course I must see you to the door.
b. Pray go indoors. Sir.
a. As soon as you are mounted.
5. Thanks, many thanks.
No. 12 a- How do you do ? I haven't seen you for a long time.
b. Nor I you. My best wishes to you, Sir.
a. And mine to you.
b. I returned home the day before yesterday, saw the list of
the successful candidates, and found you had passed, so I've come
to-day on purpose to express my congratulations.
a. Many thanks for your trouble.
b. Not at all.
a. Pray take the seat of honour.
b. Please be seated. Sir.
a. I hope that everything went very well on your journey.
b. Thank you, yes, everything went smoothly. You have
taken such a high place. Sir, on this occasion, that it is evident
your scholarship is of the soundest.
a. You flatter me ; it is a piece of good fortune only.
b. You are too modest. Who was the Assistant Examiner
this time ?
a. It was the Hanlin Compiler Chang.
b. Have you made all your calls ?
a. Yes, the day before yesterday I made my calls upon the
Chief and Assistant Examiners.
b. Your brother has quite failed to meet with his deserts this
time.
a. Not at all. Sir, indeed.
b. Was he " sent up " ?
FART IV THE GUIDE TO KtAN HUA. 117
a. Yes, his papers were sent up for approyal ; it was his verse
that ploughed him.
b. A mere momentary check in his literary career ; he is sure
to get his degree at the next Provincial Examinations.
a. I hope he may, thanks to your good auguries.
b. What is the employment that has brought you to Peking
on this occasion ?
a. I am escorting a consignment of copper.
b. Have you finished handing it over?
a. Yes, I handed it over in full yesterday.
b. Then on your return to the Provincial Capital, I suppose
you will be able to take up your post.
a. This year, on my return, I shall be able to hold some
acting appointment, but probably it will be next year before I
take, up my post.
b. Now, when are the Test Examinations?
a. On the 23rd of this month.
b. Then after your Test Examination is over, we will have
some more conversation ; and now I will bid you good-bye.
a. Why not stay a little longer. Sir ?
b. Well, to-day I have other calls to make.
a. Then, when the Test Examination is over, I shall come and
pay my respects to you.
b. You are too good. Don't come out.
a. Good-bye till we meet again.
No. 13 a- I have called upon you to-day, Sir, to ask you to do me a
favour.
b. Thank you. What can I do for you ?
a. It is this. A fellow-countryman of mine is importing some
ten or more chests of Ssii-chuan opium, and has asked me to
arrange as to paying the duties for him. / being quite at
sea about it myself, I have come to beg yon to manage this
for me.
b. When are the goods likely to arrive ?
a. They will probably reach Peking the day after to-morrow.
b. That's easily managed.
a. Who can you get to manage it ?
b. Has your friend from the country come to Peking ?
118 TSB GUIDB ho KUAN flUA. PART IV
o. Yes, he arrived yesterday evening. He intends, as soon
as he has made proper arrangements with regard to paying the
duties, to leave the city and meet the goods.
b. I see, yes. Well, I will go out of the city to-day and ask
the good oflSces ot the Commissioner of Customs' chief clerk, and
get him to depute two men to go very early the day after to-
morrow to your lodgings, and to accompany your friend from the
country out of the city to meet the goods, and afterwards to go
with the goods-carts in their charge to the Customs' Office. And
will you tell your friend to make out an invoice beforehand and
give it to me, to be handed in by me for verification on the same
day. After it has been verified the opium will be stamped and
released. And when the General Office has calculated the amou,nt
of duty, and let me know it, I will draw it from your friend from
the country, and take it to the Commissioner of Customs. There
will only be a little " rice-money " to be given to the under-
strappers on duty, that's all.
a. Oh, but my friend isn't afraid of spending a little extra
cash, provided he can make sure ot being fortunate enough to have
no trouble. The plan you now propose is very satisfactory indeed.
b. Pray let your friend from the country make himself perfectly
easy ; as I undertake to manage the matter, I will guarantee
absolute safety.
a. You know, with my friend it is a case of " a burnt child
fears the fire."
b. How so ?
a. Why, the year before last, he imported ten chests of Ssu-
chuan drug. When they reached the Chang I Men, the city
gates were closed, and he put up in an inn. The carters were
seen unloading the opium from the carts by the city police, who
laid an information against him for unlawfully unloading goods,
and he was fined a considerable sum of money, so that he's very
nervous this time ; and that is the reason of his asking me to
make previous arrangements.
b. Tell him to have no fear whatever ; there shall certainly be
no mistake.
a. Well, I am really very much obliged to you for your trouble.
To-morrow I shall await news from yourself at my lodgings.
b. Precisely.
No. 14 a- 1 have come to thank you for the honour of your visit the
other day.
b. Thank you, bat you are really too punctilious, Sir.
PART IT THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 119
a. Not at all, I could do no less.
b. How havo your official duties been lately ?
a. For the last few days they hare been rather slacker.
h. It is a case of " a capable man is always busy " with you.
a. You are too complimentary indeed ; it is only " making up
for dullness by industry " with me, you know.
h. You are too modest.
a. I came to-day to bring you an invitation for the 5th, at
the T'ung Ch'ing T'ang ; please don't decline, but let me have
the honour of your company.
b. Oh, why should you put yourself to so much trouble ; we
hare become so intimate at once, that such etiquette seems
unnecessary.
a. It is only a slight piece of attention on my part, meant to
fulfil in some measure one's duties as a resident of the place.
Besides, the other guests are all cultivated and honourable men,
with whom I am on very good terms, and all meeting together
for the sake of conversation.
b. Well, since you are so exceedingly kind, I shall do as you
bid me.
a. Thank you, you will do me a distinguished honour ; then
to-morrow I shall write you a note of invitation.
b. Oh, but as we have spoken of it verbally there is no occasion
to send a written invitation ; please tell me at what time, that's
all.
a. Well thenj I will do as you say and not send the note, and
we shall meet at the T'ang Ch'ing T'ang at 11 o'clock on the 6th.
b. Yes, when the day comes, I shall not fail to be there in
good time.
a. Good.
b. And there is something else, in which I wish to beg the
hononr of your assistance.
a. In what way can I be at your service 1
b. You see, this is my first visit to Peking, and I am a total
stranger here. I want to hand in my statement of Particulars
of Antecedents, but I have nowhere to procure an Official Sponsor.
I shall be much obliged should you have any friends well known .
to yourself that are sending in Statements of Antecedents, if you
could find a Sponsor for me.
a. Why this is quite a coincidence. I have a friend, a chiijen,
who, including this year's Metropolitan Examination, will have
120 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. PART IV
been up for his Three Examinations, and he is just now intending
to hand in his Statement of Antecedents and await employment.
It will be just the thing for both of you to prepare a mutual
Security. This gentleman will be one of those present at my
party on the 5tb, and you can talk over the thing with him
personally then.
b. Really, that is an extraordinary coincidence, and I shall
rely on you entirely in the matter.
a. Thank you, it will be my duty to do all that I can to serve
you ; and now I must say good-bye until we meet on the 5th.
h. You are going home then ?
a. Au revoir.
No, 15 a- Let me introduce you two gentlemen, — This is Chu Hsiao-
yuan, — this is Mr. Huang I-ch'en.
b. I am delighted to make your acquaintance.
c. The pleasure is mutual. Sir.
b. Please take a seat, Sir.
c. After you, Sir.
b. I have often heard my friend here, Mr. Li Chih-hsiian,
speak of your wide and brilliant scholarship, and I have a great
admiration for it. Our meeting to-day is^^ predestined event.
c. Thank you. Mr. Chih-hsiian is far too flattering to my
slight capacity and scanty learning ; I feel really quite over-
powered.
b. You are too modest. May I ask. Sir, when yon lost your
father ?
c. In the spring of this year.
b. When your father was living, what had his appointments
been ?
c. My father had been transferred from the Hanlin to a Cen-
sorship, afterwards promoted to a Supervising Censorship, then,
having gained a First Class at the Metropolitan Scrutiny, was
selected for the appointment of Grain Intendant of Kuangtnng ;
last year he was promoted to be Financial Commissioner of
Honan, and this spring, on the 5th of the 2nd moon, while in
office as Financial Commissioner of Honan, he vacated his post
[i.e., he died].
b. What age was your father this year ?
c. He was sixty-six.
b. And what age is your mother ?
PART IV THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 121
c. My mother is just sixty.
b. Is she still vigorous 7
c. Thank you, yes, she is quite hale and hearty.
b. You are serving in the Han Liu Yiian, are you not?
c. Yes, after passing successfully at the examinations in the
Kuei Wei year, and entering as a Student Bachelor in the Hanlin,
I " went down " last year, and was granted rank as a Hanlin
Compiler. This spring I lost my father, and came to my native
place here to keep my mourning.
b. How many brothers have yon, Sir ?
c. I have a younger brother, — there are two of us.
b. What posts has your brother held ?
c. He has not held office. He was a Proxime Accessit in
the Jen Wn year, and while my father was alive, he
accompanied him in attendance to his post, and he is at home
now studjdng.
b. Yes. Now this is my first visit to your neighbourhood.
Sir, and as I am quite unacquainted with anything here, I hope
you will be my adviser in different matters.
c. Thank you. Where were you before as Private Secretary ?
b. I had gone as Law Secretary, the year before last, to the
Department Magistracy at I Chou, but last winter my Chief,
owing to certain proceedings, left his post, and I gave up my
engagement and went heme. Then this summer our friend here
was allotted this post, and as he was bent on inviting me to
accompany him, I was morally bound not to refuse, and conse-
quently came here with him.
c. From what position did our Prefect here enter the public
service ?
b. He was " favourably mentioned " as a chiijen by the State
Historiographer's Office.
c. Indeed ! And now I must be saying good-bye, and return-
ing home. I shall call again another day to enjoy the benefit of
your conversation.
b. You are very good. I shall pay my respects to your
mother personally soon, meanwhile please present my compliments
to her.
c. It ia extremely kind of you. Please stay where you are,
don't come out.
b. Good-bye to you.
X7
122 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. PART IV
No. 16 «• Some time ago I heard. Mr. K'ung Chu-an mention your
well-known name, and as I could not venture to intrude upon
you unceremoniously, I asked Mr. K'ung to arrange for an in-
terview, and have come to-day to pay my respects.
b. Thank you, I am much obliged to yon for your trouble.
I, too, have known you, Sir, by reputation, for a long time, and
it is only my being so greatly occupied by domestic matters that
has prevented me from calling upon you, so that our first meeting
to-day afiords me great gratification.
a. This being my first visit to your neighbourhood, and I
being a stranger in the place, I shall trust in all matters entirely
to your advice.
b. You are very kind. I shall not fail to try and be of service
to you whenever occasion offers. Pray when did you arrive
here ?
a. I have only been here two months.
b. I heard from Mr. K'ung that you are in charge of the
Lekin CoUectorate here.
a. Yes ; after being received by the Governor at the
Provincial Capital, I had the honour to be deputed to assist in
the management of the Lekin CoUectorate here.
b. How long did you stay in the Provincial Capital ?
a. I stayed a month only.
b. Are you likely to obtain a substantive appointment ?
a. An appointment ? Probably not before three years are
passed.
b. How many other Expectants are there of your standing?
a. Five, including myself.
b. And which place have you in the scale ?
a. My name comes fourth.
b. Indeed !
a. When do you go out of mourning, Sir ?
b. In the first month of the year after next.
a. You are lecturer, are you not, at the Ch'ung Cheng
College ?
b. Yes, I was publicly elected lecturer at the College by the
gentry of the place, but, to tell the truth, I am quite conscious of
my unfitness for the post, and that I have gained a reputation I
do not deserve.
a. Indeed, no.
PART IV THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 123
b. A short time ago I asked Mr. K'ung to come and make a
personal application to yon, and I am here to-day expressly to
make bold to respectfully press my request.
a. It is about your brother, is it not ?
b. Yes, it is about that matter.
a. My attainments and scholarship are so slight and superficial
that I hardly like to engage myself off-hand, lest I should be a
hindrance to his literary successes.
B. You are too modest, Sir. Should my brother become a
pupil of yours, and familiarise himself with your teaching, his
scholarship would improve daily, and he will be fortunate indeed.
o. Well, Sir, as you desire that your brother should seek
instruction from my imperfect speculations, I must perforce obey
your wishes.
b. I am deeply obliged to you for your consent. I shall bring
my brother to make his student's obeisance to you on an
auspicious occasion.
a. You are too good, indeed. When did your brother take
his first degree ?
b. The year before last ; and I am afraid of his scholarship
deteriorating at home, so I shall bring him out and present him
to a celebrated instructor, to study hard with a view to his making
progress. Now that you have condescended to undertake the
task of polishing and refining, should my brother hereafter make
a name for himself, you will have the gratitude of the whole
family, and I shall remember it to the last day of my life.
a. You are very good. Then when you have fixed on a
suitable day, your brother and I shall meet ?
b. As soon as I have selected a date, I shall first ask
Mr. K'ung to come and acquaint you.
a. Very well.
No. 17 a- What has been your occupation that I haven't seen
anything of you lately ? '
b. I have been a trip to the Western Hills with some friends.
a. How long were you away ?
b. We were ten days living at the Hills.
a. Ten days ! Why you must have had enough sightseeing.
b. Sightseeing, — Well, no, we didn't go and see many places,
we just stayed there a good many days.
a. And what were you doing during your stay ?
124- THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. PAET IV
b. Why, our party, constituted themselves into a Literary
Club, at a Temple to the God of War, in the Western Hills.
a. Excellent form ! And the meetings are, every how many
days in a month ?
b. The 1st to the 5th, 11th to 15th, and 21st to 25th are our
Club days.
a. If that is so, then each meeting lasts five days, and you
have fifteen days every mouth.
b. Exactly, fifteen days every month.
a. That's a great many Club days in the month. How many
members are there altogether ?
b. Including myself there are five of us in Peking, and two
who are people of the place, — seven in all.
a. Then you five here have to sleep there on the Club days ?
b. Yefe, whenever the Club meets, we go out the day before
and come back when it's over.
a. Where do you stay at the Hills ?
b. We stay in the same temple.
a. Then how do you manage about food ?
b. We take a cook from the city with us, and we buy our
provisions in the city and take them with us too. Wine and
meat you can also buy at a small market-place there.
a. If the thing is like that, I should like to join this Club.
b. If we can get you to go, it will be an additional distinction
to the Club.
a. You are too complimentary ; but I am not good at writing
poetry ; I shall just go and rub the ink for yon all, you know.
b. You are too modest.
a. And about the food, — I will only go if I subscribe an equal
share.
b. Oh, as to that, you need not give yourself the slightest
bother about it ; that will be for me to see to.
a. Unless we come to an arrangement, indeed I could not
think of doing as you wish.
b. If that is the way of it then we will' mess together, each of
us subscribing his share.
a. Yes, on that understanding I will go.
a. But who is the President of the Club ?
J. We came to the conclasion to take it in turns to act as
President.
PART It THB GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 125
a. That's a capital arrangement.
b. Very well, on the 21st, in the morning, I'll invite you, and
we will all start together.
a. So be it then.
No. 18 a. From which district [iera] of your country do you come, Sir ?
h.I am a, ISTagasaki man.
a. Oh, then you are close to China.
b. Yes, indeed, quite close.
a. How many years have you been in China.
6. Three years.
a. To speak kuan hua as well as you do, after living three
years in China, you must be exceptionally clever. I am much
impressed by it.
b. You are too complimentary. My knowledge is only a
rough, general acquaintance, I don't pretend to have mastered it.
a. I am not paying you a mere compliment when I say that
there is not the slightest difference between your pronunciation
and that of my own countrymen. I assure you, such intelligence
as yours is rare.
b. Oh, indeed, no.
a. What position in the public service do you hold here ?
b. I am now Interpreter here.
a. Capital ! And in our respective positiojis there are con-
stantly matters to be jointly managed, so when I'm at a loss
I shall beg you for your advice.
b. You are too good, but as this is my first appointment, I am
quite nnpractised, and it is from you I shall have to learn in
everything.
a. No, I assure you. However, by constant consultation
together we shall both be mutually improved.
b. Certainly, what you say is perfectly true. May I ask from
what position you entered the service ?
a. I was a graduate, and was drawn for this place.
b. How many years is it since that?
a. I have only been here rather more than a year.
b. What is your native place ?
a. Chiang Hsia hsien in Hup^i.
b. Is your family with you, i?,
126 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HDA. PAET IV
a. No, I have not brought my family with me, for my mother
being aged could not have undergone the fatigue of a journey,
and therefore did not come, so that I am here by myself.
b. Yes, I see. I hear from our Consul that you have inspired
general respect since your arrival, by your very sympathetic
intercourse with the foreign officials.
a. Not at all. At first I had no great experience in foreign
matters, so having had the honour to be sent here by the High
Authorities to assist in carrying on the duties of Mixed cases,
I have simply treated bona-fide matters in a bona-fide spirit,
hoping sincerely that there should be no distrust on either side,
but an unreserved mutual confidence, thus leading to mutual
consideration ; that is what my motive has been.
b. If, Sir, you always entertain these views, your public action
will naturally be satisfactory. And as I have to make other
visits to-day, I shall come again to your residence on some
future occasion and do myself the honour of a personal interview.
If you should be at leisure I trust you will come to my quarters
for a little conversation.
a. Since you do not think it beneath you, I shall certainly,
after a day's interval, call upon you at your residence.
b. Thank you ; then I shall await the honour of your visit there.
a. You are very kind. Pray mount and go on your way.
b. Pray don't come out. Many thanks to you.
a. Au revoir.
No. 19 «■ I have called upon you to-day in order to beg you to be
good enough to give me some assistance.
b. Please tell me what I can do for you.
a. It is about the loan that my relative Ku Tzii-heng borrowed
last spring from your friend Ch'in Pao-ch'en. He has dunned
him lately for this sum, and the two have had a misunderstanding
and quarrelled. I hear now that Ch'in Pao-ch'en means to
take legal proceedings against my relative, and knowing that
there is an unbroken friendship between yourself and Ch'in Pao-
ch'en, I have come to beg you to use your good offices to effect a
reconciliation between them.
b. Do you know if there was any intermediary at the time the
money was borrowed ?
a. Yes, I know there was an intermediary ; Kao Wu was his
name ; he died last winter.
b. How many taels did your relative borrow from Ch'in Pao-
ch'en, and was there any interest 7
PART IV THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 127
a. My relative borrowed 200 taels, and it was distinctly stated
that interest would be charged at the rate of 1^ candarins.i A
promissory note was drawn up, in which it was provided that
the amount should be repaid in two years. It is just a year and
a-half up to now, and two months ago Ch'in Pao-ch'en said to
my relative that he wanted to purchase » house, and he was
waiting for this money to use ; he didn't want the interest, but
interest was to cease and the principal to be repaid. My relative
said he shouldn't be able to repay the principal all at once, and
Ch'in Pao-ch'en told hira to do all in his power to raise the
money, and after that they separated. A short time ago Ch'in
Pao-ch'en went again to my relative's house and wanted repay-
ment at once. My relative said it was really impossible to
raise the money immediately, and that a few months must be
allowed him to repay the whole amount, he continuing as before
to pay interest monthly. But Ch'in Pao-ch'en wouldn't consent
to this, insisted on the repayment of the capital, and declined
interest. Owing to this, they had an altercation and quarrelled
violently. I now hear that Ch'in Pao-ch'en is going to take
legal proceedings. My relative, for his part, owing to the time
agreed upon not having arrived, cannot pay the capital sum.
Moreover, he is not in arrears with his interest. As for going
to law, that would be reasonable enough, but he having an official
position, to do so would interfere with his duties. And so I
thought I would beg your good offices to reconcile them, and get
them not to carry the thing farther. Don't you approve of that ?
b. How do you think I can reconcile them if I came forward ?
a. I would ask you to see Ch'in Pao-ch'en and suggest that
the principal should be repaid for certain at the end of two
months, interest being paid meanwhile by the month, and that if
at the due date my relative is unable to repay the principal, I will
be personally responsible myself.
b. On that understanding, then, I will go and see Ch'in
Pao-ch'en to-morrow and speak to him.
a. I am very much obliged to you. When the matter is
settled, I shall bring my relative to thank you for your trouble.
b. You are very good.
No. 20 a. We have both of us come to-day. Sir, with the express
intention of paying our respects to you.
h. Thank you both for your trouble. Please sit down.
a. After you. Sir.
b. And how are you two gentlemen named ?
' Equivalent to 18 per cent.
128 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. PART IV
a. My name is Tao, and his Ohing.
h. When did yon reach here ?
a. We arrived yesterday.
h. Where are you stopping?
a. At the Tg Yiian Inn, in the eastern suburb.
b. How many years have you spent, Sir, in our country?
a. I have been four years.
h. And this gentleman, how long ?
a. He has been here only just half-a-year.
h. Is he acquainted with our language ?
a. He is not ; he has never leafnt it.
b. Have you gentlemen travelled here for pleasure or on official
business?
a. Not on official business, — for pleasure merely.
h. What part of your country do you come from, Sir ?
a. I am an Osaka man.
b. And this gentleman, is he from the same neighbourhood ?
a. No, he is not, he is from Yokohama.
b. Pray tell me. Sir, do you know a gentleman named Fu,
of the same place as yourself, who was formerly Interpreter at
Shanghai ?
a. Indeed I do ; our families have been friends for generations.
b. What post has he now in your country ?
a. He is not there at present. After his return to Japan, he
was sent by Imperial orders to England.
b. Oh, indeed !
a. Were you a friend of his, Sir ?
b. Yes, we were great friends.
a. Where was it you knew him ?
b. I knew him when I was a Deputy in Shanghai, where we
contracted a literary friendship which became a very close and
lasting one. Afterwards, when Mr. Interpreter Fu had returned
home, and had reached Nagasaki, he sent me a letter. After
that, when I had the honour to be sent on duty here in Chihli,
we qtiite lost sight of each other. But now that I have heard
from you that he has received an appointment in England, I will
get a letter to him ready within the next day or two, which I will
hand to you, Sir, and beg you, when a convenient opportunity
occurs, to send to him in, England.
PART IV THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA. 129
a. Certainly. We shall be staying here a few days yet ; if
you will write it at your convenience and despatch someone with
it to oar inn to give it to me to send.
b. I must return you two gentlemen's visit at your lodging
within the next day or so.
a. Indeed we cannot permit that. Your duties are too
numerous. Besides, your friendship with Mr. Interpreter Fu
renders us still more intimate, so that such etiquette is scarcely
required.
S. It is indispensable.
a. And now we must take leave.
b. Thank you both for your visit.
a. Not at all. Please don't come out.
b. Well, I will do as you wish, and will not come far.
a. Thank you. Good-bye for the present.
18
130 THB aUIDlS TO KUAN HUA.
TONE AND ACCENT IN PEKINESE.
The Glossary appended to this translation follows Sir Thomas
Wadk's system of transliteration and tone-marks, adapted however, in
the latter respect, by a modification designed to show at a glance the
exact fall of the accent according to Pekinese pronunciation in each
of the twenty-two hundred phrases inserted.
At the risk of appearing to travel needlessly over well-worn ground,
I propose to examine briefly the natnre of the Pekinese tones, both as
they exist in their normal form, that is, in isolated words, and also as
affected by contact, with others in conventional combinations, under
which conditions the all-important element of accent is developed and
brought into play.
The F'ekinese tones have been treated of by Sir T. Wade in the
Tzu J^rh Chi* and even more fully by Dr. Edkins,! who has moreover
described them in terms, and from the point of view, of a system of
" natural tones." It will be convenient to summarise the main heads of
Edkins' observations on the subject at this stage.
In the shang p'ivg, the first of the four recognised Pekinese tones,
he finds three forms ; (1) before another word in combination with it,
it is an upper level tone moderate in length; (2) if second in a com-
bination of two, it is the upper falling tone, when accented; and (8) if
imaccented and in the same position, it drops to a low pitch and becomes
level without being much prolonged. The hsia p'ing is heard as the
upper quick rising intonation, which it keeps whether standing first or
last, except when an unaccented final in a combination, in which case it
becomes the same as the third form of the preceding tone. The shang
sheng has the lower rising intonation pronounced with moderate quick-
ness. This tone also when last and enclitic becomes the low level
unaccented form of the shang p'ing. When two shang ihengs occur
together with the accent on the last, the first rises to the pitch of the
hsia p'ing with which it becomes identical. Of the ch'ii sheng there are,
Dr. Edkins considers, two intonations, one a compound tone or cir-
cumflex, falling and rising again quickly, which is the accented variety
and prefers the first place in a combination of two ; the second, or
unemphatic form, is a low quick falling tone, and is heard when standing
* See that work, Colloquial Series, 2nd Edit., Part I, pp. 7-9, and Part VII,
pp. 420-422.
t See his Orammar of the Shanghai Dialect, 2nd Edit., pp. 6 et seqq,; also
his Mandarin Orammar. 2nd Edit., pp. 10 et 3ec[^.; but especially China Review,
Vol. V, pp. 110-142.
TONS AND ACCENT IN PEKINESE. 131
last in a combination. There is, besides, as in each of the three
preceding tones, the same unaccented, low, level variety. Otherwise put,
the unaccented word is heard with a low level intonation whatever its
proper tone may be, if coming last.
After an independent and careful examination of the whole subject,
made in Peking itself for the most part, and constantly checked and
tested, I find my results agree in the main with Dr. Edkins' conclusions,
to which however I take certain exceptions to be presently specified.
But before recurring to the tones, it will be convenient to consider
the nature and effect of accent in this dialect.
What is Accent ? The word is thus derived and defined in the
New English Dictionary of the 'Philological Society : " Accent, adopted
" from French accent, Old French acent, extant representative of Latin
" accent-nm, formed on ad to + cantus singing, a literal rendering of
" Greek npoo-iuStoc from Greek npog- to + m5») song, literally ' song added
"to' sc. speech: see note under sense I. [Definition J 1. A pro-
" minence given to one syllable in a word, or in a phrase, over the
" adjacent syllables, independently of the mode in which this prnminpnce
" is produced. [Note by Mr. A. J. Ellis] Accent in Greek (TrpoaaSia)
" is explained by Dion. Hal. * * * as a distinct diffeie.ice of
" musical pitch in pronouncing the syllables of a word, those having the
" grave or heavy accent * * * being spoken at a comparatively low
" pitch, those having the acute or sharp accent • * * being spoken
" as nearly as possible a musical Fifth higher « » * ^ and those
" having the circumflex accent * * « beginning in the high pitch
" and descending a Fifth during the pronunciation of the same syllable.
" The same three varieties occurred in Latin, but their position in a word
" followed very different laws. This variety of pitch disappeared from
" both Latin and Greek towards the end of the Third Century A.D.
" when the feeling of quantity was lost, and the high pitch in Greek and
" Latin became merely greater force, and this stress accent has remained
" the substitute for musical accent in modern Greek, in Italian and
" Spanish, and is also found in German and English. In Swedish and
" Norwegian a musical syllabic accent remains in use ; in Danish it is
" replaced in some circumstances by a peculiar catch, and in others by
" stress, as in English. In French, where probably stress was at one
" time strongly marked, the difference for at least three centuries has
" been so light that writers have disputed as to its nature and the
" position of the stress syllable. In all languages having the stress, a
" variable alteration of pitch and quality of tone always prevails, and is
" used to express varieties of feeling. This expression belongs to
" rhetoric. The grammatical varieties of accent in English are great,
" but are all varieties of stress. The position ia fixed in words of more
" than one syllable. Monosyllables have various degrees of stress
" according to circumstances. Hence the distinction of syllabic accent
" for the first, and verbal accent, phrase accent, or emphasis for the
" second."
132 THE GUIDE TO KUAN KUA.
The above note is so interesting and suggestive that I have not
liesitated to qnole it in full. It seems hard to resist the conclusion that
the accent or "song added to" the speech of ancient Greece and Rome
was, in the measure that it existed, nothing but what in Eastern Asia
we now call tone in general, and the three accents distinguished, three
varieties of tones in particular. Indeed from the description, we might
hazard a guess that the grave, acute, and circumflex were a lower even,
an upper even, and a falling tone, or Pekinese cA'fi sheng, respectively.
But, it may be asked, if the " musical accent " of Greek and Latin is
identified with tone, what meaning is to belong to accent, as distinct
from tone, in dealing with a Chinese dialect ? The answer is that, in
Chinese, accent is emphasized tone. "Hence it is by emphasizing the
characteristic musical modulation of a given syllable, (known for want of
a better term as its tone,) that there is produced alike in Pekinese and
other dialects that prominence over the adjacent syllables, in which as
we have just seen all accent consists.
Much the most numerous and important compound words in
Pekinese are dissyllabic combinations, — " binomials " as Legge ap-
propriately calls them. On such words the accent falls in one of three
different ways. The compound may be monotonic, that is the nccent may
fall exclusively on one of the syllables, as for instance on the first in
t'a^ men then, ya^ men a Yamcn, shu^ fu comfortable, in whicli case the
unaccented syllable becomes atonic : secondly, it may be ditonic, having
the accent more or less evenly divided between the syllables, as in
ta'^ men^ a principal gate, shu^ fu^ to accept a decision, where both tones
are distinctly heard : or thirdly, it may be metatonic, that is, the accent
may be in a state of unstable equilibrium as it were, so that words of this
character might be classified as sometimes belonging to the first and
sometimes to the second of the above divisions, — between which they
form an intermediate and connecting link, — while again at other times
the accent though greatly preponderating on one of the syllables, yet
leaves a faint remnant of tone perceptible in the other. Such for
example are wen^ chitng'^^^ dignified, hao^ shou^^'> a good hand at, su^ jiU^)
habitually.
Accordingly, all monotonic binomials in this Glossary are marked
only with the tone of the single accented syllable, the unmarked half of
the compound being strictly atonic, that is, destitute of all tone properly
so called. As Edkins well observes, " The tendency of the local accent
is to forsake tfie last syllable whenever the process of dissyllabification is
complete, that is, whenever the last of two words loses special signi-
ficance, and can be treated as a syllable of a compound word." This
atonic variation 'bears the same relation to its accented or fully toned
companion as does the unaccented syllable to the accented in an English
dissyllabic word. In our adjective human and the Chinese pronoun
Va men the latter portions of each are identical both in sonnd and tone
or rather tonelessness. The voice sinks in both instances to the " low
level intonation" which Edkins, following the native view, names the
TONE AND AOCBNT IN PBKINESK. 133
third variety of the shang p'ing, but which, is seems to me, can only be
so called negatively and constructively, as referable to none of the other
three classes, and to which therefore the term atonic appears more
appropriate.
With ditonic words the tones of the component syllables are both
marked because both are distinctly pronounced, though usually somewhat
greater stress is laid upon the last.
In metatonic binomials both tones are marked, but one is inclosed
in brackets. From the words so distinguished the tone often withdraws
altogether, especially in rapid and familiar speech, and then the binomial
becomes simply monotonic. At other times, when the speaker is
enunciating with precision and accuracy, the bracketed tone reasserts
itself, and the phrase hardly differs from a ditonic. More commonly the
intermediate stage occurs, where the tone has almost, but yet not quite,
deserted the weaker syllable.
So much for accent. It remains only to examine the character of
the tones singly, and of the sixteen tonic combinations of which binomial
phrases may consist.
The shang p'ing or " upper even " tone.
In the first place the normal Pekinese shang p'ing, — the shang
p'ing, that is, when isolated, — is not an upper even tone at all. Edkins
has described this form (which is also heard when final and accented,)
as the upper falling tone, or upper quick falling, but I cannot concur in
the description for this reason. In his Mandarin Grammar, p. 18,
writing on the Pekinese tones, he says, " When a word in ch'il sheng
"follows another in ch'ii sheng it rises in pitch, so that the intonation
"l.q.f. [lower quick falling] become u.q.f. [upper quick falling]." *
He thus identifies a normal shang p'ing with an accented ch'u sheng
following another ch'ti sheng. Beyond question this is an error, as will
at once be seen by making the necessary tests. Were it correct, the
combinations ^ JJ *« tao^ and ^ '^ ta tao* , for example, would be
undistinguishable, which most certainly they are not. It is nevertheless
true that the normal shang p'ing does terminate in a sort of rapid descent
or " dying fall,"f and to my ear this normal form seems an even tone
sustained on a somewhat high level until, just at the termination, the
voice, relieved of the tension, drops suddenly as the sound ceases. In
default of a better description, and to mark its distinction from the
accented final ch'u sheng, I would suggest its definition as the " up[)er
deflected " tone. The shang p'ing when standing first in combination is,
as Dr. Edkins has pointed out, a true upper even tone, but it is
observable that it tends to be of rather higher pitch when followed by. an
* I have corrected the obvious slips or misprints I.q.r. [lower quick rising]
and u.q.r. [upper quick rising] of the original.
•j- Mr. GrOH in his introduction to the Kuan Sua CMh Nan speaks of this
tone aB@Jh^"T']Jiiih§laK/S>" descending from above and stopping,
sound and tone comparatively short."
134 THE GDIDE TO KUAN HUA.
atonic final than when the final carries part of the accent, higher for
example on sJian in shan^ tung, [Jj '^, than in shan' tung^ , \[\ ^
The hsiapHng or '' lower even " tone also belies its name, not being
either low or even, but, as Edkins says, an upper, quick, rising
intonation.
The sTiang sJieng or "rising" tone is a low, slow, risingjtone, pro-
longed on a low level and rising only towards the end. The Pekinese
hsia p'ing and sliang sheng do in fact constitute what in southern dialacts
would be upper and lower series of a single natural tone, distinguish-
able, however, not solely by difference of pitch, but by duration and
manner of rising.
The fourth and last conventional Peking tone is the ch'u sheng, a
" quick falling " tone varying considerably in pitch. The so-called
circumflex variety described by Edkins as falling and rising again
quickly 1 do not regard as a distinct form, but simply as the effect of
the necessary rapid elevation of the voice from the bottom of this
descending tone to the higher point at which any succeeding accented
tone (except the shang sheng) must begin.
To recapitulate : the Pekinese have five distinct natural tones
grouped under four conventional names. There are an upper deflected,
(normal), and an upper even tone, both classed under the shang pHng ;
an upper rising, — the hsia p'ing ; a lower rising, — the shang sheng ; and a
falling tone, — the ch'ii sheng; and further there is an atonic variety into
which any of the four traditional tones may degenerate when final and
unaccented.
We come lastly to the tones in the 16 groups of binomial combina-
tions. These require to be dwelt on at no great length, and except in
those commencing with a shang sheng, the monotonic groups do not
demand special notice. The accented first syllable having its proper tone
emphatically pronounced, and the second being atonic, a speaker has,
so to say, only to take care of the first and the last will take care of
itself.
(1.) Double shang p'ing. In monotonies the accented first syllable is
in a high even tone. In ditonics the first syllable is also of the upper
even tone, with a tendency to be somewhat lower in pitch than when
followed by an atonic; the second syllable is in the normal, or upper
deflected tone, and, as pointed out by Sir T. Wade, is higher in pitch
than the first. Examples, Monotonic, [Jj g^ shan^ hsi, Ditonic, ^ l}\
hsi-' shan^ .
(2.) Shang p'ing Jr hsia p'ing. Monotonies as in (1). Ditonics, tones
respectively upper even, and normal. Ex. M. JJ Jg Ku^ niang, D.'^ ^
, kuan^ Tiling^.
(3.) Shang p'ing + shang sheng. Monotonies as in (1). Ditonics,
tones upper even, and normal. Ex. M. J^ ^ ch'ingi ch'u, D. J^ ||
chic^ li^.
TONE AND ACCENT IN PEKINKSK. 135
(4). Shang p'ing + ch'U sheng. Monotonies as in (1). Ditonics, tones
upper even, and normal. Ex. M. ^ ^ ch'ai^ shih, D. ^ ^ shengi ch'i^ .
(5). Hsia p'ing + shang p'ing. Monotonies in this and the next three
groups demand no remark. Dilonics require attention, for the tone of
the initial syllable scarcely sounds like an ordinary hsia p'ing, being
pitched unusually low ; the second is in the upper deflected tone.
Personally I find more difficulty in distinguishing between this
group and ditonic double shang p'ings than between any two others.
Ex. M. \^jens chia, D. [pj ^ ktii^ cMa^.
(6). Double hsia p'ing. Ditonics, tones normal. Ex. M. ^ ^ shih^
t'ou, B.-^f^ko^chih^.
(7). Hsia p'ing -{- shang sheng. Ditonics, tnnes normal. Metatonics
occur very commonly in this group. Ex. M. ^^yun'' ts'ai, D. -^ fl"
t'ai^fu^.
(8). Hsia p'ing + ch'ij, sheng. Ditonics, tones normal. Ex. M. ^ '^
yen^ se, 0. ^ ^ sui^ pien ^ .
(9). Shang sheng + shang p'ing. Monotonies. It deserves noting that
in all monotonia groups where a shang sheng is the first element, the
pitch of the atonic word is perceptibly higher than in the corresponding
syllable in any of the twelve other groups commencing with a shang
p'ing, hsia p'ing or ch'ii sheng. So, for example, the same word hsi is
higher in ^^ Shan^ hsi (Shensi) than in [1| @ Shan^ hsi. What is
the reason of this ? Probably the following. As we have seen, the
shang sheng is a tone prolonged on a low level, rising only towards its end.
The stress of accentuation, which usually tends to raise the pitch of the
voice, does in this case, (and analogous effects are produced by certain
modes of emphasis in our own language,) still further depress the level of
the tone, so much so that on the relaxing of the accentual strain the voice
at once seeks relief by rising to a higher and more normal point and
there leaving the atonic syllable stranded. Ditonics, tones normal, and
upper deflected. Ex. M. ^ f§ Shan^ hsi, D. ^ ^ ching^ an^ .
(10). Shang sheng + hsia p'ing. Ditonics, tones normal. There is less
difference apparent between monotonies and ditonics in this combination
than in any of the other groups. Ex. M. §{j 'i^ kan^ ch'ing (actually !),
D. ^ |g kan^ ch'ing^ (gratitude).
(11). Double shang sheng. Monotonies. Owing doubtless to the
intimate natural relation between the Pekinese hsia p'ing and the shang
sheng, in many instances the accented syllable, instead of bearing its
normal tone, is heard in the hsia p'ing, as in jf^ J0 huo^ pa a torch, ^ ^
ssU^ kuei a dead man, ^ f^ ta^ sao to sweep clean. In other cases the
accented syllable is pronounced at one time in the shang sheng, at
another in the hsia p'ing, as in J^ JS tsao-^ ch'i or tsao^ ch'i, 0|q] A^
shang^ huo or shang^ huo, ^ 'JS % hsieh^ farh or hsieh^ farh. Others
again are always normal, as Jp^ erh^ to, ^^ chieh^ chieh. Ditonics.
136 THB GUIDE TO KUAN HUA.
Unless pronounced slowly, the tones are hsia p'ing and shatig sheng, and
are so marked in the Glossary. Ex. M. see above, D. ^Pj] chivF yang^,
Although there is a general agreement as to the fact of this modi-
fication, it has not been quite unchallenged. On the one hand we have,
amongst others, Dr. Edkins, Sir T. Wade (partially) and Mr. Goh ;
on the other, Mr. E. H. Parker. It will be useful to examine the
opinions expressed.
I have quoted already Dr. Edkins' statement, " When two shang
" sMngs occur together with the accent on the last, the first rises to the
" pitch of hsia p'ing with which it becomes identical." Sir T. Wadb
{Tzic A-h Chi, Colloquial Series, 2nd Edit., Vol. II, p. 422) observes,
" Under the 3rd, [tone, viz., the shang sheng^ the change is more
" remarkable : the first syllable is changed nearly, if not quite, to the
" 2nd tone ; still there is a manifest limitation proper to particular
"vowels." Mr. Goh affirms, in his Chinese introduction to the Kuan
Hua Chill Nan, " Whenever in colloquial two connected shang sheng
" words occur, the first must be read in the hsia p'ing, the second in the
" shang sheng, as the saying runs ^ J; jJJ f^ feng shang pi tao, which
" means (he adds in a note) when two shang sheng words meet, the tone
" of one must be overthrown."
Mr. Parker, on the other hand, (China Review, Vol. VII, p. 183)
considers such a rule to be too rigidly stated. He thinks the tonic
modification described by Edkins is " optional, unconscious and elastic ;
" and a complete disregard of it in no way tends to make the speaker
" less comprehensible than he otherwise would be." Further on he
quotes a sentence from the " Hundred Lessons," where three successive
shang sheng words occur, and points out, very truly, that it is immaterial
whether each of them is separately clearly pronounced, or whether the
first or the second is changed to a hsia p'ing.
So far as the statements of the four writers really conflict, I agree
with the majority, and the more readily as Mr. Parker seems not to
have fully appreciated one element in the question which is in fact
essential. The modifications described by Dr. Edkins apply strictly
only to recognised and permanent combinations. Such combinations or
compound words, formed by the union of two members in an intimate
and lasting alliance, are altogether distinct from the mere accidental and
momentary juxtaposition of syllables, such as those in the sentence
Mr. Parker quotes. It is only in the former case that the mutual
action and reaction of the tones are afforded opportunity to have full
play. Where no such dissyllabification has been developed, as it has
not ill the above instance, or in one adduced by Sir T. Wadb,* the
accent will be regulated entirely in accordance with temporary and varying
conditions, with, in fact, the relative prominence give by the speaker
* Ma haiao " the horae is small," which is a complete sentence, not a com-
pound word.
TONE AND ACCENT IN PEKINESE. 137
at his option to any one of the constituent and co-ordinate terms of the
expression. Then, and only then, in my judgment, can this tonic
modification be considered without system or significance.
Before leaving this group it will not be out of place to glance at
what seems to be the reason why the sharig sheng when modified becomes
a hsia p'ing rather than any other tone. Although in ditonics neither
syllable is destitute of tone, in many, perhaps most cases, the accent
preponderates on one rather than the other. When therefore it falls
on the latter syllable in a binomial of double shang shengs the effect is to
strengthen Ihe tone of this at the expense of the first, so that the
length and comparative lowuess of the more accented tone are unusually
marked, in contrast with the forced compression and elevation of the
other, which in thus becoming a high and short rising tone, has been
simply converted into a hsia p'ing, or in other terms, has been transferred
from the lower into the higher series, a change of constant occurrence in
those dialects where a regular double series of tones exists.
(12). Shang sheng x ch'il sheng. Ditonics, tones normal. Ex. M.
W tf mai^ mat, D. ^ ^ man^ ti* . Metatonics are common in this
group.
(13). Ch'ii sheng x shang p'ing. Ditonics, tones normal. Ex. M.
^ ^ ti* hsiung, D. j3g J|»jy yung* hsin^ .
(11). Ch'ii sheng X hsia p'ing. Ditonics, tones normal. Ex. M. ^|^
t'ai^ yang, D. [p] ||y hsiang* ch'ien^ .
(15). Ch'iX sheng x shang sheng. Ditonics, tones normal. Ex. M.
"gf j^ tou^fu, D. g ^ yao* chin^ .
(16). Double ch'ii sheng. Ditonics, tones normal, but when the accent
is thrown more strongly on the second word, as often happens, the latter,
though in other respects unaltered, rises in pitch. Owing to this, the
voice is compelled to rise suddenly from the low level where the first
word terminates, to the higher one at which the second commences,
and thus, as Mr. Pakker has pointed out, " the ear detects a change
" which produces an effect approximate to that of a shang sheng,"
though the similarity is only superficial. Ex. M. gj; ^ tu^ tai, D. ^ ^
pai^ k'o*.
19
138
THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA.
GLOSSARY OF PHRASES
SHOWING THE TONES AND ACCENT OF EACH PHRASE AS
PRONOUNCED IN THE PEKINESE DIALECT.
aii sJdki
cm 1 ch'an *
ani cliao*
an'i chial
an 1 o?d7i
an 1 Jisin l
an 1 7t'ang 1
an 1 sliang
anl tzu ■
ani tzu
ao^ yehi
c7ia 1 ch'ih W
ch'a 2 chirk i
«A'fl2 cliien
eh'a^ oh'iiarhi
ch'a^ lisiin
oA'aH Am 2
ch'aii(t)
ch'a 2 p'arh 2
ch'a 1 pieh 2
ch'a 1 sung (4)
ch'ai tienC^}
cJi'al ts'oW
ch'a 1 tz&
ch'a 2 joare 3
ch'a 2 Miere
c/l'ffl2 yehi
ch'a 2 ye»*
^?
mm
mm
wzm
mm
to be unable, or impossible, to
to matter, be of harm
saddle and saddle-oloth
according to, in accordance with
to give, or to serve, as alimony to one's family
to put in position. III, 9. To establish one
(in business) II, 9
free from anxiety, quiet, I, 7. Deliberately
in good health
to fix on, or together
a saddle
a table, work-bench
to work at night
to officially instruct
1^ a teapoy
" Tea-money," a fee on taking a house
1& a saucer
to investigate, examine judicially
a tea-pot
surprised
^ a tea-tray
difference, distinction
to intervene in legal proceedings
to check, go through, examine
a mistake, miscalculation
a fork
a tea-cup
to examine, interrogate
tea
to inspect, verify
IV, 7
III, 13
III, 16
IV, 5
111,20
11,27
IV, 3
II, 14
III, 16
II, 14
I, 39
IV, 6
III, 2
11,1
III, 2
IV, 8
111,2
II, 33
111,2
IV, 18
IV, 10
11,21
IV, 13
111,4
111,2
IV, 5
1,9
IV, 13
QLOSSAET OF PHEASBS. 139
ckai 1 hei
m^
to lend (money) temporarily to
11,21
chai^ imlrh^
^P9^
a mansion, large estaWishment
11,37
ch'an li'ai
nm
to tear open
11,36
clh'ai'i- slhih
mm
official duties
1,34
clian i ch^ieh 3
ma.
temporarily
IV, 6
ohan * fang 2
^w
a warehouse, godown
II, 2
ohan 1 Jmang l
m^
to receive benefit or profit irom (a man)
IV, 9
cJian 1 lien (2)
mm
to append
11,19
cJian 3 pw
m^
a duster
III, 4
cJkan 1 feii
m^
felt, also foreign woollen materials
III, 5
chang 1 e?(.'^»^
mm
regulations
IV, 6
chang * /awjr 2
mm
a counting-house, accountant's office
III, 8
chang i fang 2
mm
a tent
III, 8
chang 3 _;o!i 4
&m
to put on flesh
III, 16
cAbM^ 4 TOM
mn
accounts
11,19
chang 3 <enj 1
mm
to light the lamps
11,29
cAarej' 4 izfi
n?
curtains
III, 9
cJi'angH c?du(i)
m^
enduring, permanent
11,23
ch'angi hsii
mm
(of actors) to act, give a performance
III, 11
eh'ang'i hung
MX
a labourer, etc., permanently employed
11,12
ch'angi yii
mm
good [or] clever, at
IV, 17
chao 2 chi 2
WMi
excited, disturbed
11,22
chaoifu^
mm
to reply officially (on equal terms)
IV, 6
cha-oi JmiW
M#
to address officially (on equal terms)
IV, 1
chad h'an
mm
to look after, attend to
III, 8
chaoi lii
mm
legally
IV, 6
chao^ liang^
mm
to get a chill
I, 5
chao ipani
mm
to take action as requested
IV, 7
chao 2 pu
nm
to find a way to make it up to one
II, 7
chao^ shiJi*
mm
to seek employment
11,17
chao'^ tingi
m^
to make a full confession
11,38
chao 1 tsu 1
mm
to Let
II, 1
chao i US
m?
a shade, cover (e.g". a lamp-shade)
III, 13
chao i yangrhi
mm^
like the pattern
II, 7
chao * ying
mm
to look after, attend to
II, 9
ch'ao'ifan
"t^m
to dispute
11,32
ch'aoi hsiehiS)
^u
to copy
11,38
ch'ao^ nao
mm
camphor
III, 10
ch^ao 3 nao *
^PfM
to quarrel
IV, 19
clU i Chiang
m^
province of Chekiang
11,24
cheHfu
Vim
to satisfy, pacify, mollify
IV, 8
140
THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA.
che^ tzU
chi^ yen,
cli'e i chou 3
cA'el hsiangrh'i-
ch'e'i- irh^
ch'et- tzS
oU'e 1 yiiarh^ (sic)
cMn'i- clto
cheni tienW
cheni t'ou
ehen^ yiiani
cMngi ch'ien^
cheniiicJbing3(sic)
cJiengifangW
cliengT- lun
cheng * pan 4
cMng 1 yiielt (*)
cli'engi c/tial
ch'eng'i ehieni
cJt'Sng 2 (•/jo 1
ch'eng 2 cliuang
eh'engi ch'un^
ch'eng i hsinW
ch'eng 1 hu
ch'eng 2 j 1
ch'eng 2 huan 3
ch'eng 2 ming 2
ch'eng ^ shang
ch'eng 'i tii
ch'eng 'i w&ni
chi^ cMhi
chi i fang W
chi^ hsia
chi^ hsing
chi * » *
chi * jan, 2
chi 1 jou (4)
chi 1 mi
chi i p'in 3
3i^
ffii
Ht
©a
mm
mm
mm
Mm
my
IBtt
Bl Si
to make over to (in composition for a date) II, 25
a folded slip of paper III, 4
to make excuses III, 15
hampered, embarrassed II, 2+
the body of a cart III, 6
a cartstail III, 17
a wheelbarrow 11,21
the shaftboard of a cart III, 6
to deliberate, think or talk over II, 38
to pour out wine III, 7
a market-place, market town II, 12
a pillow III, 3
to exult over II, 30
to make money [or] a profit II, 17
proper, right, correct I, 33
the main range of a house III, 9
to dispute, argue ■ IV, 6
a regular or correct course, proceeding IV, 10
thefirst month of the year IV, 16
(of men) to marry II, 17
a fixed resolve, a resolution, a mind made up IV, 8
dinners ready laid ITI, 11
a written plaint or charge IT, 19
in crowds, in bodies II, 23
an attention IV, 1 i
to address by name, to style I, 18
ready-made clothes 11, 35
to hold oneself responsible II, 13
to make a name IV, 16
to mount (a horse) IV, 18
to hand in, deliver IV, I
to be obliged for (your) kind inquiries IV, 2
upon proceeding to, as soon as IV, 6
to deposit at II, 15
to bear in mind, take note of II, 39
memory III, 15
to devise IV, 9
since, as II, 15
fowl (as food) III, i
secret I, 16
sacrificial vessels II, ^0
GLOSSARY OF PHRASES. 141
cU^sMh(.i) ^ B^ at what time
chi 1 fang 1 =li ^ ohickeu broth
ohiitsai 12 K inserted in, mentioned in
c7n 1 tzSrJt 3 S^ ^^ J^ an egg
cAi2 yen^ "^ ^ auspicious words, good auguries
cJiii ye»l ^^ 'J50 to give up smoking opium
ch'i 1 ch'a 2 j>^ ^ to make tea
cA'jS c7m(S) ^ ^ to assemble, meet together
ch'i^ chieh t^ ^^ in full readiness
ch'i 3 eh'n l JB ^ at first
chH 2 c7iw,?!^ 1 ^ '1' in this, therein
ch'iichung* ^^ to highly appreciate or value (a man's services) II,
ch'i^fengi ^ fei" to remove the official seals
ch'i Sfy,^ ffl J^ to go out of mourning
ch'ii hou^ ^ J^ (of friendship) close and lasting
ch'ii hsien'i ^ ^ to disdain
c/i'i 3 huo i ^ ^ to take delivery of goods
ch'i 2 jen |^ ^^ a Bannerman
ch'i 2 Jan 3 ^ ^ you are very good 1
ch'i 3 lai JE ^ to rise
ch'i 2 ma3 g^ ^^ to ride a horse
ch'i 2 mei 4 ^ |^ therein, included
c7i'i 2 j)ei 4 5^ •j^ ready prepared
ch'i 4 «e ^ ■^ one's looks, appearance
ch'i 1 shang ^'jjj _t (o^ tea) to make it
ch'i^ shen'^ ^ ;^ to start on a journey
c7i'i 1 shSng l ^ ^ to impose on one's ignorauce
eh'i 2 shih 2 ^ ^ as a matter of fact, the truth is
cAial c^i«»3 ^ ^ sycee shears
cAja 4 cA'«e» 'M ^ "■ P'"'oe
chiai ehih IM flE ^ P''"^''
chia 1 c7i« ^ B. fittings of a house
c7wa 1 chilan ^ ^ one's wife
chia 1 Afflo ijjn 3^ to cangue
c/tial/iMO ^ i'Jt utensils
cAml i* ■ftn "^ with all possible (care, zeal, etc.)
ehialjen ^ /^ a member of one's household
chia 1 i'ai Mt B^ to cut open with shears
chia 1 H ^ f ji ^"^ *^^ house, at home
chia^ mu^ ^ f^ my mother
chia 1 ^ej 4 i&II ^ twice as much
IV,
11
III,
i
I,
19
III,
3
IV,
12
II,
25
II,
29
IV,
8
III,
20
II,
23
IV,
7
)II,
5
II,
22
IV,
16
IV,
20
IV,
18
IV,
8
n.
24
II,
1
I,
25
III,
16
II,
9
IV,
17
I,
5
III,
2
11,
3
II,
24
11,
33
II,
36
III,
3
II,
2
II,
9
II,
3
II,
6
III,
8
IV,
5
II,
22
II,
36
II,
3
IV
15
I,
21
142
THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA.
cJda 2 pei *
cltia 2 piz
cliia'i^ sMhi
cTiia'i tzfiS
cilia i txu
cilia 1 yin l
cliiang^ chin
chiangl Jisi
Chiang^ lai^
cliiang 3 shu l
cliiang * <zS
cliiang i yilW
chiang * ^m 2
cli'iang 2 c/jiew
cli'iangS Ungi
cli'iang^ liv,^
cli'iang l iiao
chiaoS elm (A)
chiao^ cliii
cli'iao^ cli'ing
cliiao^ cJi'ing'^
chiaoi cli'ing
cliiao 1 fa
chiao 3 hsia W
cliiao 1 /is JeA *
c/jMo3 Using i
cliiao'^ liuan^
chiao i huarli 1
c7jiao 1 Amo 4
cliiao^ li'ai^
chiao'^ ltd
cliiao^ liei
cliiao'^ nun
cliiaoT- she
cliiaol sAou
cliiao^ tai
(4);
^#
mm
mm
m^
m^
m.m
mm
^^
mm
mm
M#
^m.
^K
Kiai »W
a double coverlet
for example, for instance
domestic affairs
private effects
year of one's birth
a frame, stand
" glad tidings," news from you
neat, tasteful
province of Kiangsi
in future
to explain the text
province of Kiangsu
paste
to praise
soy
vigorous, robust
to force, compel
to detain by force
accent
dishonest
on occasions of intercourse
intimacy
to hand over in full
stubborn
way, or system of teaching
the present moment
to give over charge
a piece of good fortune
to hand back
to water flowers
to deliver goods
to call to one to open a door
to hand or give over to
to show how
fragile
international, " mixed " (cases, etc.)
scaffolding *
to hand over to
III,
17
II,
39
IV,
16
IV,
9
I,
3
III,
3
IV,
13
I,
30
II,
24
II,
17
I,
30
II,
21
III,
14
IV,
4
III,
4
IV,
1
IV,
6
IV,
2
I,
17
n,
32
IV,
18
I,
9
IV,
7
III,
15
I,
30
n,
1
II,
3
II,
5
II,
22
III,
18
II,
19
II,
29
I,
19
III,
10
III,
18
IV,
4
III,
14
III,
13
• But pronounced diiao' s/iom', the vords mean to struggle or flght together, whether indivi-
duals or hodies of troops.
GLOSSARY OF PHRASES.
143
chiao 2 tzU
cliiao * UU
ehiao^ wang
ch' iao * huo (*)
cJi'iao 2 ping ^
chiehi ch'i"
chieli 3 chie7t
chieW^ clhien^
chielh * cUHen 2
cMeh 2 clbileU i
chieh 1 /anj
chieh i Itei
chieh 3 moi
chieh i mo
chieh* pan*
chieJi^ shang
chieli* shao *
chichi shih^
chieh ^ sliov,^
chieh 1 shu*
chieh* t'ung^
chieh * tzurh *
chieh* tz'il^
chieh * yiieh l
chieh * ywng *
ch'ieh * sJiih 2
chien^ ching
chien * chiao *
chien l ch'ing 3
ehien * chu (3)
chien * chuang *
chien* chiian*
chien3 ch'ueJiW
chien 3 fa
chien 3 fang *
chien* hsin*
chien * hsing *
chien* kei
chien i Tfu
chien* liuai*
m.m.
mm
mm
^m
m^
mm
^^
mm
m±
mm
m^
If
m m
mm
Mm
mm
Mi.
fiat
mm
mm
a bit (for horses)
III, 16
a sedan chair
III, 8
dealings, transactions, witli
IV, 9
good bargains
II, 9
to see patients
11,37
at the due date
IV, 19
an elder sister
11,17
to receive (a visitor)
IV, 5
to borrow money
11,17
to break off relations or intimacy with
a neighbour
11,15
the slightest anxiety or thought
IV, 17
to lend to
II, 9
sisters
11,17
mustard
III, 4
to procure, raise, (money)
IV, 7
in the street
11,27
to be one's iatroducer
1,19
when the time comes
IV, U
to make water
III, 16
to take over charge
II, 5
to escort a consignment of copper
IV, 12
Q a promissory note
IV, 19
to make an excuse
IV, 8
a promissory note
II, 31
to borrow for one's needs
IV, 9
trustworthy, exact
II, 8
a witness
11,32
(your) instructions, wishes, desires
IV, 13
to press one to
IV, 6
a person to recommend one
11,10
hale and hearty
IV, 15
to send up a candidate's examination papers
for the approval of the Chief Examiner
IV, 12
an easy post
II, 3
to select by lot for a post
IV, 18
to select for appointment
IV, 15
a letter of recommendation
11,24
my surname
I, 1
to recommend
III, 20
strong, substantial
II, 10
to think strange, to mind
IV, 1
144
THE GOIDE TO KUAN HUA.
cliien'^ kitani
chien i Un *
chien 3 7nan i
chien * slmrh W
chien i t'ien 1
cJiieii i yiii
cJi'ien i an'i
ch'ieni oh'iu
ch'ien^ hang
ch'ien^ houi
chHen 2 jen i
ch'ien 2 jih (*)
eh'ien^ kuan^
ch'ien^ liavg
ch'ien^ mi 3
ch'ien 2 nien
ch'ieni p'u*
ch'ien 1 she
ch'ien,^ shih
ch'ien 2 shurh W
ch'ien 2 t'ie7i
ch'ien'^ t'ou
ch'ien 2 ts'ai 2
cJiienl tzH
ch'ien^ tzU
ch'ien 2 tz'Hi
ch'ien l wan
ch'ien 2 yimg (*)
chih 2 cliao
chilli i ch'i
chihl ck'ih
chih 1 chou 3
cJiih 4 ho i
ohih^ hsien^
chih 1 hui
chih^ ii
chih 1 Jiei
chih 2 k'o 3
e/ii/t* kwan^
chih 2 K
to administer in addition to one's proper duties IV, 2
HO ffi
BU B
mm
mM
mu
^?
mm
mm
as *i
^^
^^
miserly, stingy
11,31
unceremonious, cavalier
IV, 1
tlie number of articles
III, 14
every day
11,14
to signify (your) wislies
IV, 5
indisposed, unwell
1,10
(your or his) birthday
I, 32
a cash-bank
II, 9
first and last
11,18
the former incumbent
II, 5
the day before yesterday
IV, 9
a sum owed, indebtedness
IV, 10
the land-tax
II, 22
money and food
II, Rl
the year before last
1,18
a cash-bank
K, 9
to Introduce, import, bring forward (into
discussion)
a
IV, 9
a stumble (of horses)
IIlfl6
the number of copper cash
111,12
the day before yesterday
1,19
in front
11,29
money
IV, 9
slips of wood, labels
III, 14, 17
pincers
III, 9
the last [or] a previous, occasion
IV, 8
(also ch'ien^ wanii),) on no account
1,16
money for an outlay
11, 8
a warrant, written authority
III, 20
resolution, strength of will
11,25
to manage to struggle along
11,23
(or fl/jc' chovF), hampered, embarrassed
II, 24
to convey congratulations
I, 32
a District Magistrate
II, 5
to officially inform, notify
IV, 7
resolvdd, bent upon
IV, 15
to advance (wages, etc.)
III, 13
can only, the only thing is to— (also Ufi^
and Uu* h'o')
h'o'
11,34
just, merely, (also tzu* liuan")
IV, 4
province of Chihli
IV. 20
QliOSSAKT OF PHRASKS.
145
ckih 1 minf
ohih 3 ming 2
chih 1 ihang
ehihl sA^nl
cAi/jl thih
ehih'y tao
chih * tmi *
c&iA* til
chih 3 joanj (4)
ehih^ yaoi
ehiJi* yii
eh'ihlfan^
ch'ik i ling 4
ch'iJi, 2 p'ing 2
e/i'ifel «7tiA
ch'ih^ ts'un
ch'ih^ tzH
ch'ik 1 yen l
r Ai» 4 eh'eng *
«Ai»l chih^
chin « cAi»j l
c/tin 4 cA'tf
ohin.^ hsueh^
chin 4 i 4
cftin 1 jih (4)
cAin 4 hung 1
ehin^ lai^
chini U*
chin 1 nien
fAi»4 ihengi
chin* ihih
chin'^ tzS
chin^ tzS
chin 3 yaoi
chini yehi
ch'in 1 ch'ai
ch'in 1 eh'i
ch'in ip'ei^
ch'in 1 thin ^
20
a visiting card
III, 18
by name, specifically
IV, 6
to prop up, stretch upon
III, 9
solitary, quite alone
IV, 18
to indicate, instruct as to
IV, 4
(also chih 1 tao 4) to know
I, 6
to punish
11,35
social system, state of society
IV, 4
hope, aspiration
IV, 11
provided that (also tzU 2 yao 4)
11,2+
to go and — (do some prejudicial act),
to go so far as to I,
16, II, 13
to eat, take food
III, 4
to give official orders to
IV, 6
guided by justice, impartially
IV, ]
provisions, eatables
III, 8
measurement, dimensions
n, 7
a spoon
III, 4
to smoke opium
11,25
to go into the city
11,18
urgent, hurried
IV, 3
one's present post or rank
II, 5
to go into Peking
11,17
just (enough, etc.), neither too — nor too
- Ill, 3
to go in, enter
II, 8
to take a Licentiate's Degree
IV, 16
progress, advance, improvement
1,30
to-day
IV, 4
to go into the Palace
11,39
lately
1,16
with all one's power
IV, 6
this year
I, 2
to go into the provincial capital
II, 4
a Metropolitan Graduate
IV, 2
gold
11,28
to do nothing but — , to be for ever
1,37
important, urgent
IV, 1
to present oneself to, pay a visit to
IV, 16
an Envoy, an Imperial CommiBsioner
IV, 1
a relative of another name
II, 1
to respect deeply
IV, 18
in person
11,18
146
THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA.
c/i'inl tzu
cJi'in 1 yu (3)
cTiing'i ch'ai
ehing'^ cJi'eng
ching l oM
cJiing 3 chiJb
eJdng 1 Asia i
citing * i *
cJiingi kuan
ching '^ /iKan(3)
cJdngi kwani
cJdngl k'ung^
ching l sMn,
ching i tzu
ch'ing 3 a?s l
ch'ing 3 cAiao
ch'ing^ chieni
ch'ing 2 c/jiA 3
ch'ing 1 c7i%
ch'ing 1 chv,ng *
ch'ing 1 /^n^ 1
ch'ing l Aijera
ch'ing 2 Asinj
ch'ing^ i(i)
ch'ing S h'oi
ch'ing 3 «/ia?ij 4
ch'ing 1 iAfei?
ch'ing 2 s/ii/i 2
ch'ing 3 jfti/j 4
ch'ing 1 tan
ch'ing l ia?i i
c/t'i«j 1 tsan (3)
ch'ing 3 i»o *
ch'ing 2 i*0M 3
ch'ing 3 «)^7j 4
ch'ing 2 yiian 4
c/wM 3 cA^w^
c/iiwS c7t'ie»
(iMmI c/t'i»y(sic)
Bra iJX
Bra B
'ira ^
lis
ilM
Ira M>
^ I.
Bra -C
Sra ^
OT ^
:*:
^5
personally
relatives and friends
the Metropolitan Scrutiny
a Chief Clerk
a salesman
Scenery
frightened, scared
respect for, mark of respect
Peking officials
to manage, deal with
just, simply
(also ching l h'ung (3)), to startle
upland rice
the Peking Gazette
spirits, energy
to be always — , to do nothing but —
to present one's compliments
may I ask, I, 1 (also ohing 3 ehiao *)
to ask to see, or, for an interview
to request the issue of a Decree
distinct, clear
degree of gravity or importance
the cool breeze
elegant leisure
circumstances, state of affairs
feeling, sentiment
to invite guests
please take the place of honour
better, not so severe (of an illness)
as a matter of fact, the truth is
to request instructions
(of food), plain, without dressing
a detailed list, an Invoice, etc.
very early in the day
please take a seat
please proceed
may I ask
willing
the 9 divisions of the Tartar city Peking
wine-money, a pourioire
after all ^
II,
12
II,
11
IV,
15
IV,
13
II,
12
I,
20
II.
28
I,
9
I,
35
IV,
7
III,
IB
II,
28
III,
7
IV,
11
II,
25
II,
33
I,
3
IV,
10
II,
6
22
I,
16
IV,
6
11,
22
II,
24
IV,
5
I,
9
III,
11
II,
i
I,
7
IV,
9
IV,
6
III,
11
IV,
13
III,
12
II,
4
IV,
11
I,
, 3
IV
, 9
in.
12
III
, 6
I
,13
GLOSSARY OP PHRASES.
147
ohiu'^ chu
ohiuS hsingi
chiu^ i(3)
cMuS liui
oliiu 3 pei 1
chiu 3 p^ei 2
ehiv, i ping *
chiu i shourh 3
oMu * sui i
eliiu^ Uuani
chiu 1 tzU
chili 3 wei 2
chiu 2 yani/ 3
chiv,^ yen^
ch'ivt 1 sJiin. 3
ch'iu^ sJiou^
cJi'iui t'ien
cho^ lo
cho ^ pi'i
cho'i tzii
cho 3 tzu
ch'o 1 tzU
chou^ eh'i^
chon^ cheng
chou 1 chih l
cJioui cliuan(?)
ehou't- hiieni
cJu>u 1 hsilan
choni mei^
eh'ou'i- pi
ek'ou^ txS
chui cha^
chu 4 chia i
chu^ Chiang^
chui chih
chu 2 ching 4
chu^ chu
chu i fang ^
chvi^fu
cliui htia
M ft to catch hold of with the hand II, 32
J^S (of wine) exhilaration III, 2
^ 2 long since IV, 1
is H former days II, 31
^v ^ to detain long IV, 11
J^ /^ a wine-glass III, 4
^1^ to stay long with IV, 8
■^ jl^ an old complaint II, 24
gljj ^ JQ while about it III, 2
■^ ^ the old year II, 40
J^ ^ a corkscrew III, 7
^ -f a wife's brother II, 10
^ ^ I am delighted to meet you again (and
c/mmS toejl ) I, 4
^ ft]) I am delighted to make your acquaintance I, 1
^^ to delay, loiter IV, 3
Wi W the autumn assize IV, 11
^ 4K the autumn harvest II, 11
Wi ^ autumn II, 22
^ ^ a settlement, termination IV, 7
jffl Jjj suppose for the sake of argument (or cho i |;i3) u, ii
f^ ^F a table I, 18
§§ -f a bangle, bracelet II, 36
1^ ■? a stamp, die II, 34
J^ ]^ carriage by land and water IV, 18
^ JE proper, correct III, 5
)ni ^D to be perfectly informed IV, 4
^ ^ enough to go round, adequate II, 9
jW 9^ Department and District Magistrates IV, 5
wl UK to pass the dishes to IV, 1
1^^ to frown III, 2
i^ ^ a drawer III, 3
1^ ^ silkstuffs III, 10
H v^\ stationed, resident, at IV, 1
fx ^ to have one's private residence II, 8
i S a Lecturer IV, 16
fiJi: an address IV, 7
^ te a path through a bamboo-grove I, 20
^ JH a spider HI, 1*
1£ M a dwelling-house H, H
09 P^ to get, or, ask one to H, 30
fi "I* to stop, lodge at H, 15
148
THX OUIDE TO EUAN HTJA.
chv, 2 i
J.B ri^^
notion, idea, plan
11,17
elm * tien ■<
ffiS
to stop at an inn
III, 8
c^al iol
^^
a number of, numerous
IV, 11
chu^ tza
tt^F
a pillar
III, 10
ch'u 1 c/i'^?jj 3
m^
to go out of the city
II, 11
cft'al c7ji«B
^^
the first part of a month
IV, 8
cA'MlcA'fi
m^
to go out
1,26
cA'«l eh'iieh^
pi Wi
to die in ofBoe
IV, 15
ch'uifang
Mm
a kitchen
III, 9
ch'ul hai3
^m
to put to sea
11,30
cA'al hsi
ffi ift
(of children) usefulness
1,33
ch'u 1 Jkhj 1
ffi ^
to relieve nature
11,29
eh'u 1 Zizj
ffi%
to come out
II, i
oA'a. 1 ?«a3
ffi (^
to visit patients
11, 2
cA'ul me»2
ffiP5
to go out of doors
1,10
ci'w 1 jrein^ s
ffiS
to become celebrated
11,37
c/j'M 1 «*e»
m^
mode of enterins the public service
IV, 15
cA'«3 iUhi
ji^
to administer affairs
IV, 1
eh'ul thou*
m«
to dispose of by sale
IV, 8
ch'u i so^
Mm
a spot, locality, place
IV, 6
eh'ui Hi
mm
to hoe
II, 11
oA'vl-t'ou^
^M
to come forward, appear (in a matter)
IV, 19
ch'u 1 ten l
ffiffl
to let
II, 1
cA'm2 <2S
^-"f
a cook
11,20
cA'kI tz'ii
m^
the first occasion
IV, 18
eh'u 1 soai *
ffi {'I'
to go abroad, leave home
11,15
ehil 1 ehang 3
€^
to be the eldest
I, 3
c/tii s cAia 1
*^
the entire family
IV, 16
cM2 cAi«»
mm
to recommend
11,10
ehUihuiW
MW
to assemble, make a party
IV, U
chii 3 j^ft
mK
a Provincial Graduate
II, 5
cAulZjs
^M
to stand on ceremony
I, 8
chii 1 i'jBj -'
m»
a patron
11,24
0/i«2foS
M^
a workroom, factory
II, 7
ch'iii ch'ien^
Mm
to fetch money, to cash
11,26
ch'ii, 3 chung *
Sl +
to obtain one's degree
IV, 12
cA'iil Aiiwl
Mil!>
rascality
11,16
cA'm*j«»<
*ffi
to leave one's post
IV, 15
cA'u 4 niere
£¥
last year
11,16
ch'ilishihi
Sift
to die
IV, 19
chuai 3 MO
Mie
a hole or rut in the road
III. 6
QLOBSART OF FHRASKS.
149
ehtian < chang *
mm
ohuanl eh'ing'^
Mm
ohuani ch'ien^
mm
cJiuanS cJiih*:
mm
ckiian 3 eh'ih ^
mm
ehv,an ^ maii
mm
chuani wa^
m%
ch'uan- ani
mm
ch'iuiK 2 chia *
mm
c7i'uan^ chih
mm
oh'uan 2 chih 3
mm
ch'uan^ cAmCS)
m^
ch'uan 2 fei *
mm.
ch'uan^ hsiin*
mm
ch'uan" hu^
mp
eh'uan 2 pang i
mm
ch'uan 1 shang
m±
ch'uan^toi S5 ^"6
ch'uani- t'u^ jlj jt
ehuan'^ shang ^ _q
eh'iiani h'ai fjf/ ^
eh'Han 2 pien, (*) ^ ^
ehuang l c^ia
ehuang * huaii
ohvang 1 «/<any
aJmang l i«oi*
ehuang 1 iw
ehuang^ tzQ
ch'uang l Ak
chiieh 3 cAiao l
chileh 2 i j»^ 3
eh'iieh 1 /^»
eh'iieh < taun i
cAttil shang
eh'ui^ tzS
chun^ chieni
ch'un 1 «7t'iK i
profits, makings II, 27
with the express intention, expressly for IV, 20
to make money or, a profit II, 19
to transmit the information to IV, 7
to transmit orders to IV, 5
to resell II, 19
bricks and tiles II, 10
to summon to a Court IV, 8
passage-money III, 20
shipping, boats IV, 3
to issue a Decree II, 39
the master of a ship IV, 6
passage-expenses III, 20
to summon and examine IV, 10
the master of a native vessel XV, 6
the side, or beam, of a vessel IV, 6
(of clothes) to put on ; to run or pass
something with a hole or opening,
over a stick, string, etc. Ill, 5, 10
a rudder IV, 6
gzechuen opium IV, 13
to roll up III, 17
to intervene between II, 32
a modification to meet the circumstances or
exigencies IV, 9
crops II, 10
to make pretence IV, 1
to injure by collision IV, 6
to load on or into IV, 7
to load or be loaded with IV, 7
to pretend II, 30
a post III, 16
a window I, 23
to break off an intimacy, or relations II, 25
exceptionally, pre-eminently IV, 18
class or sort of post IV, 11
to conform scrupulously, strictly, to IV, 5
to catch, catch up, recover (a runaway) II, 32
a hammer III, 9
shall meet II, 1
spring and autumn, (but eh'un^ ch'iu aa title
of the Classic) I, 27
sexual passion I, U
150 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HDA.
cVunilien.^ #^ New Tear sorolla 11,40
ch'unifien ^^ Springtime 11,16
ehilnlfanl ^M to pay equal shares or contributions IV, 9
ch'wi^ eh'dni SE the Ministry 11,39
chvnglchmS ^^ eventually 11,15
Chung 'L ch'iioJt 4*^ a medium or average post IV, 11
Chung ifani 4* fe t^^e midday meal II, 39
Chung l hou W jjl^ ^ honourable II, 24
Chung ijen ^\ an intermediary II, 1
Chung ijeni ^ iJ an onerouB post IV, 1
Chung 1 hue W ift ^ China, Chinese 1,17
I* Hi £ ^Ij ^^S^ or heavy interest II, 27
^ * ping * H ^ a severe illness II, 16
1 1 fang 4* ^ a Grand Secretary IV, 10
chungitii @ i^ to farm 11,11
Chung' yung* (sic) tp f^ useful, of use 1,31
oh'ung Ho M ^ *° ^^^^ ^ relapse I, 5
dt'ung 1 shurJi 4 5E 85[ S *° ''^ ""^ °*' *° ^^ °^ "'^ number IV, 2
««. 1 tien J^^ ^ kindness from a superior III, 13
erha ch'iehS j^ ^ moreover III,» 6
erh i laii Zl ^ ^° '^* second place IV, i
erhtto ^^ the ear 1,16
fa 1 AiTO 1 ^ fs *° ^^°<^ * l^***"" 1^1 7
/a 1 /«»« 1 S ■© *° ^^ •^^^''y II' 26
faljuanS ^ $^ to be tender or weak 111,16
failans ^^ cloisonn§ II, 7
/aiming 2 ^^ religious name (Buddhist) 1,31
falts'aii ^m to grow rich II, 2S
fa^tzU fi ■? a device, means 1,24
/«» 4 cA'ao 2 ^Q ^ *° become damp or mildewed III, 14
fan* ch'ien tS ^ money for food III, 6
fan^ ch'iiehW j^ ^ an arduous post II, 3
fanihuoi Wi'W. to be a dealer II, 2
fani in i\L ^ to become suspicious 11,29
fanijungi jJS 5E busy, much occupied IV, 5
fani shih &S ^ food, provisions IV, 17
fan^ ssii ^ n] a Provincial Treasurer IV, 15
/are 2 tsa ig SK much occupied, greatly engaged IV, 16
fan i wan i fS (^ a rice-bowl III, i
fang 2 c7i'are (3) ^ j^ house property II, n
fang 2 chHW M ^ * title-deed of a house II, n
GLOSSARY OF PHRASES.
151
fang 2 cliHen
fang 2 fan
fangifu
fang * hsiii 1
fang 4 Using 2
fang * niu 2
fang 1 pien
fang 2 «74 j/j l
fang 2 iarej l
/anjf 1 tiS
fangi tzu
fang i yang 2
/ei * hsin l
/enl c7afll
/(!» 1 /a
/eK 1 fu
/(S»4 liang
fen 1 ^ieA
/e» 3 tzu
fing * eh'eng
feng * cAi7t 3
/raj i cliih 4
/e«^ 1 cMng (3)
feng^ lio^
fenq '• Amo 1
/^»y4 ;i'fe3
fing * J«o» 1'
/cn^ 4 «iaK 3
/^«y * ming *
/eny 1 iJ^«y
fing 1 s/iO» l
/^nj * sung i
/Sjjj 1 t'u
fing i wei 3
fing 1 TOcn 2
/^ny 1 yini
fing i yin 2
fu 2 c/t'i
/« 2 chien
©It
gf
iff
m
un
house-rent II, 1
to provide, take preoautionB IV, 10
for example, supposing, as if II, 1
to be at ease about, make one's miad easy I, 19
to release IV, 7
to tend cattle II, 11
convenient I, H
an assistant examiner IV, 12
the landlord of a house II, 1
■a prescription II, 25
a house II, 10
to tend sheep II, 11
thank you for your trouble I, 32
a useless or worthless thing III, 10
to set up a separate establishment II, 11
mode of dividing II, 11
to instruct, order II, 19
to give a share to II, 27
weight III, 19
to distinguish, a distinction I, 12
powder III, S
to flatter IV, 18
to receive a Decree IV, 5
to have the honour to acquaint IV, 4
the scene I, 21
(of rivers) to freeze up II, 23
to tender for articles at a pawnbroker's II, 20
to beg, entreat IV, 13
officially appointed II, 12
expiry of an official appoiutment II, 6
to be honoured by orders IV, 20
reputation, rumours II, 16
an abundant harvest II, 11
to take the liberty to send or present III, 18
manners and customs IV, 4
to be deputed IV, 16
to hear reports of IV, i
to close (for the New Year) II, 4
salary II, 39
prosperity I, 2
province of Fuhkien II, 21
152
THE GUIDE TO KtJAN HUA.
/a 4 ch'in
fui chHng^
/«* hueiW
fu * pang 3
fv, 2 pH 1
fu 3 shang (4)
/m2 «A«7*
/k 2 sAi7t i
fu 3 t'ai
/m1 tzH
fui yil
fu 3 yuarh 2
Aai 3 cli'uan 2
/iffii 4 7tsm 1
AajS 7iiMa»
7jai * ^'a 4
7ta'i 2 fei2
7i.aj 3 loei (4)
AaM2 (■7ji7j4
han 2 /« 2
Aan 2 7tit
^an 4 iare 3
hem 4 <'aj'7j 4
hang 2 cAa» 4
AflMj 2 ch'ing
Jiang 2 cA?t (3)
7iaM,v 2 Aho
Aao3 eh'u
liao 3 liaorh ^ (sio)
AfloS A'on4
7tao 3 sAi7i *
Aao2 (7k)m(3)
7iao3 jAboI
Aao 2 «iii 3
hao 2 tai 3
Aao2 ia?'7i(3)
Aao3 t«aj*
m±.
C3
^13
mis:
fr Til
a father H, 17
to pay over in full IV, 7
(polite) a wife I, 10
wealthy II, 23
a Proxime Aooessit IV, 15
auspicious influence IV, 3
your residence I, 1
to wait, attend, upon III, 5
the Test Examinations IV, 12
the Governor of a province IT, 5
bran III, 16
to remain over and above, surplus IV, 10
^ to look oneself again I, 5
a seagoing ship II, 29
bashful, modest I, H
the Maritime Customs IV, 7
to be frightened II, 16
a child I, 33
marine delicacies HI, 19
rarely seen, exceptional IV, 18
to inform^by note IV, 7
to reply by note IV, 7
indistinct, I, 15, scamped II, 10
by land II, 28
a sunshade, umbrella III, 17
5E a shirt III, 5
house of business, mercantile house IV, 7
market-rates II, 2
head of a firm IV, 8
technical terms, " shop " II, 40
market-rates II, 2
advantages, good points, merits I, 27
^ properly, thoroughly I, 5
(also hao 3 h'an), goodlooking, beautiful I, 21
a good, charitable, or philanthropic, act II, 29
a good hand at III, 6
thank you for saying so ! I, 9
a peaceful or honourable death II, 16
(also 7iBo2 tai(8)), good and evil I, 29
^ a mortal illness III, 13
it is a good thing that — II, 39
GLOSSARY OF PHRASES.
153
Tiao i tzS
Jiei 1 Jisia
Jteis toui (sic)
lio 1 dim 3
7jo 1 chou 1
7*0 2 chung 0)
ho 'i fang "^
lu> 2 /jao 3
/to 2 7(;Jt
7jo4 7h/3
7i(7 4 liu
7i0 2 i3
7to2 i(3)
7W)2 OT?6
7m)2 nara
7jo 2 ^flo
7to 2 ^i 4
7jo 2 ^'in(7
7*0 2 ^0 2
740 2 jAa«^
Ao2 gkang
Jio 2 s7ii7i *
7to2 t'ung
Jio 2 tzH
hou i clh'eng 2
houi Jisiian*
Jwui 7ffii(2)
/tOM* mien
Jiou* nien
hou i pu (3)
hou^ t'ou
hou* yen*
7tsi^ ch'eng
lisi 2 oh'i
hsi* /mni
74si3 huan
hsi i h'an (A)
21
m^
mm
mm
mm
nm
mm
w.f.
mm
mn-
^'^.
nta
M^
mm
MM
^^
m^
mm
m^
^±
^^
Jtn. "J
MM
a rat
nightfall
black colour, blacking
black pulse
to drink tea
to drink wine
to eat gruel or porridge
a spirit of fairness
what objection is there to —
friendly relations
a formal reconciliation
to congratulate
to exclaim at, shout out at
suitable
how, in what manner
how, of what sort
what is the use of —
amity, friendly relations
province of Honan
a pouch, purse
what need is there to (also 7io 2 j
kind
a Harbour or River Inspector
a Buddhist priest
to fit on
suitable, suited to
an agreement
a small box
to wait while you mount
to be an Expectant
afterwards
behind, at the back
the year before last
to be an Expectant
behind
to await inspection
the Western city in Peking
a habit, way, characteristic
careful
to like, be fond of
to closely examipe
I,
,43
II;
,13
in,
,15
III,
16
II,
4
I,
18
III,
7
IV,
1
IV,
1
IV,
1
11.
19
IV,
2
II,
39
II,
24
IV,
5
IV,
9
I,
42
II,
11
I,
1
III,
5
III,
18
II,
24
IV,
6
I,
31
III,
10
II,
2
II,
10
II,
7
IV,
2
II,
9
II,
6
IV,
6
IV,
16
II.
3
I,
22
IV,
7
II,
10
III,
19
I,
30
I,
20
I,
12
154 THE GUIDE TO KUAH HOA.
lisi^la WiM, pewter HI, 2
hsi'^lani ^ TO in pieces, to pieces 1,43
7isi2 lienS '&gM to wash the face 11,29
hsi'i- pei^ ® "tti north-west 11,31
Jisi'^ pierh ®^^ the western side III, 1
lisi'i- shan^ S Uj the Western Hills III, 8
hsii t'ai^ Je^ S a theatrical stage 111,11
ItH^tsao^ Sb i^ to wash III, 8
/(sil i'M2 ^M to aim at, with a view to IV, 9
7m 4 tzu 8il "? '^'i actor III, 11
Jisia * cltun ~^ ^ mean, base, wretched I, 34
hsia 4 chHen i ~p ^ a debit balance, balance unpaid IV, 7
lisiai clif'ii T* ^ to go down 11, 19
Tisiai cli'uani T* ^S to disembark 11,21
hsiai huai^ ~P @ the feelings, sentiments IV, 16
hHa* hvi ~F HI next time 11,26
hsiai Using ^ PjH ^ to startle out of sleep 11,25
7ma4 Zo T* ^ a place to go to, or be found at 11,32
Jisial- mi ^/^ dried shrimps 111,19
hsiai j}"-"^ T* ^ to deposit security 11,13
hsia^ shan'^ HF LU to go down the hill 1,31
lisiai sliang ~p Jt to put down into [or] on III, 10
Jiiiai sliengi ~F |?!] the remainder II, ,
ksia^ shihi BS B$ leisure IV, 18
Jisiaifai W T& to sleep, pass the night, at IV, 17
Jtsiai t'ien S^ summer 11,12
hsial tsou^ P§ ^ to go blundering along 11,29
lisial ua BS "jF a blind man 111,15
7mffi2 tsU IE ? a small case or box III, is
hsiaitz'S T* ?JC next time IV, 12
lisiai yui P BK remaining over, surplus H, 1
hsia i yii^ ~F HI^ to rai" I, 23
lisia* yileliW ~f* ^ next month IX, 9
Iisiangi c?i'i(V ^^ chess 11,40
lisiang i cli'ien^ I"! H!| to get on, come to the front T 34
hsiang 1 cA'm ^j! ^ a fellow-countryman II, 31
hsiangifang ^^ the side buildings of a house m, 9
hsiang'^ fu^ if ^ to correspond, tally, to .IV 8
hsiang 1 Aao 3 ;ji3 |yf' on good terms, friendly I 3
hsiang 2 hsi ^ j^ in detail, fully IV 4
hsiang 1 /wia ^ "f* the country JH 13
atOSSART OF PHRASES. 155
iihsini ^ fg confidence, good faith IV, 18
hsiangl Jiuii t9 s to meet IV, 1
ksiang l Itan l j^ -p to concern, aflfect II) S
hsiang i hung ff^ ^ a boy actor III, 11
Imangilai^ |p] 5K hitherto II, 2
lisiang 3 Viang W B|^ I^ resonant, clear I, 15
hsiang 2 ^ao 4 p^ ^ to report to a Superior IV, 6
lisiang 1 j/ia«y ^ Jt; *■» put on a border III, 1^
lisiang 'i- skill i ®^ the provincial examinations IV, 12
lisiang * sliili 4 f^J ^ the right or proper thing II, *
lisiang l i'a« ^|{ =|^ local dialect I, 17
hsiang l iajij l ^g '^ suited to, suitable II, 24
hsiang 1 4e 2 ;J;g ;j^ to take a liking to, congenial II, 25
fejanj 1 <ZM ® "J* a box, case Ii *
hsiang i yangrhl' |pj |^ ]S towards the light III, 1
hsiao^ ch'erh<X> '(I'* D^ ^ "extras," small dishes not in the menu III, 11
hsiao^ c7i'u(S') ^J"* J&i mean, grasping 11,27
lisiao 3 hao 4 d'* 5^ my Firm I, 3
Jisiao 3 hsin /j^ itjk careful IHi 9
hsiao^ huai ^ ^ (also hsiieki huai ), to learn to speak a
language IV, 20
lisiao i huarh ^ ^ J^ a joke, good story II| 33
lisiao* lao^ i^ ^ to be of [or] do a, service to one 1,40
lisiao 1 i'JMj ^ ^ (of work), slack easy IV, 14
hsieli^ chiiau*: j^ ^ to take one's wife with one IV, 11
hsiehifaZ UC S to rest oneself II> 38
lisieh^-^ farli ^ ^^ J^ mode of writing III, 12
hsieli i ho ^ ^P to reward (as for recovery of a lost article) II, 6
hsieh 3 lisin * ^ f^ to write a letter IV, 6
hsieh I Usui ^M a little, some slight — IV, 1
hsiehi lov, ^ ^ to divulge, let out I, 16
Jisiehipui Wi '^ to return (your) call I, *
hsieh 3 tea 4 ^ ^ to write I, 30
hsieni cli'eng 3 ^ ^ in hand, in store, available H, 22
lisienl ch'i-i- ^M beforehand IV, 4
hsienicJi'iW RS SU a limit of time, fixed period 11,22
Jisieni ch'ieni Jg ^ cash II. 10
hsien^ chih^ 1^^ a distinguished appointment IV, 2
hsienlfu* ^^ my late father IV, 15
/msM 1 >M(7 2 3fc ^ *° *"''"g« t^^ preliminaries for an interview IV, 16
hsien 2 h'mgrh i ^f ^ Hi ^P*''^ ^'""^ ^' ^^
/wien i mu (« ^ '^ to admire !> 19
156
THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA.
Jisien 2 p'i (2)
lisien'i- sMng
listen 3 sliili *
hsien i shiJt 2
7i,sien * shu 3
Jisien 2 i'a»2
Jisien^ tsai
lisieni tsaii
Jisien 2 (s'oj *
Jtstn 1 c/ti« (^)
Astre 1 farJk 3
Jisini- Jbsi^
Jixin'i-Jeiii
Jishii^ Ji'ail
Jisin 4 Jt'ov,^
Jisin 1 7i'a
/wirel ling^
Jisin 1 sJiourJi 3
7isf ft 1 «!era 2
/uinj 2 c/ij
7tsw(7 2 e7i'« (3)
Jisinff 3 eJbung i
Amj' 3 Aij 3
/tsifty 2 i 1
7js«aj * J'««i
Jising^ U
Jising^ paii
Jising He"
Jisingi tso-aS
Jising i tzU
Jising 2 wen 2
Jbsiu 1 fei i
Jisiu 1 se 4
7tsi« 1 sJiili
Jisiu* ts'ai
hsiuT- ts'an
Jisiii i tzu
Jisiung'^ lieng
Jisiung i sJtou
liiiung 1 ti
mm
mm
mn
if5£
^nm
mm-
m^
if?
ifM
f 15
ft $
mm
«^
ft?
unabashed
1,37
Sir (to non-officials)
I, 2
things that do not concern one
1,43
at the present time
a District Magistracy
11,13
IV, 8
to chat, tails:
at leisure
now
11,31
II, 9
1,40
salted vegetables
lately
III, 4
II, 3
£3 annoyances, vexations
a Happy New Year
1,39
II, 4
one's new post
II, 3
newly opened II, 2
(to speak) recklessly, without restraint IV, 5
to put one to trouble
II, H
to decline with thanks
IV, 2
^ a new hand
III, 20
news
IV, 3
etiquette, formality
time of starting
IV; 14
II, 5
an Alarum
11,14
Law Secretary (in a Yamcn)
to practise medicine
IV, 15
II, 2
lucidly
baggage
rise and fall, growth and decline
to be fortunate enough to
11,28
I, i
1,29
IV, 1
to do duty, be employed at, II, I :
temper
to proceedIV, 6
I, 42
to send a despatch
IV, 5
expense of repairs
(of circumstances), straitened
IV, 6
11,22
to put in order, prepare
a Licentiate
11,38
11,40
confused, abashed
11,33
a sleeve
III, 4
desperate, truculent
11,26
a homicide, murderer
11,22
a younger brother ; used to one
generation=I.
of same
II, U
GLOSSARY OF PHRASES.
157
hsiung i t'ai
Jtsii 2 cMu s
Jisii 1 vdng 2
hsii * sJiang
hsii 1 ia 4
hsiian 4 shang
hsiieJi. 2 cJi'ien 3
Juiielt 2 /flM^
/tsiie/j 2 7tsi 2
Jisiieltl tzu
lisiielhi wen
Usiieli 2 ye/t 4
lisiln^ chien
hsiin 4 eftwi l
51^
CI
2/M
hsiin ^ i*
lisiin^ kuan
Asiin 4 ?»i»j' 2
Am* c/iaso
/mi hsiangT-
Im 1 jam 2
7jM2^ei(S)
Au2 shang
hu 2 sAmo 1
Ak 4 sung
Ai*l <om3
7tM 2 t'ung
hu 4 joei
to 2 yen 2
toa2 cAie/i
/iKul ch'ien^
hua 2 ch'iian 2
tea 2 2a
^Mfl 1 ^'in^ 2
P«1
mil
toai* sAJ^4
fe«a»2 ehiarhi
^
mm
mm
figs
mm
f^ 1%
3'ou Sir, (used to an equal of the same
generation)
II, 3
a long time
IV, 5
an undeserved reputation
IV, 16
to replenish, fill up again
III, 2
my age is —
I, 2
to select for a vacancy
II, 9
to allot, assign, to a post
IV, 15
a Literary Chancellorship
IV, 2
scanty learning
IV, 15
a school
1,28
to practise, learn
IV, i
boots
III, G
learning, studies
1,30
stock of learning, scholarship
IV, 16
a sub-district Deputy Magistrate
11,32
to recover a debt after formal exam, of
debtor
IV, 10
a Governor of a province
IV, 5
the City Police of Peking
IV, 13
Police ofScials
II, 6
to examine, interrogate
IV, 8
a Passport
IV, 6
mutually
IV, 18
suddenly
1,23
province of Hupei
IV, 18
to paste on
III, n
to talk nonsense
III, 15
to escort
IV, 3
measures of capacity
11,12
(sometimes A«2 t'ungrh*) a side street
II, 1
the Imperial Body guard
11,39
wild, reckless, language
IV, 5
packing straw
III, 17
to spend money
11,17
to play morra
11,39
to brush or sweep away
III, 14
a flower-vase
III, 7
a Chinese merchant
IV, 8
something to say
11, 9
to do harm, to mar
1,16
to offer a price
III, 19
158
THE GCIBH TO KUAN HUA.
Thuan^ Jiei
huan i nang
liuang 2 Tma
huang 2 sliang
huang^ su
Imang i tang
Ifuayig^ fang
liuang ^ ti^
Imang ^ tzv,
Jiuang^ yv,^
Jmi^ clii'i
liui 2 cilia 1
liuii ch'ien^
liwi^ cli'ii
liui 2 fu
Imi^ ksinW
huii lisilni
liui^ hai^
Tiuii Ituan'i
hui^ lai
Tiuii mieni
hui^ ming^
Imi^ paii
liuii pani
Imi 2 ping (3)
Jiui i skill i ,
hiii^ shou^
liuii slioui
liui^ ta
liui^ t'ou^
liui^ tung 2
laii 3 tzu (sio)
liui^ win^
hun 2 sMn 0-)
hung^ ch'a^
Jmng^ c/t'i^
mm
b1 m
m±
mm
mm
mm
^^
mm
mm
HIS
Mm.
mim
MM
mm
mm
mm
MM
# "if
MM
#■ iRl
urn
to repay in full IV, 7
to give back to II, 22
emoluments, private fortune II, 22
(of clothes, etc.) to change, put on other — III, 18
an exorbitant price HI, 19
yellow wine 111,11
vague IIj 16
cucumber III, 1
the Emperor I, 33
dispersed, dissipated IV, 16
to jolt, shake III, 17
reckless, wild II, 33
the Bmperor IV, 3
a shopsign II, 29
butter III, 3
to return to one's native place IV, 15
to go home I, 35
to club together a sum of money IV, 17
to go back II, 2
to give an answer to II, 17
a letter in reply II, 16
joint investigation IV, 6
to reform II, 16
a Guildhouse, a club II, 17
to come back I, 21
to meet one another IV, H
to give a message to IV, 5
to return a visit IV, 1
joint management or control IV, 18
(of servants) If you please. Sir II, 4
the Metropolitan Examinations II, 5
(a blow, etc.) In return II, 36
the President of a club IV, 17
to reply II, 35
in a minute, and then — II, It
conjointly IV, 6
a while II, 11
an ofEcial reply, a despatch in reply IV, 8
all over one's body I, 5
black tea III, 2
a Stamped Title Deed II, 8
GLOSSARY OF PHRASES. 159
^ J0 ^^'^ '''°^' °^*'^* m> 7
A«n§' 3 ^'ie» (4) nj^ Kg to swindle H^ 26
hung^l/iini ^ 5M good fortuae 11,20
huoich'S^ "© !ft a wagon 17,13
Jiuo3 cJd T^Wt (vulg. Aw.o 3 c/t'i), a shopman, assistant 1,13
7j»o 2 ^ffl j/^ ipj a torch H, 27
7jw.o 3 ^aii (<) 7^ SS on joint account, jointly " 11,27
huoipaol S 'Si a bale ■ IV, 8
huo^ parlii ^ f^ K3 a fellow- workman III, 9
JiuoS p'en^ ^t ^ a chafing-dish III, 2
huo^t'ung ^ [^ to conspire 11,26
7wo4K)M(i) !K ^ goods II, 2
Jmo^yin^ 'W §% money for goods supplied IV, 10
i4(.7t'i2 ~* ^ all together IV, 17
i(4) e7i.'«e/5 4.3 — ' M altogether IV, 15
i^ chihi SJ.WI the result being IV, 6
iS ching Q M already I, 2
i'i ch'iiehm »8 ^ a vacancy caused by promotion 11,24
il c7mn3 — ■ 2p for certain IV, 4
it chuiig S 4* _>° one's thoughts, in the mind's eye II, 24
il/M ^M clothing I, 4
iiJwui iil f^ afterwards I, 8
i i hm (i) ^ Wi favourably mentioned bv the Board of Civil
Office IV, 15
i^ Jtuo ^^ to doubt, suspect 11,29
i^ ^aii ~" lis entirely, altogether 11,27
i^ Ji'uairJii — ^ J^ together I, H
iilaiH — ?{S in the first place IV, 4
i 1 Hang 3 """ PS one or two II, 1
i^ la* "* ^ uniformly, equally IV, 9
i* lunW ^ ira to criticise, discuss 11,11
n slung ife ^ ' clothes 11,30
il sMhi fiS R heartily IV, 1
j* sJiiA^ — ■ H^ at once, all at once] II, 1
il sA»(*) BW (of doctors') methods of treatment III, 7
i* ssu ^ iW> meaning, intention 11,10
i^ sungrhi — * 3^ ^ the single journey III, 6
il teflC*) B *a system of medicine II [, 7
iWt'lerhi "~ Hj ^ a little, somewhat I, 7
i^tingi ~~' ^, certainly 1,11
i^tingi ^ A& to settle definitively IV, 7
i i tsai (*) ^l ^ wi*** tliB intention of, 'to mean to — IV, 6
160 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA.
i i tsao 3 -^ ■?* very early IV, 7
iifung^ ^^ IrI together 1,14
i'ittu B^ ^p soap III, 3
i^txu ^-f" a chaii- II, 31
i4 niaii t^^ ^\> unforeseen, unexpected IV, 5
i 1 yao * ^ ^ treatment and medicines III, 7
i^ yehi ^^ to prosecute one's studies IV, 16
jan^ erh(i) ^ jfB but yet, still, nevertheless IV, 9
jan 2 ktm i ^ f^ afterwards II, 12
jao2 s7jm ^ ^ to overlook, pardon III, 4,
jH nao ^ ^ lively, bustling II, 35
jinichangi tS l|M to confess, acknowledge a charge 111,15
jen^ chen'^ g^ fi zealous 1,36
jen^ ohia ^ ^ people, others I, 34
jin 2 ch'ing (2) A ^ popular character IV, i
jen 2 lising J\^ J!^ disposition II, 25
jen^ hsing^ /v "fl human nature 11,26
jcn't i^ 13^^ at will, at discretion IV, 9
Jen 2 nwra 2 ^^ ^ *^8 populace, population IV, 5
jeni p'ei^ fiS la to acknowledge a liability to pay IV, 6
jSni sMJi lil nil to recognise IV, 20
jeni soi 13& W place of appointment IV 15
jen.2 lou A^ (also Je»2 t()M4 ), manldnd, man 1,29
jengi chiuW JH ^^ as before, once more IV g
jihicUi H IB a diary 11,38
jih 4 di'i 2 Q ^ a date ly j g
jihi chHeni gy on a former day [or] occasion iv 2
jilii lioui Q ^ in the future jy 5
jihilisinT- H ^ ever fresh ly ]^g
jj7t * fetZ H ■?• a day I 7
joi hsUB S ft a good many, a good deal IV, 13
joiJiani ^ "r so much, a certain amount ly, 9
jui chin ^ "t* at present I 13
>2 7jo2 ;^ % how III 29
iw2;«0(3) ijlll:^ if iy| 8
jui slmW i\^WL in full t/ ,
juifaoi w St a mattress-cover HI 17
JM < *«« w ■? a mattress HI g
juitx'ui ^ jH; thus 11' 5
juani p'ieni ^ )r soft stuff things III 17
Jkm^ 2 hsia 2 MS ?ia ' considerateness, consideration iv, 18
GLOSSARY OF PHRASES.
161
jnng 2 hsing 2
jwiij 2 i
jiiiig^ jdii
janff 2 ying 1
f/'a^ la
7iai.3 hio*
kai* sliang
Itai 1 tang 1
Itai^ t'iett (l)
kuit- clfvan^
It'll i 1 fa
li'a i\ fati^
It'll ),\ hiii*
kai ^ k'ai
li'ai I shihi
i'ajl iteiS
If id 1 (s'flft 1
Itai 1 yjre i
lian^ chi
Itan 1 ck'i
kaii'i- chieh^
han 3 chin^
hail. 1 chltig
lian^ ch'iiig
Itaii^ ch'ing^
kail 3 hsieh*
hani lierf*
han 1 su
Jtan^_taii
JiaiiS tang 1
hail 3 tao (4)
7<izn 1 tzU
hnn^ tzU
h'ani chien
Uati 3 iliierh 1
k'aiiS k'ai
h'aib i viing 2
Wan* p'o^
hang 1 <»'ai 2
22
^•!^
jm. ' -
fig If
tifj 7K
ti- m
mm
m a
mm
mm
mm
your departure
easy
your post
your incumbency (of a post)
5|* !i corner
Kussian cloth
on another day
to refiirm
to cover over
ought, should
another day
to set sail
to disburse, pay out
to serve dinner
(of clubs, societies) to open, meet
to open
to b^gin business
boiling water
to denounce specifically
to open an office after Sew Year
to be grateful
an atiack of spleen
a voluntary Hond
at once, without loss of time
clean
really ! actually ! sure enough !
gratitude
grateful
competent, skilled
province of Kansu
sentiment of gratitude
to venture to accept (a compliment, etc.)
(of time) by, by the time that —
a pole, rod
I daresay —
to f-ee
13 a waistcoat
to hack or split open
to find by inspection
to see through, discover
just, just now
IV
4
I
1!)
I!
5
IV
2
III
9
IV
8
IV
7
I[
25
iir
10
n
11
11
2
11
30
11
10
in
4
IV
17
II
29
II
9
111
2
IV
5
11
4
I
40
I!
17
IV
9
II
12
II
JIO
ir
U
IV
7
IV
7
II
38
11
29
IV
16
IV
1
I
23
ir
12
III
1
I
25
III
5
If
23
IV
8
I
11
I
38
162 THE GUIDE TO KUAN HTJA.
h'ang 1 eliien
M@
robust
I, 2
Jinni/ 1 taii
n m
robust
IV, 3
lian i fhin i
^ fs
to apply for leave
IV, 11
hao i chih 1
a:su
to acquaint, inform of
IV, i
haul chungi
i^ 1'
(your) success at the examination
IV, 12
Jiao^ hsingi
^n
enjoyable
I, It
Jianl Hang
W^
millet
111,16
hao * ping 4
^i^
to apply for sick-leave
11,24
Ziaol i/to!j*
i^S
your age (to elderly or old persons)
I, 2
Jao* sung
Bm
(commonly also hao' su) to inform, to tell
1,42
Ttao iz'u
Bm
to take one's leave
IV, 2
Jt'ao 3 shang
s-±
to pass (an examination)
11,24
Tt'ao 3 ta (3)
^rr
to apply corporal punishment
11,38
Aenl ch'ien
SBbS
in the family of, a child of
1,38
Unljin^
SB \
a personal attendant
11,21
Mn 1 /««« 1
Ksir
to be a private servant of an official
11,17
Tim. 1 t'dM (sic)
^/J4
a tumble
1,45
7i'c?l 3 cVlu '2)
1^.^
to entreat, beg
1,19
Aewj'S c/tjA
Wi'M.
unyielding, stiff
1,42
Ito 2 c/j JA 2
^m
to cashier
11,22
7w4c/t'«W
^m
each place, everywhere
I, 17
io2 c/jm2
^^
a standard, prescribed method or form
IV, 1
A()2 Asia
felT
Sir
1,19
^0 4 Je«
# A
(also ho'jiii), each one, oneself
1,35
/l!»l /iO
^ffj
an elder brother
11,17
An* i«o2
#li!
all countries, all the Powers
IV, 5
7*0 2 */ifl;/8
tSM
a screen
1,16
i('4 n/iengS
^*'
all the provinces
IV, 5
ho 1 ?«u
^,1^
a pigeon
11,32
Ao2?jfi
m^f-
a shelf, partition
III, 2
7io4tofi4
#9
by (jneself
IV, 17
k'oi ch'H
pTE
irritating, aggravating
11.26
It'o 2 c/j'jffo 3
ITJ^
by pure chance, as it happened
IT, 21
h'o 3 p7( JeM 4
Pi a
apparent, obvious
IV, 6
Ti'o 1 /an^
f-4^-
the Board Office (in a provincial Yamen)
IV, 5, the General Office (Peking)
IV, 13
A'ol/f»
f^5>
the year of taking a Degree
II, 5
A;'«3 7(en4
pTM
detestable, to detest
11,27
*'o3 /imi
pj'lf
pitiful, a pity
1,31
A'» 2 h.siang 3
Pim
to long for
I, i
*'o 3 Asjao 4
pi^
amusing
1,44
7«'o3 7iiiB4
RTfi
trustworthy, credible
IV, 6
GLOSSARY OF PHRASKS.
163
i'oS i(.3)
nrjKl
can, may, will
1, 8
Ji'oijeni^)
^K
a sti-auger, visitor
II, 19
J'fl 1 m ing 2
mr,
literary reputation, honours
IV, 12
k'o 3 im
nlH
to be feared or apprehended
ir, 1
hoi po
mm
to be hard upon
1,42
h'o^ skill i
[tj;^
but, now
I, 7
k'o - so
mm
a cough
I, 7
k'o I ta
^n
to l<nock out, clean by knocking
III. 10
k'oi Hen*:
'^m
an inn
IT, 31
¥oi ring I
^m
a drawing-room, reception-room
II, 9
k'o 1 t'ou 2
^M
to kotow
IV, 2
ft'oS wui
piM
detestable, hateful
11,26
kov, i sung 4
mm
to take legal action
IV, 19
kou 1 yerh 3
^8^]^
the mouth of a drain
III, 16
Won i fa
iu&
mode of deducting
III, 20
h'ou^ hsia
fflT
to deduct, subtract
II, 6
li'ou i liu -
ftl^
to detain
IV, 7
li'ou^ moi
urn
muBhrooma from beyond the Great Wall
III, 19
k'oui tzu
p^
an arch, tunnel
III, 6
li'ou^ wei
PI*
taste
III, 11
h'ouiymiV)
p^
accent, pronunciation
IV, 18
kuS chi
i^m
historical objects, antiquities
IV, 3
Itui chiao^
m^
a longstanding friendship
IV, 1
iuiH
WlU
second-hand clothes
11,37
hi 3 jen
^K
the ancients
II, 27
hu 1 niang
mm
a girl
I, 3S
Jiu* tingi
te s
to hire, engage deiinitively
IV, 7
hu 1 tung 1
PS"!
noise of a heavy fall
11,25
lui tz'ui
iS^jtb
for that reason
I. 3
hui wan 2
*gt
antiques, curios
II, 17
Ji'u 3.2/a
^•/£
degree of wretchedness
II, 23
k'u3 Hi
^il
a coolie
III, 9
k'ul lung
mm
a hole
11,30
h'u 3 tzU
^-f-
a misfortune, hardship
II, 3i
I'uiUU
m=f
trousers
III, S
kuai cA'i/j3
mm
(worth) mention
IV, 1
!iua 1 feng 1
IH
to blow
II, 2i
ktiai hsin'^
S»'l!>
kind regards, consideration
IV, -2
kuai mieni
#^
strips of dough
III, 19
kuai tzU
#^
a coat
III, 5
hia 1 tziirh 3
IR^a
melon-seeds
i,il
164 thjb; guide to kuan hua.
k'ua 1 Uou 3 ^ [] to boast
huai 3 iiarh 1 ^^ ^- 1^ a corner, round the corner
k'uai^ tzu ijigj -^ chopsticks
hiiun 1 f/t'ai 1 'g* ^ an official dutj- or mission
kaan^ change ^ ll!M to keep the accounts
Jmari'i chaot.i) |i|] B^ kind attention
/ivan 1 lisi ^^] fJjC to relate to, affect
&iian 1 /iwa 'g' §35 the " Mandarin " dialect
kuan 1 /i'flB* |M ^ to view, gaze at, stare at
Ituaiil maarh-t '^' |||| IB official servants' hats
kuan 1 mi»2 'g* f^ officials and private persons
kuan'i- ming" 'g' ^ official name (cognomen)
kvaiii pao '3) ^ |M no doubt (also pronounced Imam^ mo)
livaiiS sAili* ^ ^ to act as steward
Imaii'^ gsu. '[J* -gj legal pmceedings
7i«j« 1 it 4 I^ ^ t'lP Gf'"' of ^V'""
liudu 1 fSHj'/i i 'jj- 4i IB a Box at a tlieatre
Jiuaaitzn M "f" " ^'^''
li'uani s/iv, *^ 'kL to forgive, pardon
kuaiigl clung jy. ^ circumstances, probably
Jiuungljuii ^ «j lustrous
kuangi- kui ;}t ffi the honour of your visit
kiiaitg'i lin'i jy. hjj your visit
kuaugi miaoi s^j: lAj to visit a temple
kuang^ tuiig 1^ ji" province of Kuangtung
7i'uaiigi ch'ieA^ JU ri moreover
k'wing'^ p'ieu* =K i^ to defraud
/j ici * f/j'w ■' -g!- ttg your native place
/cf/es I chu ±H ig rules, customary modes
huei^hangi "Mf •{t your Finn
Awt'i 4 Asia Hfe ~I7 to kneel down
Jtiieli hsing i "B" 4't your surname
Jmei'i- hntin Wl 'M. to repay, reimburse
hii-i •* Jiin i -Ul^ ^ your business, your object
kuei * Mug l -^ iff your age
/iiiei* kiial^) "^ ^ your oount-y, Government
kuH 1 j!/^« S M ■^ *" '^^^^ ^ capital sum
k i,-i 1 iftan^ M -h *° '""' "^' '^''''*''
Jmei *tzU M. '^ * cupboard, press
huHiyangi M' ^ your illness
/iKeJ 4 jtt 4 # ^ yo"'" lodging
n,
39
1,
28
in,
i
n.
IS
n,
30
I.
7
IV,
3
1,
17
IV,
5
III,
6
IV,
5
I,
3
n,
16
II,
U
11,
12
IV,
17
III,
11
III,
2
III,
15
111,
U
I,
12
IV,
2
IV,
7
111,
5
II,
2
11,
6
11,
26
I,
1
I,
30
II,
14
11,
35
I,
1
IV,
10
11,
2
IV,
2
IV,
1
IV,
19
11,
23
III,
2
I,
, 7
IV,
, 18
GLOSSARY OF PHKASKS. 165
k'veil li'uiig ^^ a deficit 11,23
It'iientvan'i !^ M a deficit 11,22
luiiitxa IS -T" a stick 11,25
k'uiti chung ^ I'l' (youi) brothers I, 1
li-iinS shang IB Jl to roll up 111,9
kttiig'i- ch-eiig X. ItI buildiag, construction II, !0
huiigT^ ch'ien JL «» wages 11,10
tichih^ i^m to serve, fulfil duties IV, 16
Mng'^ ehing ^^ WL respect, deference IV, 1
hii!ig4 ch'iil V% in to state in evidence IV, 8
kuiiglchiiS J-^ ^ to publicly elect IV, 16
liHiigifa ZL X time, leisure II, 4
kuiu/l houi ^ f^ to await IV, 18
fiuiigi hsi^ ?1S -fef your position, status I, 3
kuiigijeit* fft Bicft to admit in eviiience IV, 9
hung 1 kuan, s /« IH a resi'lence, (in Peking a Legation) II, 7
hung 1 ming "W <l a title, decoration II, 37
Imrtyi p-ing J^\ ""r impartial IV, 1
kuiig'^ shihW J-\ ^ puMic business 1,35
hung I shih \^ ^ an Official Writership II, 24
kungishuoi V» n>u to stale in evidence IV, 6
ku/igisuS ii W a public office IV, 8
kuiigltao J-^ 5S fair, just 11,11
kiingiUvngi r^t $)S in all, the total 11,18
kuiigl t'uiig''^ (i^ l"l iiublii'ly and together IV, 8
kuiigl wui J-\ ijj ofiii.'iai bnsiiiesB IV, 1!0
kuiiy'i^ yiiii^ JX 5C just, equitable IV, 9
k-viigi ckuil ^ i£i to sue for IV, 10
kungikao'i S ^ to bring a charge against IV, 10
/i'/(«V 3 p-a J2J; tl3 to fear that, expect that JI, 29
k'uo^ckeugi ^ ^Jf politi(8, statesmanship IV, 3
kuiii fhia ^ '35« the State, the Imperial House 11,22
km* chiangW a^ =^ to be loo fluttering II, 5
kiicii oh'ieu^ 3^^ transfer foi] P^S'^'i'S °f '"""ey 11,27
knoi rhii ij'^ ic to go over or across I, 4
kuo^juiii ^if.^ aolually, in the event 11,22
kiuii lai jiri JK to come over or across I, 4
kito^lu^ iili IfS to pass en route 11,15
kiioinien^ M ^\^ the New Year If, 13
kuui ghui M^ a Royal Letter, a Letter of Credence IV, 1
kuoit'angi j^ ^ to hold a sitting of Court 11,19
166
THE QDIDB TO KUAN HHA.
kuo^ tzSi
kuoi yii
la 4 teiiy 1
/aj2 hid"
la i * lien 3
lai 2 wang (3)
Ian" 7»wo4
lan^ kun'i
Ian i larli 1 (sic)
Ian- lii
Ian 3 tai
liro" cilia *
lao 3 hsimig I
lao 3 7i)M?ij
/ffo 3 ping
lao 3 s/ii/i 1
lao 2 «/iOM 3
too 2 ii 4
toa3 iwni/
too 3 t:u
lao 4 isii
Zao 8 yell
lei lingi
leii cJiui
lei* hsini
lei* li'in
lei^ ssH
li^ cMen
Hi ch'ien
Ui hai
It 4 hsi
lii kuiW
Hi ¥oi
lii lien
lii lo
li^ mao(i)
li i tai i
li 3 tang^
li 3 t'ov,
li 3 tzU
US mu
mm
mm
mm
an
■'%
5V
Mm-
mm
m m
mm
m i<
±m
mm
mm
mm
mm
fi'uit
11,13
too, excessive, over —
11,24
a candle
11, 7
there and back
III, 6
to have the face to
1,37
intimacy, intercourse with
II, 25
cloisonn6 ware (the name in the trade)
II, 7
a shop-counter
II, 6
pulpy, to pulp
in rags, tattered
1,41
11,31
disinclined to
1,11
I am much obliged to you for youi' trouble
I, i
you. Sir
II, 5
a eunuch
11,29
consumption
11,14
a tutor, master
I, 10
an old or skilled hand
11,39
you (to an equal younger than oneself)
II, 3
to trouble, disturb (polite)
I, 8
a father (laoi tx&, when=name of the
philosopher)
means, something to live upon
1,33
11,39
(an official title)
II, 4
to compel
IV, S
bother, trouble, annoyance
III, 6
trouble, anxiety
II, 2
(excuse me for) putting you to the trouble
11,14
to strangle
11,11
to estrange
II, 11
interest on money
II, 9
dreadful, also a common superlative
1,23
interest on money
II, 9
to notice, observe
II, 39
(also lii Uoi), at once
II, 32
trained, practised
III, 1
tidy
III, 15
polite, courteous
11,35
dynasties
1,29
(of a formality) Quite correct !.
inside
IV, 1
11, 11
plums
III, 19
a present
in, 17
GLOSSARY OF PHRASES.
167
liang 2 htin
Hang 2 h^uai
liang 2 shih
liang 2 sliui 3
liang 3 tsao *
liao 2 Zi (sic)
liaoi shihi
liao 2 «7joM (3)
lieh^ lieh
lien^ cliieh^
lien 3 p'en 2
Ziera2 t:^
lien^ 1/ehi
lin^ oliini
lin 3 feng 1
^jn 2 a7i!/i 4
Kb 2 ssS 3
2«7t^ 3 c/i{aa
lingi ch'inl
ling * mei *
ling i shu 1
ling^ siii
ling i ti^
ling 3 WS,
lingi wai*
ling * ya 3
Uu^ hsia
liii^ /i«i»l
KmI 7t«a2
Zi»2 fo
Zo2 ma 3
Zfll so
lo^ tzu
lou 3 tzH
liii tzU
lun^ liuW
M 'is.
mm
mm
mm
conscience II, r6
cool I, 24
grain II, 10
(or liang 2 s7tM')7« 3 ), cold water III, 15
the two parties to a case II, 19
to attend to IV, 1
to manage, transact, business II, 9
an end of it I, 33
rubbish, nonsense I[, 40
a series of successes II, 5
a wash-hand basin III, 3
a hanging screen, portiere III, 17
(to worli on, etc.) into the night III, 17
close to II, 29
the adjoining II, 38
before sleeping III, 7
at the point of death II, 16
to learn from (you what, — etc.) 11, 2
[Note. — So toned when followed by
object, but ling 3 chiao * when stand-
ing absolutely.]
your relative I, 38
your younger sister II, 30
your uncle (father's younger brother) I, 3
odds and eods, miscellaneous II, 21
your younger brother II, 11
a collar III, .")
besides, not included, extra II, 17
your friend II, 2
to leave, leave behind II, 16
to be careful II, 33
slippery ill, 16
vagrant, outcast II, 31
the six directions II, 39
careful III, i
to stroll II, 11
horses and mules II, 23
bother, trouble III, 20
a mule III, C
a basket III, 8
a stove III, 15
to take turns IV, 17
168
THE GUIDK TO KUAN HUA.
lung 2 pu
m^i
a cover of cloth {e.g., pillow-case)
III, 3
lung 2 t'ou
iim
a bridle, halter
III, 16
ma 2 chavg s
So ^
a hor-e-shoe
III, 16
ma 2 irh '
m i^. ^
a horse-hair
1,39
ma 3 p'ing 2
B,m
Ktablea
111,16
ma 1 »a
mw
to smooth, stroke
III, 10
mo 2 shengrh^
W 11511
twine, hemp-cord
III, 14
ma 3 f en ji 4
^,m
stirrups
III, 16
mo 3 f 'ojj
m yti
a landing-place
11,28
;Ka 2 4'KB,9 3
M,m
a closetool
III, 8
woiS 7jsia
MT
to buy oneself—
II, 23
moiS /(WO -4
Mn
to buy goods
II, ;ii
moi-i 7m/o4
mm
to sell goods
ir, 2
moi* Jtei
mtPi
to sell to
11, 32
mot 3 moi
Mm
trade (but mois moi*. when=to buy and
to sell)
I, 3
mai2 mo
mm
to Ignore
I, 30
mtf?t2 A'djjS
mu
(of speaking) profusely
IV, 5
9nfl»*ma?7j' (sic) t§ t§ $£
by and by
I, IS
ma«3 iH
mm
all over the place
1,43
maiig^jan^
mr^
at a loss
IV, 13
mail" fang
^m
a w.-c.
11.29
mao * J 4
M^
trade, commerce
HI, 12
j»a8* mci*
MBfc
at random, inconsiderately
1,18
moo 2 ping
^m
a defect, blemish, fault
U, 17
mao 2 shaurJi l
^tt-js
the fur of skins
111, 10
mow* s/iiA
»^
hasty, incautious
11, 33
mao 2 s«i2
^•M
Jl w.-o.
III, 8
moo 4 tzU
a hat
111,18
mi-i 2 eh-iurJt 2
mM^
coal-balls
III, -t
meiSfe/ig(.^)
%m
every — , every time that
IV, 17
mei^jihi
%a
every diiy
IV, .=;
meii mei
um
a younger sister
11,30
meiS njpre(2)
4y.¥
every year
II, 12
n/fi 3 ^ae/t 4
U^
every month
II, 1
men 2 Jisia,
PIT
under the tuition ot
II. 39
meii^ li'ou^
f'Tn
gateway, doorway
1,28
lue'i^ viieni
nffi
a frontage
11, n
mSfi^ mo
nic
the puli-es
11. 2
men * ssU
Kim
P'JT
(also vieiti s.!a3), to bore or worry to death 11, 40
TO^«2 ting
a door-keeper, porter
IV, 5
mini tzU
p'i^
(in certain phrases) the family, household
11,17
GLOSSARY OF PHRASK8.
169
«ti3 lirh*
^ ^ 5i Srains of rice
III, 7
miiio 3 mano 2
mm
far separated
IV, 20
miiiii 3 oli'lang
3) j^ 'jili
under constraint or compulsion
III, 18
mieii^ chieni
Mii
to See personally
IV, 5
miea* chiu^
"IfiJ Jl^
to beg personally.
IV, 5
mien 2 hua
#. 7E
cotton
1 1, S3
mien* lingi
M ffl
to receive in person
IV, 18
mien * pao 1
isti
(foreign) hread
iir, 3
mien 2 pei *
^i'iJ g/i
a linedcoverlet
111,17
mien i than 4
Ifll n
familiar by face
1,18
mien* thaiig^
M iifi
to consult personally
IV, 10
mien* t'aii^
Ml^
to ha\e a personal interview with
IV, 5
miea* tzS
m-f-
meal, flour
111, 7
min^ cJdeJi^
mm
intelligent, /juick
IV, 4
mingi jilt (*)
Wl H
to-morrow
IV, 4
m.ing 2 pai
BJ]f3
clear, to understand
1,35
ming 2 p'ien
r,}T
a visiting-card
III, 7
ming 2 sheng
^ s
reputation
11,27
ming 2 slieng *
^u^
celebrated
1,20
ming 2 «/u7i 1
^ m
a celebrated teacher
IV, 16
ming 2 J'jgjj
m^
to-morrow
I, i
miiu/i tsaoS
m -It
to-morrow morning
IV, 4
ming 2 ^za
^^ia
a name
1,31
»Bi«?2 tx'u(i)
«p^
one's number in a series
IV, 16
ming 2 yen 2
0JIM
to express, declare explicitly
IV, 9
moi/eii
^^P
it is certain that
11,11
moijo*
^?i
better to, just as well to
ir, u
mo 2 jAara^ 1
Mf®
to damage by rubbing or knocking
III,
mo 2 i«'e»^
mm
to dawdle
III, 4
OTo4 tueja
^m
the end of, the last
ir, 39
ma 4 ehiang
TtcE
a carpenter
II, 10
mu 3 c/i'in
®*ll
a mother
II, u
ma * Ziao
TK-f^
timber
II, 10
«J!t 4 ^ffljt 3
:^ri
planks
II, 13
OTK 4 tSO
Ticfp
carpentering
11, 17
na 2 e/iB
# flH
to caleh hold of, hold fast
11,30
na4/K2
i^sffl
to enjoy oneself
11,23
»a2 A'ai
mm
to take away
1,23
Ba2 Zai
m^M.
to bring
II, 7
Ma2^(ei2
^M
to capture a thief
11,22
nanijSn
^A
a man (as opposed to a woman), a husband
11,80
28
170
THE fiUIDE TO KUAN HUA.
nan2 Ttiieii^
nan 2 pien
nani taod)
nan^ tvei
7iao^ tai
nao * tsei 2
neii U
nengi Itou
Bi3 men
niarh 2 men
nieh 1 te'fi 2
nien^ ehi
mien 2 chHng 1
KJen 2 y^ji
«2fK 2 Aija
nwn 2 mai 4
M?,lS?i2 JJMJ
nien 2 tourh
niu^jou
niu 2 Mffli 3
niit 4 ^ijtj 1
rao 2 JMB^ 4
Bis 3 jgtl
nung i ch'ien, 2
nung * chii 2
mtng * t'u 3
2 cAa
3 Asin (sic)
<.M'-!/e«3
OM 3 ^>,B 2
pai 2 f /i'i (4)
^ai 4 /any 3
^ai* 7ma2
paii hui
pai 2 JiA
paii k'oi
mm
mm
% f\
^^
¥^
fffc f^
ineyitably I, 6
southern II, 9
do 3'ou mean to say — ? I, 44
to be hard on, ill-treat 11,40
the head III, 7
a robbery, brigandage II, 30
the Palace II, 39
to be able I, 34
you 1, 38
woman III, 8
to bring a false charge IV, 10
age II, 17
young IV, 4
age . IV, 4
the end of the year II, 25
agfed IV, 18
to read a book II, 26
age, years of age IV, 2
the harvest, year's yield II, 10
beef III, 4
milk III, 3
buttons, studs III, 5
unfitted to undertake (a high post, etc.) IV, 1
to misappropriate II, 22
to make great efforts I, 34
a woman II, 27
to handle (that ia, with Chinese, to make)
money ■ II, 39
to hold a private gambling-club II, 26
to handle soil III, 18
to swindle, defraud II, 26
nausea III, 7
to starve I, 13
ground arrow-root III, 19
by chance, should it happen that II, 13
to push one's way (_fig.'), to strive 1, 34
an unstamped Deed II, 8
to call and inquire after I, 4
a case for holding presents III, 17
to pay a visit to IV, 1
daytime, daylight II, 13
to pay visits or calls I, 10
GL0S8ABT OF PHRASES.
171
pai* iiie»2
pai 2 shih
pai i shih 1
paii sTioui
pai 2 fang 2
pai 3 fien
paii ts'aii
pai 4 toang
pai 3 yen 2
pai3 yeni
p'ai* cJi'ail
p'aii kuanl
p'ai^ lou
p'ai^ mai*^
p'ai* yiian^
pan^fa
pan i huo *
pan^ K3
^a» 1^0 2 (sic)
pan * sMh *
pan^ tengrh^
pan* t'ien^
pan^ tzH
pan 1 tz'U
pani yelii
pan 1 yiin (A)
p'an^ ch'a
p'aii^fei
pfaa^ liuan
p'an^ huoi
p^an 2 suan
p'an^ tiiani
p'an^ tzU
pang 1 pan W
pang 1 tzU
pang 4 tzu
pang 3 yang (*)
p'angi ohangrji
p'ang 2 pierh 1
^203 chia
pao ! cAi«fc 2
•MA
mm
nm
M^
Wil
■M'f
;f iP
;^X^^
*1^ipI!S
^^la
^m
^m
to make a New Tear call II, 4
a death in the family IT, 27
to make a student's obeisance to a teacher IV, 16
to make a birthday call I, 32
white sugar III, 3
daylight I, 21
cabbage III, 4
to make a call upon IV, S
salt III, 4
to give a banquet II, 39
to send an official messenger II, IS
to depute an officer II, 22
a memorial gateway II, I
to sell by auction HI, 17
to appoint a deputy IV, 6
a measure, proceeding II, H
to purchase goods H, 31
to deal with, act IV, 2
to drain a man of his money II, 27
to transact business I, 36
a bench III, 6
a good while, " some time" II, H
blows with a bamboo II, 32
relative rank IV, 16
midnight II, 22
to spirit away H, 31
to examine, check II, 22
travelling expenses II, 22
to spend (a holiday) IV, i
to take stock IT, 23
to think over, turn over in the mind II, 39
a judgment, decision IV, 9
a dish III, *
to act as Assistant IV, 16
castanets HI) H
Indian corn HI, 16
an example I, 36
the curtains of a cart HI. 6
at the side, close by H, 33
a security, guarantee IV, 9
a written security IV, 14
17a
THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA.
jifloichiehu W.tn
pani eJttii ^
sm
pao^&h'ui JS M
paoi chiiani S ^
paoifang fS ^
pao^fv. '^ IK
pao^ hao* ^ ?;|
paoiUuW f^-H
pao^jln, (jji X
2)ao 1 7iei
iLi^
^ao i kuan l ^^ 'h'
^a« 1 Ian ^ J^
^ao 1 p'ei ^ U§
pao-i piao'i- -f^ ^
^M«3 s^4 ^ -^
^at/l «/ia7ti7 ■(i^ 1"^
pao^ skiiigl '
■i^Pi
pao2t'a^ i^ iS:
paoStan-i^ ^^. fil
^aflltol Q 111
pao^ tzU
t^
paoitzS f S ^
^a()4 yiiig \
im
p'ao 2 7ifli 8
Mm
pel 3 ^ifM
It m %
^et 3 sliang 4
it J:
^ei* ii'ttml
MB
peii 100
mm
peii yirli'i
n m %
pel 4 yilti
mm
pei^ eh'angi
3Sft
p'H'i eh'wn^
i^m
p'ei 2 chiu^
'^m
p'eii/um
KMi
jreii huan^
^m
p'eii Ji'oi
'^'^
p'ei 2 jt)M 3
^m
p'ei 2 iliang
li? >.
p'eii t-aoi
mm
pen 3 chia
^m
penS ch'ien
^m
to finish, complete (a building, eto.)
■111,14
a gambling-houBe
n, 17
to be hardly treated
IV, .12
your wife
IV, 18
the OfiSce of the Peking Gazette
II, 2
a bundle, wrapper
II. 7.
your Finn
J, 3
to protect, afford protection
IV, 5
a security, guarantor
in, 1
to malte over to under contract
II, 13
to give notice to the authorities
11,38
to undertiike tlie mauagemeat of
IV, 10
to malie good (a sum, etc.)
ir,i9
to escort Treasure
11,29
the gloss
III, 10
to fold up
III, 9
to reoon.ruend for promotion
II, 5
a pagoda
1,22
a security-paper
IV, 9
to guarantee, be security for, rent
II, 1
hail
II, 13
a poster
I, 28
to recompense
II, 16
(of carts) to go anywhere
III, 6
northern
II, 1
to go north (to PeUing)
IV, 3
to be denounced to the Throne
11,22
a coverlet
1,25
in the shade
III, 10
Lad luck
11,20
to repay, indemnify
IV, 6
to lose money by a transaction
11,20
to keep one company at one's wine
III, 11
to highly apfireciate, be much impressed by
IV, 18
to repay, reimburse
IV, 9
to entertain gue.-sts
111,11
to make good (a debt, loss, eto.)
IV, 9
to hfap up
III, 15
to fit a book in boards
11,18
a blood relation
II, 9
capital
1,13
GLOSSAEY OE PHRASES. 173
if'r Kft
^in 3 ohm (*) ;^ ^
P«tt3iw ;^ S^
^e« 3 niera (2) ■^ ip
pen^. skill ^t? Ip-
;)e»3 iJW tJc Jt
^eft.3 yao (4) 7j^ g^
^p»3 yiieh* 7t<C JJ
p'enlshang P^ _£
p'engiyu M Hx
pi^ ch'ui Q§
pi* hang i {jj^ ^^
pi*hsul 'J^i^
piS huarhi ^ ^
piijan^ iji^fj^
pii kuan^ f^ |^
pukuow fifji: m
pii nani J^ |{|
pimping W' '^l
.pi 3 sftawj jJi _h
pii shihi tf^ B#
joi4 «7jm3 j|jj[ ^
^i* ««»?! JjJJ ^
^z 4 (Kara 1 ^ J|7)j
pii fungi ^ fffl
piitz'ui tiJc itb
i)j4i^ao(4) iCJ* gi
yi2 c/t'i ^^ S||
p'i^hsiang'^ ^ Sf@
^'i 2 /IKO 1& h.
p'iiku(3) j^Jl^
pH^U f^ H|l]
p'il leii ^ K
p'i^p'ing WuM'
pH 1 tan 1 lll^ 'i§,
p'Htingi It^
would, should
1,40
one's native place
IT, 26
motive, desire, intention
IV, 18
this year
IV, 8
in one's line
11,40
talents
1,36
of this iilace
11,15
should have, would have
I, i
this month
IV, 8
to spirt water from the mouth on
III, 5
a frend
I, 9
that place
n, 5
my native place
I, 1
my Firm
II, u
must, obliged to
17, 2
5J formation of a character
1,30
certainly, necessarily
IV, i
my residence (ofificial), (in Peking) our
Legation
IV, 10
my country or Government
IV, 1
to ma'ie one's escape
11,25
an abuse, act of dishonesty, "something
wrong "
IV, 10
to coini)are with
II, U
at that time
IV, i
my Office
IV, 1
shall not fail to
IV, i
an abuse
IV, 10
a pen-vase
II, 7
mutually, on both sides
II, 8
will certainly, will not fail to
1,35
a fur-lined cloak
11,37
temper, temperament
I, 6
a leather trunk
11,21
skins, furs
II, 2
the breech
III, 6
tough, strong
III, 9
a thunder-clap
1,23
to be iilucked at an examination
IV, 12
to compare notes
11, S9
a Note of Contract of Sale
11, 19
to bargain to buy or sell
IV, 8
174
THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA.
piao 1 cA'e l
piao^ chih
p'iao 4 tzS
pieh^ cMh
pieh^ cVu
pieh 2 jen
pien * cJiia *
pieni hsiu^
pien 4 lun <
pien^ o2
/(iuB* tzu
p'ienl ch'iao^
p'ieti 2 i (sic)
p'ieni tzu
p'in 4 oh'ing 3
^i»j 4 ch'iek 3
pin^ 3 c/iiem (4)
^ire^ 3 chill 1
^i«^ 3 ^j{ (2)
ping 3 ft'ttre^ 4
ping 3 mjny 2
^ JMJ 3 pao 4
^irei? 1 pvi
ping 1 i'aBy 2
ping 2 4'ieA
ping I ting
pin 1 fefi
jj'imj' 2 an (l)
^'JBJ 2 /jji 1
p'ingi hsini
p'ing^ Jt'oii^
p'ing 2 huo
po 1 eh'uan 2
^0 2 JjJMj
poi U
pt)i U(.3)
po^ m/tt^
p'o 4 Imai 4
SUA
)^?
Hit
■at!
Km
mm
^'i»^ 2 ch^ang 2 2p ^^
Will
^^
f6S
treasure-carts II, 29
handsome, elegant I, 38
a banknote II, 31
queer, strange, curious II, 25
elsewhere I, 17
other people H, 6
to realise the value IV, 9
a Hanlin Compiler IV, 15
to discuss, debate, argue IV, 6
a presentation tablet III, 17
the queue III, 18
by a coincidence, as it so happened II, 22
cheap II, 2
a card III, 17
to engage the services of IV, 9
habits, character I, 80
besides, moreover II, 26
to have an official interview with (a superior) IV, 16
to tell (a superior) III, 13
to report in reply IV, 8
to lay a complaint or charge against IV, 8
to report to (a superior) IV, 6
to report to (a superior) II, 22
the Board of War II, 1
sugar-candy III, 19
a Petition II, 5
a private soldier II, 39
a small, red, sourish, apple-like fruit III, 19
(occ. ^'i»^2 aral), quiet, prosperous, without
ordinary
proof
westering, near setting
to be believed, relied upon
a mere verbal statement
apples
a lighter, cargo-boat
the people, population
glass
a small present
your mother (complimentary)
to damage by breaking
11,36
1,35
11,16
II, 15
IV, 6
11,16
III, 19
IV, 7
II, B
III, U
1,32
IV, 16
IV, 6
eiiOSSARY OF PHRASKS.
175
p'o 1 to 1
pni chia
pvi 3 chMieh l
pv,^ Jfuaa3
pu^ kuoi
pu^ liao^
pu 3 pao *
pVi 3 ihang
pv, 2 shili
pv, 3 ting
pu 2 ii'o 4
^M 3 yao (i)
p^u 1 Tiai
p'ui Tiuei"^
y'wl h'ung^
p'u 4 ^ao 3
^'»2 tao
p'u 4 teS
««! tearajS
ga^ li
«a»4 JiuanS
sang 3 izit
«flo3 pai
sei k'o
lei ch'&s
sSng 1 jen
shal Jtao
sha'i- kiio^
tJm 1 ssH
shai * sliang
shan 1 hsi
slian 1 tung
shangi ch't'^
shang* oh'i^
sJiang 3 ohiao (*)
shang * eJbieJt i
shang * cMre *
Rk 3^ many, a large number of
"^^ Oh no ! No, no !
^ i^ to obtain a substantive appointment
^ ^ never mind —
^ ^ only, merely
^ ^ unexpectedly
^ ^ ^° I'sp^y (^ kindness, etc.)
fS -k *'° patch up
/f» ;^ a fault
"jro T" * patch
^ j|§ capital ! I, 38. Quite right ! Exactly !
^ ^ an oflScial's distinctive badge
^ ^ a tonic
§t ^ bedding
Sffii ©J ''"Ifis of a shop
^ ^ to go on a fruitless errand
gj f;^ substantial security Qit. shop security)
^ ^ grapes
fj ■Hp' a shop
^ ffjj tidy, (scarcely known in Peking)
" ^Jf Three Examinations (in separate years)
for the Graduate's degree
fA pB 'o " so down " from the Hanlin Yuan
(^ -P the throat, pitch of the voice
jW Vli to prepare for a guest
IbI W\ miserly, close
^ iSt to press for, dun
f^ A. a, Buddhist priest
\^ ^ building-poles
Jl^J Sni 0° earthenware pot
^ ?E (sometimes «/ja* «sfi3), to kill by violence,
murder
HS _fc to P^t out in the sun
^ iSfe 3' good measure, scheme, or plan
I-Ll ® Province of Shansi
ill 3^ Province of Shantung
_t J& to get, or put, into a cart
J^ ^ to lose one's temper
BinJ ^ a siesta
Jh ^ to go into the street
_t Jll to make progress, improve
IV
, 9
11,
, 9
IV
,16
I
, 16
I
, 9
XV,
, 8
I,
,40
III,
5
I,
12
III,
5
n.
1
H,
39
I,
7
II,
28
11,
17
III,
7
II,
1
III,
19
II,
2
I,
11
III,
18
IV,
H
IV,
15
I,
15
IV,
4
II,
30
IV,
19
I,
31
in.
11
II,
17
II,
22
III,
10
IV,
8
II,
31
III,
1
III,
6
II,
35
II,
11
II,
36
IV,
16
176
THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA.
shang * ching l
±^
to go up to Peking
n, 16
tliang i ch'Jl
±£'
to go up
1,22
ihang'i ch'uan,^
B^itt
a meichaat- vessel
IV, 6
sitangi eh'vani
±Sft
to go on board
11,21
tliang 3 feiigrh
«-S^5!
, a present "tip "
Iir, 18
shang 4 hsia *
_h>-
above and below, upper and lower
11, i3
shaiigi hsieni
1* ^
the High Authorities
IV, 18
shang 1 hsin 1
?i'iLN
grieved, distressed
11,31
fhfivg * hsiii i
±a
to get rusted
III, 15
gJiatigi kui
-hliil
last time
II, 18
thang * hiio
Hl^^
(and shang s huo), noon
1,20
ihangl i(,i)
P^M
to arrange in consultation
IV, 8
thang 1 jSn,
iSi A
a merchant
IV, 7
shang ijeni
±f|
to go to one's post
11, 3
sUang'i tiei
^ to
(and shang 3 kei}, to bestow on, give to
III, 6
shang 4 hung l
±x
to commence work
III, 20
sha?igi lai
±^
to come up
11, 28
shanq"^ Hang
15^1 :!
to confer or consult with
11, 8
shaiigi lien
fCJJt
to do one the honour or favour to
I, 8
shang I min^
B^iJ-^
the mercantile classes
IV, 1
shang T^ pani
mm
to consult and take action
IV, 1
shang * piao 1
± S -,
to make flesli (of horses, etc.) '
HI, 16
shaiigi pierh
Jb J2X yS above, tlie upper side
IV, 6
shang 4 shan 1
J-.lij
toasctnl a hill
11,15
sliang " shou (1)
n^
to do one tlie honour of accepting
I, .S2
shang i shui*
±m
to piiy in Duties
IV, 13
thang 4 «o 3
±m
to turn the look
111,17
shang i tang *
±+;^
to be taken in
I, 6
sAon^ 4 i'ie« l
±3c
Providence
I, 13
s7ian^ 4 i'oM
SlM
above, on the top
11,16
shang i tsoW
Jb^li.
to take the seat of honour
IV, 1
shang 4 ya 2
±#
the higher official circles
II, 6
«A»o3 c7jie7i4
i>M
how do j'ou do 1
T, 5
«7taol c/twCS)
•Bli
common Chinese spirits
III, 11
sAflO 1 «7iflJ!J
'M Jb
to light up
III, 15
thaoi^yeh
^2g
Master (So-and-so)
III, 2
sJii* chih^
#S?.
my nephew
11, 9
s?i$i eh'in,]!
^fa
my relative
1,38
sJietfa^
wt m
to take measures, find means
11,31
shei hsia
^T
my house
II, 1
sU*:i^
iSM
to become suspicious
IV, 7
GLOSSARY OP PHRASES. 177
sliei tii
@^
my younger brother
11,28
sAim^ mo
tSS
what
1,13
sMn 1 chin,
m'^
the gentry
IV, 16
slien^ Tisiini
mm
to try, hear, a case
IV, 9
slien 1 shang
^±
on one's person
I, 4
shen 1 t'i 3
mm.
the person, bodily frame
IV, 15
sheni tzH
mf-
the body
11,14
iheng 3 ch'eng
mm
a provincial capital
I, 1
shmg'i ch'ii
&m
to get angry
1,39
sheng * cMa i
mm
the Sacred Person (i.e. the Emperor)
IV, 3
sheng l fen
^.^
to fall out, quarrel
11,24
sheng l i
^m
calling, business
1,13
sheng ijeni
ma
to be promoted
II, 5
sheng ik'ou
ttp
beasts (horses, mules, asses, etc.)
11,12
sheng 'i lai'^
^5K
by nature, constitutionally
I, 15
sheng 1 leng 3
^B
raw and cold (of food)
III, 7
sheng i she i
^m
(of dinners) elaborate
IV, 1
sheng i sUhi
^m
to create trouble or disturbance
IV, 5
sheng* t'is
the Sacred Person (i,?. the Emperor)
IV, 3
sheng 2 txS
M ■?
string, cord
11,12
shSng 1 1/in, (l)
^ "a
tone of voice
1,15
shihi ch'ai'^
W^ ^
a Chief Examinership
IV, 2
shih 2 ch'ang 2
B^iffir
constant, chronic
11,24
sJbiJi,^ ch'en
mm
the time
IV, It
shih 2 ch'Sng
mm
truthful
1,11
shihi chiW
leiE
Ihe Dynastic Histories
1,29
shihi chiaol
■ffi:^
a hereditary friendship
IV, 20
shihi cJiiend)
*#
matters, affairs
IV, 2
shih 1 ohing i
^i
to owe an apology to
I, 1
shihi ch'ing
mm
a matter, event
I, 16
shihi ohu(.S)
ȣ
the person principally concerned in an affair II, 30
shih 2 ch'iiehn)
K«
a substantive post
II, 3
shihi chvng
^11
from first to last, all along
11,22
shih 2 fen
+ ^
wholly, totally
11,39
shihi foui
^w
whether or no
IV, 8
shih 1 fu
@Iif#
a school-master, teacher
1,28
shihi hourh
^1^^
a time, the time when
I, 16
shihi huan
IsgB^
to use, employ
11,23
shih'i huiW
iff
a Verse Club, Literary Club
IV, 17
shih i jih
^a
this day, or, on that (future) day
IV, 8
shihi lang
'24
#15
Vice-President of a Board
IV, 2
178
THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA.
shiWi ling
sMh 1 p'ei 2
shiJk 1 p'iao W
shili'^ taoi
xhUi 2 tou
sMh- t'ou
.s7ti7s2 tsai
shihi tuaiil
sJiih 2 tzU 4
shihi weis
shih'^ wen 2
sJiih i wu (*)
s/ii/tl yell
sMli 1 ying 2
s/tUM2 fljj
s7joM 1 ch'amg
slwu'^ ch'eng
sliou^ chilli
sliou i chih 2
sliou^ chin
shall 3 fengrh 4
sAoK 1 Aatf
.s7jott3 hsien*
shoul 7mo4i
shoui i
shov, i je 4
shou^ Jivng
shou^ shih
shou i ting 8
shu^ chan'i
shu^ cU'anij"
aliu'^ cWii
s?mi ch'id')
shu^ chieh
xhu ' fartg 2
shv, 1 fu
xhu 1 fu, 2
«7*!ii 7wm
i7i!4 1 /iJ«i
shui h'oui
shu 1 j»a»
mm
-Mm
a season of the year II, 28
excuse (my) leaving (you) II, 7
a lost Banknote II, 6
a robbery committed II, SO
to put to rights, to tidy I, 4
a stone I, 20
true, really I, 4
an affair, incident IV, 5
to be able to read II, 36
to regard as, consider IV, 6
verse and prose I, 30
affairs IV, 2
a Secretary in a YamSn II, 24
to miss receiving you IV, 2
well acquainted with IV, 18
the outcome, finale, result II, 23
harvest II, 12
to observe one's mourning IV, 15
to confer official rank IV, 15
a napkin, towel III, 16
the spaces between the fingers I, 44
an endorsement, receipt mark II, 34
the Chief Magistracy of a Prefecture IV, 1 1
to receive goods IV, 8
handicraft I, 13
to get overheated, have a feverish attack II, 28
handicraft II, 14
to repair II, 14 ; to pay one out II, 30
to be kept waiting II, 11
smoothed out, opened out III, 5
a Student Bachelor of the Hanlin IV, 15
a Despatch "Writer, Secretary TI, 24
heat of the sun I, 24
millet-stalks III, 14
a library II, 4
comfortable, in health II, 11
to accept a decision IV, 9
salary (of secretaries, etc.) II, 24
to lose money to II, 26
to rinse the mouth III, 3
a clerk, Writer IV, 6
GLOSSARY OF PHRASES.
179
shv, 1 p'u *
shu ■! shih (*)
ihu * shih i
shu 1 fan
shu 2 tang *
«/j?< 1 t'ao i
shu I yiiani
shua3 ch'ien^
shua i pai 3
shnal- shang
shua 1 txH
shua^ ya^
shuang 3 h'uai W
shui^ chia
shui 2 chiao (3)
shui * f 7wflo *
shui 2 o/ti/j 1
shui 3 ching
sJiuii hfiang^
sliuii k'oi
shui^ lui
shui 3 mien 4
shun.'t pieni
ahuoi chih'^
shuoi ho
shuo'^ huai
shuo 1 li'ai
shuoT- li^
so^ hsing
so2 i3
so 2 shu 3
TO 2 yM3
««S 1 ch'ing 2
siJZ 4 oh'uan
ssii -1 hiiang 1
««iZ 3 _/0M ■!
.s*fi2 Jiuei
ssU i mierh i
MS
;JcMi
mm
rot b5
rrW
mm
n}\\
nm
^^
a bookseller's
a magician, conjurer
to hold an acting appointment
easy, comfortable
to redeem a pawn
a book-cover
a college
to gamble
(sometimes sha^ pui^), as white as a sheet
to rub on
a brush
to clean the teeth
to consent off-hand
brisk, cheery ,
what family '
freight
to sleep
who would have supposed ?
crystal
duties, dues
duties, dues
by water, a water-route
the surface of the water, sea, etc.
on one's way
to verbally inform
to reconcile
to speak, talk
(sometimes shuo l h'ai l) to come to, or,
bring about an understanding
to be reasonable, talk sense
just, simply
consequently, therefore, so
the subordinates of
all the —
the four seasons
private affairs or transactions
Province of Szeohuen
the villages round
to seem, seem somewhat
dead flesh, .^y. ii wretched creature
a dead man
^ on all sides, all round
11,18
II, 31
IV, 12
II, 9
11,17
II, 18
IV, 16
II, 25
11,27
III, 15
III, 5
III, 3
IV, 16
11,30
I, 38
IV, r
II, 29
IV, 5
III, 5
IV,
IV,
IV,
IV,
II, 18
IV, 6
II, 19
I, 6
11,29
11,25
II, 17
I, 15
IV, 5
I, 20
1,27
IV, 9
11,31
II, 39
IV, 9
1,37
11,16
111, U
180
THE GtllDB TO KUAN HUA.
ssS 1 skill
ssii * shu 1
SU' cilia,
su 4 jili (*)
sa 3 yiierli (3)
■mail i chaiig i
snail i cJh'ing l
suan^ p'an
suan 1 t'eng 3
J!Mi3 /io
swi 1 Jaa 2
sui 1 shwh
mi * jwWi 4
sungi U3
sung i f'iek s
tai ch'n
tai cilia I
ta i chia 4
to 3 cilia i
ta '1 cJiiao ^
tai chiehT-
ta 3 chien 1
taSfa
ta i hua W
tai i
taijcn
ta'i: liaiW
ta^ k'ai
ta i ho 1
ta ■* men 2
ta 1 ming 2
ta 3 ^ara
to 1 ^ar/t 4
to 1 fang l
to 3 ^ao 1
^
a
11
:k
n
^
M
A
Q
private affairs
11,18
the Four Books
11,40
lay
1,31
habitually
1,40
to know well, be well acquaioted '
ivith
IV, 14
^ a saying
1,39
to cast up accounts
11,23
to reckon up in full '
IV, 13
an abacus
II, 6
sore, aching
I, 5
conciliatory, agreeable
1,42
although, (also sui^jaii^)
I, 7
as one pleases, at will
I, 8
to accompany in attendance
IV, 15
1^ one's age
1,44
months and years, lapse of time
II, 24
to send a letter
11,36
to bid one farewell
II, 3
to send a present
III, 18
to send a card of invitation
IV, 14
a waggon, baggage-oart
III, 9
everybody, the whole party
II, 1
your arrival, your visit
IV, 18
to fight
II, 6
your teaching, your words
IV, 16
a main street, a high street
II, 1
to take a meal when travelling
11,38
to send (a messenger)
11,14
exaggeration
I, 6
thoughtless, careless
III, 13
the title of the higher civil and
military
authorities ; when preceded by the sur-
name becomes tajen 2, e.g., Li
3 tajen 2
1,32
(also to i Jiai 4), probably, in general
II, 3
to open (baggage, etc.)
I, 4
lit. the eldest brother ; you Sir
II, 8
the front gate, principal gate
III, 9
your name (cognomen), your reputation, I, i
5, IV, 16
mode of dressing
II, 37
5j to bear one company
1,14
to travel in company
II, 3
to make into a bundle
III, 17
GLOSSAKY OF PHRASES.
181
ta'2 jy'ei J§^ @E (of animals), coupled ; (of things), joined
together (ialp'ei) 1,14
ta^ mo
nm
to sweep
III, U
ta 2 ssu
nfB
(also ta 2 mt 3 ), to strike dead, kill by beatin
ig II, 15
tao swan(.i)
nm
to think, intend
I, 13
ta 3 tien
nm
to sort out in readiness
III, 17
ta 3 t'ing
n^
to inquire
II, 1
ta i tn'ai 2
XM
great wealth
II, 5
ta3 weii
fra
to hunt or shoot
11, 15
ta 2 yen s
nm
to make a bad bargain, be let in
11,20
ta i yen l
:km
opium
11,25
ta 1 ying
^m
to consent, agree, assent
II, 6
tai yu^
±m
a heavy rain
II, 12
ta* yueW^
^m
probably
IV,' 3
t'ai parh 3
mm^
a shelf
III, 7
tai < fu
A^
a doctor
I, 5
tai* lao^
1^'^
to take trouble for another
11,38
tai i lei
^m
to involve, get one into trouble
11,38
tai * ling 3
mm
at the head of, in command of
IV, 3
tali sliang
^±
to take with one
III, 8
t'ai2 ai(.i)
°§
your kindness
I, 8
t'ai 4 cUien (l)
an Imperial eunuch
11,39
t'ai 2 ckierh l
^Sa
a flight of steps
1,45
t'uHfuS
i&flr
your Style
I, 1
t'ai* sliihi
:fca
a Hanlin Compiler
IV, 12
t'ai * «/jo« (3)
*^
a Prefect
II, 5
t'ai* i'fli
;«:*
a lady, wife of an official
II, 37
t'aii yang
*ll
the sun
1,24
tan 3 tai
M;'c
presumptuous
IV, 3
tan 1 tai
3i#
to make allowance, be tolerant to
IV, i
tan'l- tsou3
m-M
lo travel alone
II, 3
tan I tzU
m?
a Note, memorandum
11,18
tan 3 tzi
M?
the gall, courage
11,23
tan 1 wu
Ifct^^
to delay, a delay
III, 6
t'an^ liorlii
m^%
1 a Chinese spittoon
III, 2
t'anl p'ei^
m^
to contribute one's share of a payment, be
proportionably liable for
IV, 9
fan 1 tsang 1
nm
to be extortionate
1,36
t'flm 2 ^a
mm
to keep or restore order
IV, 5
tang'^ ch'ail-
^ ^
to be in an official position
II, 1
tangl ch'ul
^^
at first
II, 2
tangi ch'ueh^
ii»
a, Chief or Managing Clerk
11,40
182
THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA.
tang 1 mien *
tang l nien 2
tang ^ p'u
tang l sJdlt 2
tangSs!ii7ifW(s\c)
t'ang 3 /jmo
t'ang^ Jiuan
t'ang 2 shang
taoi c¥v,
tao ^fa"
tao 1 lisi 3
Jflo4 hsieli^
tao 2 Jafl 3
ia«4 t'ai
taoi ti<^
tao i tsurh -l
tao I tzu
t'ao 2 jao 3
t'a« 1 jii?ig 2
i'aol 7iowl
t'aoS Imii
t'ao^ p'aoS
t'ao < shang
t'ao^ yeni
tei hsia^
t'iiid)
t'e 4 p'ai i
tSng 1 cJiaorh i
teng 3 7iou 4
*e»j 1 JmrJi, 3
i^ni/ 1 Jiuangrh l
icre^ 1 Zmmj
teng ^ miaorJi 2
J^«j 3 tzU
teng 4 isfi
t'ing^ ?isieh^
t'eng 2 /i'MM^ l
tii cJi'i^
ti^ chu^
mm
MM
its
mm
mm
mm
BT am
mm
mm
mm
mi.
to one's face, face to face II, 6
in former years II, 31
a Pawnbroker's H, 20
at that (former) time II, IB
to suppose it to be II, 6
if, in case of II, 11
(1) District Authorities, (2) Heads of
Departments II, 39
in Court II, 32
anywhere, everywhere IV, 5
to express thanks for a service IV, 19
to express congratulations II, 9
to express thanks II, 25
to trespass on (your) hospitality IV, 1
an Intendant of Circuit IV, 6
(or teo4<i(3)), as a matter of fact I, 26
rooms facing the main range in a Chinese
house III, 9
a knife III, 4
to take advantage of your hospitality IV, 2
to polish and refine IV, 16
to cleanse drains II, 40
leggings II, 16
to seek advice or counsel from IV, 18
to abscond II, 22
to put up into its cover III, 17
annoying, a nuisance III, 11
to find leisure IV, 18
(also t'e iii), on purpose I, 32
to specially depute IV, 2
a lamp shade or globe III, 15
to await IV, 5
riddles II, 40
light of a lamp II, 29
a lantern II, 25
the flame of a lamp III, 15
small weighing scales II, 36
a bench, stool II, 37
to copy out II, 38
to empty out III, 17
a Title Deed for land II, 8
the landlord, proprietor IV, 14
GLOSSABT OF PHRASES.
183
ti * fang
ti^ lisia
t'i^ hsia
Hi fmung
tii Itei
ti* mingrh^
ti i niu
ti i pan 3
ti 4 pao (?)
tii skill
tii pan^
ti 1 foil -
t'i^ hsing
t'li JiKngi
ti 3 mien C^)
t'«l tza
tiao 4 jen *
tiao i tu (4)
tiao i ssvi
t'iao^fu'^
t'iao 2 so
t'iao'i- tii
t'iao ^ tzu
t'iao ^ yang
t'iao ^ ytieh
tieh 2 fa
tieh^ thang
tieJi^ tzu
t'ieh 3 huo 2
tieni ehi
tien 4 cilia
tien 3 hsin
tieni liu
tien 4 pan W
tien* shing
tien^ skill
t'ien'^ ekia
t'ien^ Jisia
t'ien"^ M3
mm
mm.
mm
m^
mm
wn
MM
^^
lift
m m.
Mil]
mm
#±
mm
a place
beneath, afterwards
ou the ground
brothers
to hand to
a neighbouring landowner
JQ name of the place
land, land estate
a floor
a tipao
a site
a carpet
to bovr or hang the head
to remind
to act as a substitute for a servant, etc.
respectable
to shave the head
a ladder, staircase
to appoint to a post
to arrange, dispose
to kill or die by hanging
a hanging scroll
to incite, egg on
to And fault with, disparage
a strip of paper
to take care of the health
a Treaty
mode of folding
to fold up
a plate
ironwork
to bear one in mind, remember
inn-servants
refreshments
a tenant
to find, advance, provide (money) on account II, 10
to fill in with, fill up interstices with III, 10
a District Police Master II, 39
the day long I, 33
the world, in the world II, 25
natural or divine justice II, 16
1,20
II, 1
11,13
I> 1
III, 1
II, 12
III, 9
II, 8
III, 14
11,39
II, 1
III, 9
11,27
III, 4
III, 13
II, 25
III, 18
I, 22
11,24
III, 9
II, 16
III, 17
II, 11
:v, 8
III, n
T, 7
IV, 5
III, 10
III, 10
III, 4
III, 16
III, 18
11,29
11,36
II, S
184
THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA.
t'ien 1 p'ing
t'ien'^ shang
t'ien, 1 tan 3
t'ien 2 yiian (2)
ting i ant
ting * cJung l
ting * liuei
ting 1 ssH
ting 3 iffli
itay 1 tso*
ting 1 iifi
tingi yin^
ting 1 ^?i 1
t'ing 1 e/ticB
t'ing'^ liou^
t'ing i hsi^
t'ing 2 po2
t'ing ^ tang
tin 1 lien 3
iol Zi3
f 1 shoo 3
io 1 sAih 4 '
<o 1 tsan
t'oi cJi'ien(i)
t'olfii
t'o'ifus
i'tfl luuani
t'u 1 ^inijr 4
i'o 3 s/jajj 4
i'o3 io?jjr
toiiifu
tuu^ lou
toui Hang
ton 3 ^'fejr
ton 2 iffiji 3
i'oM * feng l
<'0M 2 Ttung i
i'otj2 mje»(2>
<'ou2 t'&ng
t'lm 2 ?U(?j 3
^±
as
IT?
tut
mm
®#
®^
ffi
balance-scales
to add on
audacious, dai-ing
fields and gardens
to decide a case
to set the watch
to determine, settle to
to nail fast
an official button
to order to be made
a nail
bargain-money, a deposit
to be in, go into, mourning for a parent
(sometimes t'itigi chieni}, to hear
to await
to see acting, hear a play
to anchor, be at anchor
properly done or finished
to be disgraced, discredited
grateful
punctilious
(also <ol s/jao(3), jol ahao, and vulg. tor
how many
officious
when?
to be in arrears with a payment due
to ask as a favour
Many thanks (for your enquiries)
to give up an engagement or situation
to plead illness in excusi;
satisfactory ,
satisfactoi-y
beancurd
to shake out
to shake out and air
a long, sleeveless cape
to make bold to, venture to
to expose to a draught of air
to give in a Statement of Antecedents
last year
headache
from beginning to end
■hi),
II,
in,
I,
IV,
ii>
II,
III,
II,
III,
III,
■ II,
IV,
I,
IV,
III,
IV,
III,
I,
I,
II,
I,
II,
I,
IV,
IV,
I,
IV,
IV,
IV,
IT,
I,
III,
III,
III,
IV,
III,
IV,
II,
36
39
13
31
8
29
3
17
22
19
9
19
15
4
4
11
6
8
11
40
3
38
25
33
19
4
2
15
5
4
8
39
10
10
10
9
10
14
4
I, 5
III. 20
SLOSSARY OF PHEASKS.
185
tsai huoi
tsa 2 men
tsaii chH"
tsai i chia 1
tsai 1 p'ei
isaii shen^
ttaii tso^
tsai i tz'ii 3
is'ajs chHng
ts'ai^ chv,
ts^ai^ feng
ts'ai^ iS
ts'ai'^ Jtan
ts'ai 2 hao 1
<s'ai2 tuan^
ts'anT- Ito^
ts'an^ It'uci
ts^ang l lifu 4
ts^ang l pan 3
tsfang 1 ying
tsao^ ch'i
tsao^ chienl
isao^ hua
tsao 1 pao 1
teaol t'a
ts'ao'i- hsin^
ts'ao 2 kaorh 3
ii'floS Kao4
ts'ao 1 sftoM (3)
i«'ao3 txiii
ts'ao ^ tzui
tse^ eM^
tsen^ mo
/I Jiuangi
mm
«^
If ^
mm-
mm
m
general, miscellanous
we (you and I)
in the Banner Corps
at home
Au revoir, Good-bye for the present
included
benefits, acts of generous kindness
(of duties, work, etc.) incumbent on, laid upon IV,
to be present, be of the party
here, in this place
natural talent
a rich man, a capitalist
a tailor
suspicion, doubts
abilities
of high ability
deficient in ability
to denounce to the Throne for dismissal
ashamed
the ofiScial " chest " or Treasury
the cabin-boarding of a river-boat
flies
(or tsao 3 eh'i), early
an early meal on a journey
good-fortune
j8 $K to meet with one's deserts, to serve one right II, 31
mm
M it'
W' Wi % i
/^. m
ts'engi teng
tso^ ch'ing
tso i clmng i
tso * lisia
26
mm
to spoil, damage
anxiety, care
I a rough draft
fodder
integrity
my Style
irregularly, unceremoniously
to select an auspicious day
how?
to add lustre or brilliancy ; an stddlticmai
distinction
a stumble, check
to name one's own figure
a standing clock
to sit down
n.
2
I,
13
n.
24
n.
3
IV,
4
II,
9
I,
iO
nIV,
4
II,
39
IV,
2
IV,
4
II,
23
in,
19
IV,
18
I,
35
IV,
2
IV,
1
II,
22
II,
5
II,
22
II,
28
III,
15
I,
4
II,
38
III,
7
:t II,
31
I,
22
III,
8
II,
38
II,
29
I,
36
I,
1
IV,
16
IV,
16
I,
16
IV,
17
IV,
12
11,9,
24
n,
,14
II
, 9
186
THIS GUIDE TO KUAN HUA.
tsoi hui-i
tso i kuu 3
tso 'i liv,aii 1
tso * lien 3
tso i pao 3
tso 4 sMh 1
tso -i sMh i
tso * i'ojij' 1
tsoi t'ang-
tsoi tHen
tsoi tsei^
tsou^ lui
tsou i ming -
tsou i ts'an !■
tsou 3 tung
ts'ou 4 oh'iao s
ts'ou 4 pan i
tm^ ai*
tsu' chieni
tsuT- lisia
tsni hsini
tSK^ Itei
tsu 2 p'ing 2
toil tzu
ts'u 1 chih i
its'wl AmoS
tsui 3 ^a
tsKi 3 ying i
ts'ui^ t'ao^
ts'ui i tsaarh 3
tsun 1 chao-i
tsun 1 Afflny 2
tsun 1 /urns' *
isM»l hsiln^
tsun'^ ii
tstml Jiuei
tsun 1 miyig i
tsun 1 pan *
ii'MJti cJmang
mm
^^
mm
mm
JS#
JSM
as
fflvS
iif E5
mm
mm
At
m
■M
^
l^ffi
(of olubs, etc.) to meet
IV, 17
to do work
1,39
to be an official
1,35
to be creditable
11,17
to be guarantee
III, 1
a, Chief Bsiamiuer
IV, 12
to be employed on business
I, 8
to make soup .
HI, 4
to bold a Court
II, 35
yesterday
I, i
to thieve
11,35
to make a journey
11,29
to memorialise the Throne
IV, 1
to impeach to the Throne
IV, 5
to relieve nature, to be moved
1,25
a coincidence
IV, 14
to raise, And (money)
IV, 19
to impede, obstruct
IV, 6
obvious, apparent
IV, 2
to take on rent
II, 1
credible, to be believed
IV, 6
to rent or lease to
II, 1
reliable
IV, 6
rents
II, 8
to be roughly acquainted with
IV, IS
heavy
III, 9
mean, ungenerous
1,45
heavy manual labour
III, 18
blows on the mouth
11,35
stubborn, argumentative
111 15
to press for (a debt, etc.)
IV, 10
J^ dried and crisp " Chinese dates '
III, 19
in accordance with
IV, -,
your place in .the family
I, -i
your surname
I, 3
to follow, be guided by
IV, 4
your view or opinion
IV, 8
honoured, honourable
11,39
to comply with (your) wishes
IV, 4
to act as instructed
IV, 10
a village
11,30
GLOSSABT OF PHEASES.
187
tsimffi ?iS
ts'ung - ch'ang 2
ts'ung 2 hsin l
ts'ung 1 »iia^
ts'ung 2 «).M(7 4
ts'ung i tz'u^
tu 3 chang *
<!<3 (■/jt(2
<«2 i/jMl
<?< • ini
tu i t:u
tu 2 yao *
<'m 2 /a 2
t'ui mo
t'u 3 JUMJ'A i
tnan 1 c/tera^ (4)
tuan 4 e/i/K 4
fiiJijii ling*
t'lli Chiang 3
tni't chin*
tui'i- fang
tm* kei
tui 4 lien 2
tjli 4 «Ac!« 3
f ■?<'; 1 ch'eng 2
i'MJ4 huani
t'ui* hui~
t'lii'^ h'ai
t'ui 4 ^'i'ao (4)
fuH t'ln
r'uil tz'B
t'lin 1 yen i
iare^ 1 chia
tung 4 ch'ing 2
iaBj4 «/joj4 3
tung 1 i'ieK
<'«M^ 2 ch'uang l
i'MW,^ 2 7(sj 3
it ^
^«
IS*
IS m
fj if
footsteps, whereabouts IV, 20
general control or management ol IV, 2
permanent, thorough, well-coDBidered IV, 9
anew, over again \\l^ 16
able, clever n, 26
to obey orders, do as one is told II, 9
from this time forward H, 25
a gambling-debt u 26
a gambling-saloon n 26
Governors-Gpneral and Governors IV, 5
to study I 29
girths III, 16
the stomach II, 33
poison, u poisonous drug II, 25
to acquire undeserved — IV 16
saliva, expectorations m, 2
local products m, ig
(and i«o« ' c/i^«^ ^), correct 1,30
to have foretold a thing II, 17
to adjudge that — shall IV, 9
to discuss between (themselves, etc.) IV, 7
agreeable to, having a liking for II, 11
a store-room III, 10
to transfer (something received) to 11, 32
•scrolls III, 9
(of the game of mnrra), Quits ! II, 39
to exhibit, display, the fullest IV, 18
to refuse and return (something) to IV, 8
to refuse a,nd return (something) to IV, S
to push open or apart II, 29
a bad or spurious Note II, Zi
to repudiate IV, 8
to decline (a present, etc.) I, 32
to swallow opium II, if,
the master of a household II, 9
to excite the passions I, 14
a thing, object I, 9
to use force II, 39
winter 1, 27
schoolfellows I, 28
(of congratulations) The same to you ! IV, U
188
THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA.
t'ung 1 hsiang 2 Jg ^
t'ung''
fungi fisiao^
t'ung I hsing (2)
t'ung 2 jin
t'ung 1 It'ai
t'ung 2 nien 2
t'ung 'i p'an*
t'ung 2 s7t^» 1
t'ung 1 ia
<«K 1 ch'ing 3
isS* huarhi
tziiijan^
tzH 4 Aorfi 2
i^fi* k'uei*
tzUt^ pao (4)
iziZ 1 *7if flj 1
izii 4 t'ith^
tzS 4 ts'ung 2
i«S4 ^j«l
isS 4 yg)'/t 3
fe'fi 2 ch'i
fo'fiS c74'm4
i2'fi4 AoK
tz'ii 2 /isi«(/ 2
t«'« <• jihi
tz'ui !iuan^
tz'i 4 Ituang l
ii'u 2 «7ji/j
to'fis s/ji7j4
iz'fiS te'M4
i«al h'u
mai 4 Tiang 2
«)ai4 hsiang
maiijinW
mn
mm
m ±
mm
af/12
-+- EI
if ft
^a
to send an identical Eeport tD one's various
official superiors
a fellow-countryman, fellow-provincial
to be conversant with
current everywhere
companions, colleagues
to clear, free from obstructions
of the same year
an assistant Sub-Prefect
the same body or person
conversant with
(or t'ung^ jung''). as a concession, by way
of obliging
oneself
to move (an official equal) to —
a written Agreement or other document
scrolls of pictures and characters
naturally, of course
oneself, by oneself
self-shame, to feel painfully conscious of
to advise (an official equal) of
to giie rise to, be the beginning of
to breed, create, trouble
writing copies, rubbings from inscriptions
from
enunciation, pronunciation
a phrase, expression
crockery
this place
to attend on
to take one's leave
the following day
to throw lip one's employment
to accord (one) the honour of (your) company IV, 14
firm, strong m, 17
this matter iv 8
this occasion jy g
to chaff, banter, ridicule i\ 39
lowlying land u 12
an outsider, not in the business II, 13
another part of the country II ig
outsiders, strangers n 26
11,
3»
n.
31
IV,
20
T,
17
11,
24
III,
16
II,
24
n.
3
IV,
4
II,
9
IV,
7
I,
11
IV,
5
II,
14
I,
19
I,
15
III,
2
IV,"
* ]
IV,
3
IV,
10
IV,
5
I,
29
IV,
2
1,15,
17
ii,
39
III,
9
IV,
7
III,
1
II,
3
IV,
II,
24
GLOSSARY OF PHRASES.
18^
wai i jen i
wai 4 inierh i
wai i pierh
wai * sMng (3)
wai * Pou
loan i anl
wan 2 ch'ing i
wani fen *
wan 4 « 1
wan i nan 2
ivanS thang
Wang 3 liou*
wang 4 hsiang 3
wangi li'anii)
wang 3 Jmi
wang^ lai-
wang^ yeh
wei^ eh'i
wei^ ii
ivei^ Hi
wei i mien 3
wei^ nani
wei 3 p'ai (*)
wei 2 iMag l
weii tao
wei^ tzii
wei^ yiian
wln^ chui
w&n^ ehttng(*)
wen * hao 3
toc»2 Jigii
roe»2 sjm
loen 3 tang
wen^ few 4
MO 3 m^/l
mo 1 ^'eny
MM* ch'ai^
wui ehien(i)
mm
^%
mm
US'.
mm
a provincial appointment
11, 8
provincial officials
1, 36
externally
1,44
outside, out of doors
I, 5
the other provinces (viz., not that where
speaker is)
the
11,16
outside
n, 2
perfectly quiet, altogether at ease
IV, 13
to make full payment
IV, 7
in the highest degree
IV, 14
1 in WfiW, just possible
11,14
very difficult, impossible
IV, 9
late, in the afternoon or evening
I, i
afterwards
III, 2
to be over eager or anxious to
11,23
to go and see ; to visit
II, 2
the honour of your visit
IV, 14
coming and going, to and fro
IV, 6
His (or Your) Highness the Prince
IV, 17
the game .of wciohi
11,40
a, slight attention
IV, 1
to assist, be of service to
11,31
inevitably
11,33
to be in difficulty or trouble
II, 11
to depute, delegate
IV, 5
for a living, as a livelihood
11,35
flavour
I, 9
the cover of a cart
HI, 6
a Deputy
II, 5
writing materials
HI, 17
dignified
1,38
to ask after one's health
II, 3
a play of civil history
111,11
a despatch
IV, 3
safe, secure
11,23
written charnoters, literature
IV, 20
we
1,13
a matshed
11,13
to interfere with, prejudice one's official
duties
IV, 19
articles, objects
II, 7
a play of military history
III, 11
190
THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA.
»i?i 2 lisii 1
m'm2 fen (4)
«)?( 4 ^i 2
!C)« 3 pien i
)«m2 ts'ai^
wu 3 t«i)
i«M 1 izS
wu 2 Mei 4
</fl 2 e/jM 2
ya 2 inpti
yal sltarli^
ya 2 t'ieli
ija 1 i'oa
jamj 3 cUang i
yang 3 cli'ien 2
j/fflMj 2 cli'ing "
yang 2 /a
J^ajlJ' 2 /JBMJ 2
yang 2 J^/i
ya't^ 2 mao 2
2/»?s^ 3 ping i
yang 2 s7ia«i7 1
yang 3 «4en l
yang ■* <2m
yangi yaoi
yao^ ckan^
yao'i cli'ien^
yao* cMii^
ya,o 3 chiin (2)
yao 2 liuang
yao^ hvaiig"'
yaoi p'u^
yao 4 s/i//t
yao 4 <i»^ 4
?/ffi(l 4 tzi
ye!i3 chi^
yeh 4 ching 4
2/e/t 3 c7»j« 1
ynh^ hsii
mm
y?!^
mm
SI gJiC
^^
^^
needless to — IV, 17
' (and toM2 luni"), no matter — 3, 34
unfortunately II, 11
must, must positively III, 7
petty military officials IV, 3
want of ability IV, 2
a corpse-examiner II, 38
a room II, 29
dull, "slow" ' 11,39
your wishes, instructions IV, 4
a YamPn II, 1
(of the sun) just setting over the hills III, 10
a Government licence II, 12
a maid-servant III, r.
a Yamgn runner II, 30
to rely upon, trust to IV, 16
foreign dollars III, 12
foreign (non-Chinese) affiiirs IV, 18
(and yang ^ fa), mode of preserving health IV, 1
a foreign firm II, li
foreigners IV, C
sheep's wool III, 10
to nurse (one or oneself) in sickness II, 14
a foreign merchant IV, 8
to take care of one's health II, 11
a pattern [I, 7
foreign opium II,- 23
a druggist's 1 1, 2
to take money, to bo venal I, 35
important, material I, 9
cantankerous, surly H, 24
to shake, jolt III, 17
to ask exorbitant prices III, 19
a dru.^gist's JI, 17
a key m, 10
to insist on having H^ 21
the uppers of a boot m^ 5
a pheasant u^ 15
late at night u^ 28
a wild boar u, 15
(also yeh 2 hsii ' ), very possibly, perhaps, it
may be H, 34
GLOSSARY OV PHRASES.
191
ych^ mao^
yeh* tso
yen 1 chH i
yen^ c/i'i/t*
yen 3 cJiin 3
yeu^ ching
yen^ ohuarh^
yeni fang *
yen 3 horh 2
yen a lei-t
yen" fa*
yen " ming 2
^ft
ti
«6 IV^
WOIJ
ycreS «}o4
mm.
2/en 1 p'cirh "
mm
yen 3 se
m^
yen i skill 1
&m
?/«» 1 t'u 3
M±.
yew 2 i'M 2
ii
2/eB2 yijs
3 an
j/jn 3 chien W
51 M
yini eJi'ien
il^
yin'^ chuangi
^^
yin 2 hao i
ISH
yin 1 hsin W
^ff
ym2 Jtain
mm
yin'2 Hang
mm
yin " p'arh 2
im
yin 2 p'iao i
yini si
ipl
yin 2 sMli 4
I^STR
yin 3 ghurli *
mm.
yira 2 fe«
m=f-
yira* tzu
EP^
yin^ tz'ii^
ISlJlb
yin''- wei
EI@
ying 1 liuo '2)
mm
j/in^ 2 57j^»^
m^
f/My 1 te»^ 1
Ui^
ying 1 yara^ 2
li?¥
ying'^ yiinW
ll;fc
a hare
work at night
the sallow complexion of an opium-smoker
to give strict orders
strict
eyes
^ cigars
to inspect and release
^ a salt-cellar
tears
a route
to state expressly
to rub ink
S a pipe-tray
colour, colouring
to hold an inquest
opium, "drug"
the road, journey
conversation, colloquy
an Audience
money
a dying declaration
a Bank
information, news, intelligence
a letter of advice
money
j^ the value of silver
a bank-note
oil for sealing
the silver market. Exchange
^ amount of money
silver, sycee
a seal ; also, in certain phrases, loans for
short periods
owing to this, therefore
because
England, British
tricks
(also ying 1 tang), ought
the Mexican Dollar
to promise to do as asked
II,
15
11,
li
II,
25
iv;
5
I,
30
I,
44
III,
7
IV,
11
III,
3
II,
31
IV,
3
IV,
9
IV,
17
III,
7
I,
12
II,
16
II,
33
IV,
3
IV,
19
II,
17
II,
19
n,
16
11,
6
IV,
5
II,
36
IV,
13
III,
12
n,
6
II,
7
III,
12
II,
8
n.
2
ii>
35
IV,
9
I,
1
IV,
20
I,
34
I,
42
III,
12
IV,
5
192
THE GUIDE TO KUAN HUA.
yu3 eh'i^
yu^ Bhih(X>
yu^ chungi
yv,^ hsieni
yu 3 jiU 4
yu^ li
yu^ muW
yu^ ni^
yu^ sliou
yuS suii
yii^ wail
yu^ wang *
yu 3 yiian "
yiii ch'i
yii 2 cTiien W
yili chien
yii 4 lisien i
yiii pei
yii i pien *
yii^ than*
yii i skill
yu * shili ^
yii i so (S)
yii ■! ting 4
7/1(4 t'ou
yiii yeni
yiian^ cliHn'^
yiiani ch'ingl
yiian l cJi'H
yiiani lisien d)
yiian ^ i(sic)
yiian^ i
yuan^ liu
yUari^ lai(^)
yiian ^ nieni
yiian ^ paoi
yiian 2 pen, W
yiian I po"
mm
m m
%n
W H
jS M.
mm
mm
mm.
mm
^ii- on
mm
m^
mm
mm
7C^
a no
mm
to impede, cause obstruction to
to be augi-y
oiled paper
to set a very high value on
limited, a limited number or amount
on an early day
to travel, make a tour
to act as private secretary
greasy, sticky
sweat and dirt
to idle
(of scholarship), sound, thorough
to travel for pleasure
hopeful
there is a predestined connexion
objects of art
my opinion, view
to meet with, come across-
beforehand
to prepare
at a convenient opportunity
an Imperial meal
a Censor
when a matter occurs
a lodging
to decide on beforehand
taro
an Imperial Banquet
a distant relative
dead black
a wrong, injustice
in the first instance
(to say) a word, " breathe a syllable "
(and yiian * i 4 ) willing
a cause, reason for
originally, in fact
to forgive, malte allowance for
thoughts of those far away
the original statement
original
(of learning), profound and extensive
IV, 6
1,35
III, 17
IV, 1
III, 19
II, 5
IV, 5
IV, 15
in, 11
III, 16
1,33
IV, 12
IV, 17
II, 11
IV, 1
11,17
IV, 8
II, 20
IV, 4
I, 32
IV, 20
11,39
II, 39
IV, 1
II, 22
II, 5
III, 4
11,39
II, 20
III, o
IV, 9
II, 9
11,26
11, 8
II, 2
1,25
IV, 2
IV, i
IV, 6
11,24
IV, 15
atOSSARY OF PHRASES. 193
yiiani shang WC Jc at the Governor's Yamen (ot Viceroy's) 11,38
yilan 3 sung * iS, ^ to accompany one far IV, 20
yuan 2 tzU @ "T* a garden II, 8
yilan itzS te a courtyard 11, 7
yiian 2 yang ■i IS, ^K the original sample IV, 8
yiieli, 1 cJiH 2 HUl ^ the time agreed on, the due date IV, 19
yileh* eh'u^ ^ f/J the beginning of the month 11,18
yiieh'^ hui w!I W to invite III, 6
yiieh^ kuany^ " ^C the moouheamB 1,23
yiieh i liang fi ^ moonlight 1,21
yiieh 1 ma Sftl ^ to think likely, suppose il, 8
yiieki shany iBil _t to invite IV, 17
yiieh i fis /i *K the end of the mouth II, 18
yiielii t'ourh- ri SB 5o the beginning of the month III, 9
yiin i fh'l W: Mt luck II, 15
jCiWX to consent IV, 16
^ iB viscous, semi-liquid III. 7
yiiii^ nan Sm province of Yunnan 11,24
yiin i ton ^L^ a box-iron HI, 5
yiln^ ts'ai S^ clouds 1,23
yung l cM 3 ^ ^ to crowd IV, 5
yimgich'ien ffl^ a Salesman's fee 11,12
yungiJiiiang ffi J® an outla^y, call fw laoney 11,21
y«Kjr 1 ftsira ^ ^uk to take pains I, 6
yung i tonj l IB ■% to work, study III, ^
yiingis?ta?i^ ffl ]^ to " partake of refreshment " 11,39
yungi yiiatiS "^ ^ forever 11,27
yu'«2 /tgiiS
y«»2 ijjj
26
Printed by Kelly & Walsh, Limited, Shanghai.
Live Music
Archive
Librivox
Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland
Museum of Art
Internet
Arcade
Console Living Room
Open Library
American
Libraries
TV News
Understanding
9/11